JP2011092679A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of excellently improving the degree of attention to a game. <P>SOLUTION: In a main controller 81, holding information is acquired when a game ball enters an operation port provided in a game area. Then, on the basis of the fact that winning/losing is determined for the acquired holding information, the variable display of patterns at a main display unit 43 is started, and also the variable display of symbols at a symbol display device 41 is started. In this case, in the situation that two or more pieces of holding information are held and stored, a holding notice for reporting the contents of the holding information which is not a winning/losing determination object is sometimes executed at the symbol display device 41. Also, while whether or not big winning numerical value information to be referred to in winning/losing determination and the holding information match is determined when executing the holding notice, confirmation processing for the holding notice is executed within the range of the residual processing of normal processing. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a big hit gaming state is triggered by the fact that a gaming ball has entered the start ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect corresponding to one game is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is a so-called winning game state winning transition, for example, after a display effect for one game is executed, for example, opening and closing of the variable pitching device provided in the game area is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting entrance part while the display of the change of the pattern is being performed, information used for the winning lottery is held and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. There are pachinko machines that are designed to be used. In the case of hold storage, after the display of the variation of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and stored, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a game in which a game ball is fired so that a ball enters the starting pitching part, and a lottery result when a ball enters the starting pitching part is hit. It can be said that it consists of a game of confirming whether or not. With respect to the former game, the player pays attention to whether or not the starting ball entering portion occurs until the upper limit of the reserved memory is reached, and with respect to the latter game, the variation display mode of the pattern However, the player pays attention to whether or not it is likely to be a stop result corresponding to winning the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game. In order to diversify such games, in the game of launching game balls as described above, a method of diversifying the flow mode of game balls in the game area can be considered, and the lottery result of each game round as described above In the game of checking whether or not the game is successful, a method of diversifying the display pattern of the display effect performed at each game time can be considered.

  However, since the game area is limited for the former, there is a limit to diversifying the game, and for the latter, even if the display pattern in each game is diversified, the degree of attention to the game There is still a limit in terms of increasing In order to solve such a problem, it is necessary to diversify the game by paying attention to elements different from the rolling mode of the game ball and the display pattern of each game time.

  However, in gaming machines, the processing load on the control device tends to increase. Then, in diversifying the game focusing on the above different elements, it is not preferable that the processing cannot be performed satisfactorily in the control device. Considering this, diversifying the game focusing on the above different elements. It is necessary to plan.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention according to claim 1 is a gaming machine provided with a control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
In addition to determining whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the allocation information, a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information;
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. Pre-identification means for pre-identification;
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means to
With
Regular processing can be performed periodically, and predetermined processing is repeated between multiple periodic processing.
Furthermore, the acquisition process of the special information by the information acquisition means is performed in the regular process,
The destination specifying unit performs at least a part of the destination specifying process for the acquired special information when the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodical process. Comprising post-end execution means for executing in the predetermined processing after the
The after-execution means is configured to acquire the information in a situation where the processing for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition means in the regular processing and the specific processing is not performed on the special information. When the process for obtaining the special information is performed by the means, in the one-time specific process in the predetermined process, not all of the special information is a process execution target but only a part of the process execution target And
It is characterized in that the periodic process can be executed when the execution of the specific process for which only a part of the process has been executed is completed.

The invention according to claim 2 is a gaming machine comprising control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
In addition to determining whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the allocation information, a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information;
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. Pre-identification means for pre-identification;
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means to
With
Regular processing can be performed periodically, and predetermined processing is repeated between multiple periodic processing.
Furthermore, the acquisition process of the special information by the information acquisition means is performed in the regular process,
The destination specifying unit performs at least a part of the destination specifying process for the acquired special information when the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodical process. Comprising post-end execution means for executing in the predetermined processing after the
The after-execution means is configured to acquire the information in a situation where the processing for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition means in the regular processing and the specific processing is not performed on the special information. When the process for obtaining the special information is performed by the means, the special information is set as the execution target of the first specific process in the range until the special determination is performed, and the special process is performed once in the predetermined process. In the above-mentioned specific process, not all of the special information is a process execution target, but only a part is a process execution target,
It is characterized in that the periodic process can be executed when the execution of the specific process for which only a part of the process has been executed is completed.

  It becomes possible to increase the degree of attention to the game well.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery determination. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a success / failure table. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows a reading process. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. The flowchart which shows a success / failure determination process. The flowchart which shows the setting process of fluctuation | variation display time. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the pending | holding advance notice control process in MPU of a display control apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the hold notice performed in the hold display area of a symbol display apparatus. The flowchart which shows the restriction | limiting cancellation | release process in MPU of a main controller. The timing chart for demonstrating a mode that execution of the confirmation process for a hold notice is restrict | limited. The flowchart which shows the winning process for the operation opening in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. The flowchart which shows the process for standby. The flowchart which shows the pending | holding advance notice control process in MPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the game times control processing in 4th Embodiment. The timing chart for demonstrating a mode that execution of the confirmation process for a hold notice is restrict | limited. The flowchart which shows the main process in 5th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows the game times control processing in 6th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in 7th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows the normal process in 8th Embodiment. (A) The flowchart which shows timer interruption processing, (b) The block diagram which shows the electric constitution in order to execute timer interruption processing periodically. The flowchart which shows a reading process. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of acquisition. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. 7 is a flowchart showing a hold notice control process. The flowchart which shows the main process in 9th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. The flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of acquisition in 10th Embodiment. The front view which shows the structure of the game board in 11th Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery determination. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 1st result display parts, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table for 2nd result display parts. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various game results. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of acquisition. The flowchart which shows the setting process of an upper side hold command. The flowchart which shows the setting process of a lower side hold command. The flowchart which shows an upper side hold notice control process. The flowchart which shows a lower side hold notice control process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the hold notice performed in the hold display area of a symbol display apparatus. The flowchart which shows the main processing in 12th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the main processing in 13th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the area for hold determination in 14th Embodiment, (b) The flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of acquisition. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows the setting process of a pending | holding command. A flowchart showing a reading process in the fifteenth embodiment. The flowchart which shows the normal processing in 16th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the normal processing in 17th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical constitution in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the power failure information storage process performed in main side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that confirmation of generation | occurrence | production of a power failure is performed. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the input port provided in main side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the winning detection process performed by main side MPU, (b) The structure of the 1st winning determination area, the 2nd winning determination area, the 1st post calculation area, and the 2nd post calculation area is demonstrated. It is explanatory drawing for doing. It is a flowchart which shows the winning determination process performed in main side MPU. (A) It is a timing chart for demonstrating the timing which monitors each winning information, (B) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the calculation performed when winning determination is performed. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the timer area | region provided in main side RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the fraud detection process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an electromagnetic wave detection performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the alerting | reporting and effect control processing which are performed with an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop determination process performed in main side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that a game stop state is set based on having detected an electromagnetic wave. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control process performed in main side MPU. (A) It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure regarding the electrical connection of a big winning opening detection sensor and winning IC, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the signal input to winning IC. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the input state monitoring process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the pending | holding information performed in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a special figure special electricity address table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power release process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power closing process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for demonstration display performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal power control process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout state reception process performed in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout output process performed in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process performed in payout side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the disconnection confirmation process performed in main side MPU. It is a timing chart for demonstrating a mode that the payout of a prize ball is performed, and a mode that the disconnection check of a 1st signal path | route is performed.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working port (first starting ball entering portion) 33, a lower working port (second starting ball entering portion) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, A main display unit 43, an accessory display unit 44, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 34. Is executed. The number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction, with the upper operation port 33 facing upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, winning in the lower working port 34 is impossible, and winning in the lower operating port 34 is possible when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and a predetermined game ball is likely to win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode (open / close execution state) in the internal lottery. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display unit 43, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning at the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is achieved. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the display is clearly shown. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 33 and the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 43 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 43. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  By the way, based on the winning of one of the operating ports 33, 34, the display of variation is started on the main display unit 43, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped once. It corresponds to. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the main display unit 43, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  The accessory display unit 44 displays a variation of the picture triggered by a winning to the through gate 35. As a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the through gate 35 is displayed. Explicit by display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variably displaying (or variably displaying or switching display) a symbol with a number as a symbol. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when variable display is performed on the main display unit 43, variable display is performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  A first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the main display portion 43 and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of reservations is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on. As described above, the upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, so that the visibility of the first holding ramp portion 45 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 42, a second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed when the second holding lamp unit 46 is turned on. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the function of each holding | maintenance lamp | ramp part 45 and 46 is fulfill | performed by the display in a partial area | region of the symbol display apparatus 41.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is operated by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 and an audio lamp controller 82 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power interruption monitoring board that monitors the power supply. The main control board and the power interruption monitoring board are made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound lamp control device 82 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. The sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 84 is configured to be accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the sound lamp control device 82, and the like from the rear. is doing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and storing various data, and even if a power interruption occurs, the state of the power interruption is maintained, and when returning from the power interruption, It is possible to return to the state.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. A RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power interruption monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, and the like are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power interruption monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power interruption monitoring board 205. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning winning entry portion (a payout corresponding entering portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, and the like. A plurality of detection sensors provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each other are connected to each other, and a winning determination (entrance determination) for each winning portion is performed in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 and also performs a support generating lottery based on a winning to the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power interruption monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an audio lamp control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command are output to the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  The power interruption monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and launch control device 98, and monitors the voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53 based on the launch permission signal output from the main control board 201, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 has predetermined launch conditions. If you are driven.

  The voice lamp control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the holding lamp portions 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display lamp portion 63 provided in the front door frame 14, and a speaker. The unit 64 is driven and controlled. The sound lamp control device 82 controls the display control device 212. The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 82.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, a plurality of variable display areas are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of variable display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order.

  Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the display screen G is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a normal jackpot result or a probable variation jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and if a probabilistic jackpot result occurs, a combination of the same specific symbols Is stopped. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. The

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. In addition, the type of the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the symbol with the numeral as described above. For example, the numeral itself may be variably displayed. May be displayed in a variable manner.

  On the lower part of the display screen G, a hold display area Ga is set. The hold display area Ga is divided and displayed so that unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum hold number when a game ball wins the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. Has been. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball wins the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is four, and in correspondence with this, the reserved display area Ga includes the first unit reserved display area Ga1. A second unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, and a fourth unit hold display area Ga4 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is 1, the predetermined hold image is displayed only in the first unit hold display area Ga1, and the game ball In the case where the number of holds when winning the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is four, predetermined holding images are displayed in all of the first unit holding display area Ga1 to the fourth unit holding display area Ga4. Is done.

<About various counters and reserved ball storage area>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates and fluctuates, a random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of the jackpot random number counter C1, and fluctuations in the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 A variation type counter CS that determines the display time is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 231, information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is obtained information storage when a winning to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 occurs. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as a means.

  The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. The numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 is stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information. Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 are stored on hold. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 43, and at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of whether or not is made is performed.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 299, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to zero. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the success / failure table, address information composed of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information composed of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, ten types of address information expressed in decimal numbers from “1” to “10” are set, and jackpot value information is expressed in decimal numbers as “7”, “36”, “67”. , “100”, “131”, “164”, “195”, “223”, “241”, “272” are set, and the address information and the jackpot value information are in a one-to-one relationship. It is associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical value information is included in “0” to “299”, which is the numerical range of the random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot value information whose address information is “1” is referred to in the lottery lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot number information corresponding to all the address information is determined in the lottery lottery. Referenced. In other words, there is one piece of numerical information for winning the jackpot in the low probability mode, and there are ten pieces of numerical information in the high probability mode, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/300, whereas the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the high probability mode is a jackpot than the low probability mode. The probability of winning is increased.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, (1) a winning / no-lot lotion mode in the corresponding lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Multiple jackpot results are set by making a difference between the two conditions. As above-mentioned lottery mode, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as described above.

  As a support mode, when compared with a situation in which a game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area, the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in an open state per unit time. The low frequency support mode (the low frequency support state or the low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (the high frequency support state or the high frequency guide state) are set so as to be relatively high and low.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a shorter time is selected as the reserved time that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low-frequency support mode. Is set to be.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in In addition, a secured time (e.g., on the display part 44 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 35) that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character releasing lottery is performed once. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, , Shorten the one time variable display time in the display 44 for an accessory), shorten the average time of the reserved time and increase the winning probability, apply any one condition or any combination of conditions Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Then, a normal jackpot result (low probability special game result) and a probability variable jackpot result (high probability special game result) are set as the distribution destinations.

  The normal jackpot result is that the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support frequency is high until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the support mode shifts. It is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. After the end reference count has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big hit state by that.

  In the distribution table, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but this numerical distribution is arbitrary. In addition, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball is high and the opening / closing execution is performed. It is good also as a structure which increases the type of jackpot result rather than said two types by providing a difference in the mode transfer destination mode.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. For example, the reach table is set so that “0 to 99” is numerical information corresponding to the reach occurrence win.

  Incidentally, in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is a game time in which the symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures) is provided, and the variable winning device 32 is in the opening / closing execution mode. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variable display becomes the special display result, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started and the stop display result is derived and displayed. The display state for causing the player to think that the display state is a variable display state that is likely to result in the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which possible reach symbol combinations are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the symbol variation display, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 6 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any one of the effective items is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the open / close execution mode occurs, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are displayed in such a manner that the main symbols having the same numbers as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. The change display of is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the variation display time on the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 41. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the main display unit 43 and at the time of variation start of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. In addition, when determining the said fluctuation | variation display time using the buffer value of fluctuation | variation classification counter CS, the fluctuation | variation display time table memorize | stored in the fluctuation | variation display time table storage area 222 of ROM203 is referred.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4.

<About various processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the game of each game is advanced by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 will be described.

  In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on, and transmits an interruption signal from the interruption monitoring board 205 to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). An NMI interrupt process activated by an input is executed, but the description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 10, first, in step S201, information input to the input port (input unit) of the MPU 202 from the detection sensor corresponding to the upper working port 33 is confirmed, and the input is performed. It is determined whether or not the winning signal of the upper working port 33 is input based on the information.

  Specifically, the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation port 33 outputs a HI level signal as a non-winning signal when a game ball is not detected, and a winning signal when a game ball is detected. The main controller 81 is provided with an inverting circuit, and when the HI level signal is output from the detection sensor, it is composed of 1 bit of the input port. “0” as no data is stored in the working port area, and when a LOW level signal is output from the detection sensor, “1” is present in the upper working port area of the input port. Stored. In step S201, it is determined whether or not “1” is stored in the upper working port area.

  If it is determined that the winning signal for the upper operating port 33 has not been input, the information on the counter area for the upper operating port in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 of the main control device 81 is used as the winning reference number information in step S202. Set. Specifically, the information on the counter area for the upper working port is set to “2”. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning signal for the upper working port 33 is input, 1 is subtracted from the information in the upper working port counter area in step S203. In a succeeding step S204, it is determined whether or not the upper working port counter area is "0". If it is not “0”, the process proceeds directly to step S206. If it is “0”, in step S 205, the upper working port winning flag (information of “1”) is stored in the upper working port winning flag storage area in the various flag storing area 234 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S206.

  In step S206, information input to the input port of the MPU 202 from the detection sensor corresponding to the lower operating port 34 is confirmed, and whether or not a winning signal for the lower operating port 34 is input based on the input information. Determine whether.

  Specifically, the detection sensor corresponding to the lower operation port 34 outputs a HI level signal as a non-winning signal when a game ball is not detected, similarly to the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation port 33. When a game ball is detected, a LOW level signal is output as a winning signal. However, the main controller 81 is provided with an inverting circuit, and an HI level signal is output from the detection sensor. If there is a LOW level signal stored in the area for the lower operating port consisting of 1 bit of the input port, and the LOW level signal is output from the detection sensor, the lower operation of the input port In the mouth area, “1” is stored as presence data. In step S206, it is determined whether or not “1” is stored in the lower working port area.

  If it is determined that the winning signal for the lower operating port 34 has not been input, the information on the counter area for the lower operating port in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 of the main control device 81 is used as the winning reference number information in step S207. Set. Specifically, the information of the lower working port counter area is set to “2”. Then, it progresses to step S211.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning signal of the lower working port 34 is input, 1 is subtracted from the information in the lower working port counter area in step S208. In a succeeding step S209, it is determined whether or not the counter area for the lower working port is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S211 as it is. If it is “0”, in step S 210, the lower working port winning flag (information of “1”) is stored in the lower working port winning flag storing area in the various flag storing area 234 of the RAM 204. Then, it progresses to step S211.

  In step S211, as other reading processing, the detection results from the detection sensor corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32, and the like are confirmed, and processing according to the confirmation result is executed.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, even if the MPU 202 confirms the input of a winning signal at the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, it is not immediately determined that a winning has occurred, but is set as a plurality of winnings. When the input of the winning signal is confirmed continuously over the reference count confirmation timing, it is determined that a winning has occurred. As a result, even if a winning signal is inputted once due to electrical noise or the like, it can be suppressed that the winning signal is specified as being generated. It should be noted that the specific value of the winning reference number is not limited to “2” and may be any number as long as it is plural, for example, “3” or “4” or more.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), after executing the read process in step S101, the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 35 is executed. In the through-winning process, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored on the condition that the stored number of stored features is less than 4 stored in the reserved role area. Store in the area. Further, a process for lighting the second holding lamp unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of stored memories is executed for the voice lamp control device 82.

  Thereafter, in step S105, after the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 is executed, the timer interruption process is terminated.

<Winning process for working port>
The winning process for the operation opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S301, it is determined whether or not the upper operation opening winning flag is stored in the RAM 204. When the upper operation opening winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S307 without executing the processes of steps S302 to S306. If the upper working opening winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S302.

  In step S302, the upper operation opening winning flag is deleted. In the subsequent step S303, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read, and the start reserved memory number N reserved and stored in the reserved area RE is the upper limit (in this embodiment, “4 ]) Or less. If the number N of start pending storages is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S307 as it is. When the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S304, and the start pending storage number N is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S305, the values (each numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are stored in the free reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE. The data is stored in the first reserved area, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the number of reserved memories added by 1 in step S304.

  In subsequent step S306, the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), recognize that the winning of the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 has occurred, and a hold described later. A hold command setting process, which is a process for executing a notice, is executed. This process will be described later in detail.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82. In the voice lamp control device 82, the first hold lamp unit is received by receiving the hold command. A process for changing the display in 45 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S301, a negative determination is made in step S303, or after the processing in step S306 is executed, it is determined in step S307 whether or not the lower operation port winning flag is stored in the RAM 204. . If the lower operation opening winning flag is not stored, the main winning process is terminated as it is. If the lower operating opening winning flag is stored, the processing of steps S303 to S306 is executed after the lower operating opening winning flag is deleted in step S308. In this case, by making a negative determination in the process of step S307 after the process of steps S303 to S306, the main winning process is terminated.

  In a configuration in which an upper operating port 33 and a lower operating port 34 are provided as operating ports in the game area, and winning to both the operating ports 33 and 34 can occur simultaneously, the upper operating port can be achieved by one processing of timer interrupt processing. It is determined whether or not a winning to 33 has occurred and whether or not a winning to the lower operating port 34 has occurred, and when winning to both operating ports 33 and 34 has occurred simultaneously, The information acquisition process in steps S303 to S305 and the process in step S306 are executed for the winning. As a result, even when winnings to both the operating ports 33 and 34 occur at the same time, acquisition of holding information based on winning to the upper operating port 33 and acquisition of holding information based on winning to the lower operating port 34 are obtained. In addition to being able to be performed accurately, it is possible to execute the hold notice process at an early timing.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on. As its outline, the processing of step S401 to step S409 is executed as a 4 msec cycle processing, and the counter update processing of step S410 and step S411 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, when a predetermined effect command is set, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82.

  In the subsequent step S402, a restriction release process is executed. The restriction canceling process is a process for canceling the predetermined confirmation process for holding notice in step S306 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The details will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S404, a game number control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In this game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S405, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In the subsequent step S406, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electric power support process, the information stored in the electric power reservation area of the RAM 204 is used to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 34a, and the display for the accessory The display control of the unit 44 is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S407, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply and launch control device 98. . Thereby, the game ball is launched toward the game area.

  In a succeeding step S408, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM 204. The power interruption flag is stored when the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed in the power interruption monitoring board 205 and a power failure signal is input from the power interruption monitoring board 205 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 202, and is erased in the next main processing. Flag.

  If the power interruption flag is not stored, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed. Therefore, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S409, that is, the previous process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S410, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. In step S411, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the power interruption flag is stored, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S412 is executed. That is, in step S412, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S413. After the access to the RAM 204 is prohibited in step S414, the power supply is completely shut off and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

  Here, even if the occurrence of a power interruption is specified in the NMI interrupt processing, the power interruption flag is not immediately executed, but the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM 204, and whether or not the power interruption flag is stored. By performing such determination after executing the processing of step S401 to step S407 in the normal processing, when the normal processing is executed after power recovery, the normal processing is always executed from the first processing. As a result, it is possible to return to the state before the power interruption without storing the address of the process executed when the power interruption occurred in the RAM 204 as stack information.

  Note that the configuration for determining whether or not 4 msec has elapsed in step S409 is not essential. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not the timer interrupt processing has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S404 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether an opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored in an opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game start process in steps S503 to S506 and the game progress process in steps S507 to S511. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The variable display flag is stored when the main display unit 43 starts the variable display, and is deleted when the variable display ends.

  If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S503 to S506. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the number N of reserved start storages is “0”. The case where the start hold storage number N is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 232. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the start hold storage number N is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 232 for the variable display in step S504 is executed. Further, in step S505, a change start process for starting change display on the main display unit 43 and change display on the symbol display device 41 is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S506, after the variation start flag (start execution information) is stored in the variation start flag storage area (start execution information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, the game number control process is terminated. The change start flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 202 that the change display is immediately after the start of change display, and is deleted in the restriction release process in step S402 of the normal process (FIG. 12).

  Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the change start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process in step S504 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the data setting process, first, in step S601, 1 is subtracted from the number N of reserved start storages. In subsequent step S602, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S603, a process of shifting data (that is, holding information) stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In the subsequent step S604, a command at the time of shifting, which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82 to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted, is set. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step 604 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice lamp control device 82 receives the shift command, and executes a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds.

  Next, the variation start process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S701, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the current change start process corresponds to the big win is executed.

  In the success / failure determination process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 16, first, in step S801, the information acquired from the information stored in the execution area AE for the jackpot determination, that is, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1. To figure out. In a succeeding step S802, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is a low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored in a high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204. To do. The high probability mode flag is a flag that is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode relating to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and is erased when the normal jackpot result occurs thereafter.

  In the case of the low probability mode, in step S803, out of the various jackpot value information set as the success / failure table in the ROM 203, the number of confirmations is set in order to set the number of jackpot value information to be referred to when performing the hit / fail judgment this time. Is set to “1”. Specifically, the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 are provided with a confirmation number counter area as confirmation number storage means (or determination unit for determination of success / failure). In step S803, information on the confirmation number counter area is displayed as “ 1 ”is updated. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, the number of confirmations is set to “10” in step S804. Specifically, the information in the confirmation number counter area is updated to information “10”.

  After step S803 or step S804, the jackpot value information of the address corresponding to the number of confirmations is acquired from the information set as the success / failure table in step S805. For example, when the information of the confirmation number counter area is “1”, information of “7”, which is the jackpot value information corresponding to the address information of “1” in the success / failure table, is acquired. Further, for example, when the information of the confirmation number counter area is “10”, the information of “272” that is the jackpot value information corresponding to the address information of “10” in the success / failure table is acquired.

  In subsequent step S806, a comparison process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S801 is compared with the jackpot value information acquired in step S805. Thereafter, in step S807, it is determined whether or not both pieces of information match as a result of performing the comparison process in step S806.

  If the comparison results do not match, 1 is subtracted from the confirmation number counter area by subtracting 1 from the information in the confirmation number counter area in step S808. Thereafter, in step S809, it is determined whether or not the information on the confirmation number stored in the confirmation number counter area is larger than the information “0”. If the information is larger than the information of “0”, the process returns to step S805 to determine whether or not it is true by referring to the next jackpot value information.

  That is, when the winning / not-lotting mode is the high probability mode, “10” is set as the confirmation number in step S804 as described above. In this case, if the jackpot determination information grasped in step S801 is information that does not win the jackpot, first, comparison processing is performed with reference to “272” that is the jackpot value information corresponding to the address information “10”. Next, with reference to “241” which is the jackpot value information corresponding to the address information “9”, the comparison processing is performed, and the jackpot value information corresponding to each address information “8” to “2” The process of steps S805 to S809 is repeatedly executed so that the determination is made with reference to “7” that is the jackpot value information corresponding to the address information “1”. . Then, the comparison process is performed with reference to the jackpot value information corresponding to the address information “1”, and then the true / false determination process is terminated.

  Note that if the winning / no-win lottery mode is the low-probability mode, as described above, “1” is set as the number of confirmations in step S803, so the result of the comparison process is inconsistent and negative in step S807. If the determination is made, the confirmation number becomes “0” as the confirmation number is decremented by 1 in step S808, and the negative determination is made in step S809, thereby repeating the processes in steps S805 to S809. Then, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot determination information grasped in step S801 coincides with any jackpot value information, when the jackpot value information is acquired in step S805, the comparison target in step S806 is compared. These information items match, and an affirmative determination is made in step S807. In this case, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S810. Thereafter, the authenticity determination process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 15), after executing the success / failure determination process in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not it is a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. If jackpot information is stored, type determination processing is executed in step S703.

  In the type determination process, the information acquired from the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the big hit type counter C2 is grasped. Also, information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot information is acquired from the distribution table in the ROM 203. Then, both pieces of information are compared, and it is specified whether or not the information corresponds to probability variation jackpot information.

  In the subsequent step S704, it is determined whether or not the type of the current big hit winning is a probable big hit result based on the information specified in the type determining process in step S703. If it is the probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S706. If it is determined in step S702 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S707.

  In each stop result setting process of step S705 to step S707, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is specified from information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Remember. Further, in step S705 and step S706, information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the determination result of whether or not this game is successful is a probable change jackpot result or a normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 ( The information “1” is stored in the corresponding area). Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in step S705, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S706.

  After executing any one of steps S705 to S707, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S708.

  In the change display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, first, in step S901, the value of the change type counter CS stored in the change type counter buffer of the RAM 204 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 202. Let In a succeeding step S902, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any flag is stored, an affirmative determination is made in step S902 as the occurrence of reach display. Even if none of the above flags is stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the occurrence of reach display is generated. In step S902, an affirmative determination is made.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach generation variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 222 of the ROM 203 in step S903. In step S904, the variable display time information is set in a variable display time counter area (variable display time measuring means) provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S902, the current variation type counter CS of the current variation type counter CS is referred to by referring to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 222 in step S905. The variable display time corresponding to the value is acquired, and the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area in step S906. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of the start pending storage numbers N increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation variation display time table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display time does not fluctuate according to the start pending storage number N and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs.

  As described above, the variation display time of each game time is determined by using the presence / absence of reach, the number of hold information, and the value of the variation type counter as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time is the content of other hold information, specifically, jackpot determination information, type determination information and reach determination information included in the other hold information as parameters. Decided without.

  Returning to the description of the change start process (FIG. 15), after the change display time setting process is executed in step S708, a change command and a type command are set in step S709. The change command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, information on miss results, and the like.

  The change command and the type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect at the game time based on the received change command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. The contents of this effect include the variation display mode of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The determined variation display mode of the symbol is output from the voice lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. Is done. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on the display content command received from the sound lamp control device 82 so that the symbol change display corresponding to each game time is performed. Thereafter, in step S710, the variation display of the pattern is started on the main display unit 43, and then the variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 13), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the process for proceeding game times in steps S507 to S511 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S507, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 17). The value of the set variable display time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S508. In the process for variable display, the display mode in the result display section related to the current game time is changed. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  If the change display time has elapsed, change end processing is executed in step S509. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any one of the above steps S705 to S707 is specified, and the main display unit 43 displays the pattern form corresponding to the information on the main display unit 43. The display of the unit 43 is controlled.

  In the subsequent step S510, a change end command is set. The change end command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round ( Final stop display).

  Thereafter, in step S511, after the restriction flag (restriction information) is stored in the restriction flag storage area (restriction information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, the game number control process is terminated. The restriction flag is a flag for identifying in the MPU 202 that execution of the confirmation process for holding notice described later is restricted. In the restriction release process in step S402 of the normal process (FIG. 12). Erased.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S405 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the change display of the picture on the main display unit 43 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, “15” is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 in step S1004. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times that the special winning opening 32a is opened. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, and the process proceeds to step S1005. In step S1005, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 32a is closed, the variable prize driving unit 32c is set in the driving state on condition that the round counter area RC is “1” or more. The mouth 32a is opened. Further, when the grand prize winning opening 32a is being opened, the variable prize driving is performed on condition that a predetermined time has passed since the opening of the special winning prize opening 32a or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. The drive state of the part 32c is stopped, and the special winning opening 32a is closed.

  In a succeeding step S1006, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S1007.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, when the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. In addition, when the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, in step S1008, after executing the opening / closing execution mode termination processing, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the stored flag is erased from the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag.

<About reservation notice>
Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the reservation notice suggesting the contents of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 has a predetermined probability at a timing before the game times related to the hold information are started. It is configured to be done in. Such a hold notice is performed by executing predetermined control in the display control device 212 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81. The electrical configuration and processing configuration related to the reservation notice will be described below.

<Electrical configuration related to pending notice>
First, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on an audio lamp control board 241 provided in the audio lamp control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, the game time control commands (game time control information) such as the change command, the type command, and the change end command described above are received. Also, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command and a hold command to be described later is received.

  As described above, the holding lamp portions 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display lamp portion 63 and the speaker portion 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected. In this case, the various commands are transmitted to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form as it is.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 that is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, but each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 252 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 81 via the sound lamp control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, internal commands for the VDP 255). Generation).

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in the lottery table storage area 261 of the program ROM 253. The details of the area 261 will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 252.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. These work data, flags and the like are stored in the respective areas 262 to 263 of the work RAM 254. The details of these areas 262 to 263 will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 252.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like. In the character ROM 256, a holding image data storage area 269 storing image data to be displayed in the holding display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 is set as a part of the data.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257. In the video RAM 257, a hold display area 271 corresponding to the hold display area Ga is set.

  The hold display area 271 has a first unit area 272, a second unit area 273, and a third unit so as to correspond to the first to fourth unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 in the hold display area Ga on a one-to-one basis. An area 274 and a fourth unit area 275 are set. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the hold display area Ga, images corresponding to the data written in the unit areas 272 to 275 are displayed. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 corresponding to the unit areas 272 to 275 in which no data is set, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

<Regarding processing related to pending notice>
Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice may be restricted, and when the restriction is started, the confirmation process is continued until a predetermined release condition is satisfied. In the following description, the case where the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is not restricted will be described first, and then the case where the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is restricted and the case where the restriction is released will be explained. To do.

<Setting process of hold command executed by MPU 202 of main controller 81>
A hold command setting process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described. Here, as already described, the hold command setting process is executed in step S306 of the winning prize process for the operation opening (FIG. 11) set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The hold command setting process in step S306 is executed at the timing when a winning is made to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. Then, in the setting process of the hold command, it is confirmed whether or not the winning information is included in the hold information acquired by the current winning. In this case, when confirming whether or not the jackpot winning information is included, in the above-described determination processing (FIG. 16), in the determination table of the ROM 203 and the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204 used for the determination of the determination. A confirmation counter area is used.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a hold command setting process. In step S <b> 1101 in the confirmation process, it is determined whether or not a restriction flag indicating that one condition that should restrict the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is satisfied is stored in the RAM 204. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the number N of reserved start storages is “1”. In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204.

  If a restriction flag is stored (step S1101: YES), and if the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S1103: NO), the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice in steps S1104 to S1113 is restricted. Is done. Further, even when the restriction flag is not stored (step S1101: NO), when the number N of starting hold storage is “1”, that is, when a plurality of hold information is not stored (step S1102: YES). In the case where the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S1103: NO), the execution of the holding notice confirmation process in steps S1104 to S1113 is restricted.

  Since this time is a process when the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is not restricted, none of the above restriction conditions is satisfied. That is, when the restriction flag is not stored (step S1101: NO) and when a plurality of holding information is stored (step S1102: NO), the winning / no-go lottery mode is set to the low probability mode or the high probability mode. Regardless of which is the confirmation process for the hold notice is started. In addition, even if the situation is one of the cases where the restriction flag is stored (step S1101: YES) or when a plurality of hold information is not stored (step S1102: YES), the win / fail lottery mode is low. In the case of the probability mode (step S1103: YES), a confirmation process for holding notice is started.

  In the confirmation process for holding notice, first, in step S1104, out of the holding information acquired in step S305 based on the current winning, information for jackpot determination, that is, information acquired from information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. To do. Thereafter, in steps S1105 to S1112, the same processing as that in steps S802 to S809 in the determination processing (FIG. 16) is executed.

  That is, in step S1105, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the number of confirmations is set to “1” by updating the information of the confirmation number counter area of the RAM 204 to “1” in step S1106. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, in step S1107, the confirmation number counter area information in the RAM 204 is updated to information "10", thereby setting the confirmation number to "10".

  After step S1106 or step S1107, in step S1108, the jackpot value information of the address corresponding to the number of confirmations is acquired from the information set as the success / failure table. In subsequent step S1109, a comparison process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S1104 is compared with the jackpot value information acquired in step S1108. Thereafter, in step S1110, it is determined whether or not both pieces of information match as a result of performing the comparison process in step S1109.

  If the comparison results do not match, the confirmation number counter area is decremented by 1 in step S1111 to decrement the confirmation number by one. Thereafter, in step S1112, it is determined whether or not the information on the confirmation number stored in the confirmation number counter area is larger than the information “0”. If the information is larger than the information “0”, the process returns to step S1108, and comparison processing is performed with reference to the next jackpot value information.

  If it is determined in step S1110 that the comparison results match, the matching hold command is set in step S1113, and then the hold command setting process ends. On the other hand, if it does not match any of the jackpot value information corresponding to the number of confirmations set in step S1106 or step S1107, a negative determination is finally made in the process of step S1112. In this case, after setting the mismatch hold command in step S1114, the setting process of the hold command is ended.

  The match hold command set in step S1113 and the mismatch hold command set in step S1114 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice lamp control device 82 receives the hold command and specifies that the hold information has increased. Further, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the hold command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 executes a hold notice process based on the received hold command.

<Regarding the hold notice control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212>
Next, the hold notice control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The hold notice control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252 and is started approximately at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle). In the following description, FIGS. 22A and 22B are referred to as appropriate. 22 (a) and 22 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the state of the hold notice.

  In the hold notice control process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether any hold command is received from the sound lamp control device 82 or not. If any hold command has been received, 1 is added to the display-side hold storage number SN held in the hold counter area 263 of the work RAM 254 in step S1202. The display-side hold storage number SN corresponds to the hold-display area 271 of the video RAM 257. When the hold-display information is set for reception of the hold command, the display-side hold in the hold display area 271 is set. The hold display information is set for the unit areas 272 to 275 corresponding to the storage number SN.

  In a succeeding step S1203, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a match hold command. If it is a coincidence hold command, in step S1204, a notice generation lottery process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to hold a hold notice is executed. In the notification generation lottery process, first, the counter value for notification generation lottery is read from the lottery counter area 262 of the work RAM 254.

  Here, the lottery counter area 262 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is configured such that 1 is added at a predetermined cycle such as a 2 msec cycle, and the maximum value is reached. It is configured to be initialized to “0” later. In the notification generation lottery process, the notification generation lottery table read out corresponds to the notification generation winning with reference to the notification generation lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 261 of the program ROM 253. It is determined whether or not.

  Although the probability of winning the notification generation is arbitrary, in the pachinko machine 10, the notification generation lottery table is set so that the notification generation winning is achieved with a probability of 1/5 in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode. Is set. Incidentally, the main control device 81 transmits a high-accuracy transition command to the voice lamp control device 82 when the success / failure lottery mode shifts from the low probability mode to the high probability mode, and also shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. The low-accuracy transition command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82, and the display control device 212 receives the high-probability transition command and the low-probability transition command received via the voice lamp control device 82 in the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Identify which one of them. The winning probability of the notification generation lottery is not limited to the above, and the winning probability may be different between the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

  After the notification generation lottery process is executed in step S1204, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the result of the notification generation lottery process is the notification generation winning. If it is a notification generation winning, hit information setting processing is executed in step S1206. Specifically, among the unit areas 272 to 275 in the hold display area 271, the hit information is stored for the unit area corresponding to the display-side hold memory number SN added by 1 in step S1202. An internal command is output to the VDP 255.

  For example, if the display-side reserved memory number SN is “1”, an internal command is output so that the hit information is stored for the first unit area 272, and the display-side reserved memory number SN is “4”. For example, an internal command is output so that the hit information is stored for the fourth unit area 275. By storing the hit information in the unit area, as shown in FIG. 22 (a), the “ON” image is displayed in the corresponding unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the hold display area Ga. In this case, the player can grasp that if the game times corresponding to the on-hold information is reached, it will be a big win. As a result of the hold notice being made in this way, the player pays attention not only to the variable display of each game time executed by the symbol display device 41 but also to the hold display area Ga.

  On the other hand, when the hold command received this time is a mismatch hold command (step S1203: NO), or when the hold command received this time is a match hold command but the notification occurrence lottery process has not been performed (step S1203) In step S1205: NO), in step S1207, outlier information setting processing is executed.

  Specifically, out of the first unit area 272 to the fourth unit area 275 in the hold display area 271, there is outlier information for the unit area corresponding to the display-side hold storage number SN added by 1 in step S1202. An internal command is output to VDP 255 so as to be stored. By storing the outlier information in the unit area, as shown in FIG. 22B, an image of “●” is displayed in the corresponding unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the hold display area Ga.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, the process in step S1206 is executed, or the process in step S1207 is executed, whether or not a shift command has been received from the audio lamp control device 82 in step S1208. Determine. If the shift command has not been received, the hold notice control process is terminated as it is.

  If a shift command has been received, 1 is subtracted from the display-side reserved storage number SN stored in the hold counter area 263 of the work RAM 254 in step S1209. In the subsequent step S1210, a shift process is executed. The shift process outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 so that the hold display information set in the first unit area 272 to the fourth unit area 275 of the hold display area 271 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. .

  Specifically, the hold display information in the first unit area 272 is cleared, and the second unit area 273 → the first unit area 272, the third unit area 274 → the second unit area 273, and the fourth unit area 275 → the second unit area 272. The hold display information in each of the unit areas 272 to 275 is shifted, such as the three unit area 274. Thereafter, the hold notice control process is terminated.

<When the execution of confirmation processing for hold notice is restricted>
Next, the case where the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 will be described.

As already described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20, the case where the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice shown in steps S1104 to S1113 is restricted is as follows.
(I) When a restriction flag is stored (step S1101: YES), and the winning / no-win lottery mode is a high probability mode (step S1103: NO)
(II) Even when the restriction flag is not stored, a plurality of pieces of holding information are not stored (step S1102: YES), and the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S1103: NO).
It is.

  First, the case where the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted under the condition (I) will be described.

  As described above, the limit flag is stored in step S511 after the change end command is set in step S510 in the game turn control process (FIG. 13) in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81.

  The restriction flag is deleted in the restriction releasing process in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12) in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. The restriction release process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a change start flag is stored in the RAM 204. As described above, the change start flag is stored in step S506 after the change start process is executed in step S505 in the game turn control process (FIG. 13) in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. That is, the variation start flag is always stored when any one game time is started.

  If the variation start flag is not stored, the restriction release processing is terminated as it is. If the fluctuation start flag is stored, the restriction flag is erased from the RAM 204 in step S1302, and after the fluctuation start flag is erased from the RAM 204 in step S1303, the restriction release processing is terminated.

  Here, the game times control process (FIG. 13) is configured to be executed once when the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed once, and the change end process is set to 1 among the change start process and the change end process. When the game start control process is executed once, the change start process is not executed in the game time control process of the process times. Further, since the restriction release process is executed at a timing earlier than the game times control process in one normal process, when the variation start flag is stored in the game times control process in the normal process of the predetermined process times, Step S1302 of the restriction release process is not executed in the normal process of the processing times, and step S1302 of the restriction release process is executed in the normal process of the next processing time.

  That is, the restriction flag is always stored when any one game round is ended, and in the normal process of the process times after the normal process of the process times in which the process of ending the game times is executed. A change start process of a new game time is executed, and further, the process is deleted in the normal process of the process times executed next to the normal process of the process times in which the change start process is executed.

  If the restriction flag is stored and the above condition (I) is satisfied, a negative determination is made in step S1103 in the hold command setting process (FIG. 20), so that steps S1104 to S1113 are performed. The process advances to step S1114 without executing the holding notice confirmation process shown. In step S1114, a mismatch hold command is set as described above, and then the hold command setting process is terminated.

  The effect of setting the condition (I) will be described below with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 24A shows the timing when the first process of the normal process is executed, FIG. 24B shows the timing when the variation start process is executed, and FIG. 24C shows the game times being performed. FIG. 24 (d) shows the timing when the restriction flag is stored, FIG. 24 (e) shows the timing when the hold information is acquired, and FIG. 24 (f) shows the confirmation process for the hold notice. The execution timing is shown. Further, FIG. 24 shows a case where the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode.

  In FIG. 24, a period from the timing t2 to the timing t4, a period from the timing t4 to the timing t8, a period from the timing t8 to the timing t11, a period from the timing t12 to the timing t13, And the period from the timing of t13 to the timing of t16 has shown the period for one process time of a normal process, respectively.

  First, the case where the game times shown in the range of FIG.

  When a winning is generated for the operation ports 33 and 34 in a situation where a predetermined game round is being executed, the hold information is acquired in the winning operation for the operation port in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) at the timing t1. At the same time, a confirmation process for holding notice is executed for the obtained holding information.

  Thereafter, a new process time of the normal process is started at a timing t2, and a variation end process is executed for the predetermined game time at a timing t3. In this case, the restriction flag is stored at the timing of t3.

  Thereafter, a new process time of the normal process is started at a timing t4, and a variation start process is executed at a timing t6 to start a new game time. In this case, the hold information is newly acquired at the timing of t5 after the timing of t4 and at the timing of t5 before and after the timing of t6 and the timing of t7. Is stored, the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is restricted.

  After that, a new process time of the normal process is started at the timing of t8, and the restriction release process (FIG. 23) is executed at the timing of t9, thereby deleting the restriction flag. Thereafter, hold information is newly acquired at timing t10, and a confirmation process for hold notice is executed for the acquired hold information. Thereafter, a new normal process is started at the timing t11.

  Next, the hold information is acquired in a situation where the hold information shown in the range of FIG. 24B is not stored and the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed, and game times are started for the hold information. The case will be described.

  In a situation where the state where the restriction flag is stored at the end of the previous game round is maintained, a new process round of the normal process is started at the timing t12. Thereafter, a new process time of the normal process is started at the timing of t13 without newly acquiring the hold information.

  Thereafter, the hold information is newly acquired at the timing of t14. However, since the restriction flag is stored in the situation where the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is restricted. After that, at the timing of t15, the change start process is executed for the hold information acquired at the timing of t14, and the game turn is started.

  After that, a new processing time of the normal process is started at the timing of t16, and the restriction flag is cleared by executing the restriction releasing process (FIG. 23) at the timing of t17. Thereafter, hold information is newly acquired at timing t18, and a confirmation process for hold notice is executed for the acquired hold information.

  By limiting the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice as described above, the normal process of the process times in which the fluctuation start process (including the determination process) is executed in the situation where the winning / raising lottery mode is the high probability mode. Until the process is completed, the confirmation process for the hold notice is restricted.

  Here, in the status determination process (FIG. 16) of the change start process and the confirmation process for holding notice (steps S1104 to S1113) in the high probability mode, the confirmation number of the jackpot value information is set to “10”. When at least the information to be confirmed does not correspond to the jackpot winning, the comparison process is executed for all the jackpot value information set for the high probability mode.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10, the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are provided side by side as operating ports in the game area, and winning to both the operating ports 33 and 34 can occur simultaneously. Since the determination of whether or not winnings 33 and 34 have occurred and the information acquisition processing for each winning are performed by timer interrupt processing, the upper operation port 33 is connected to the upper operation port 33 in one processing of normal processing. The timer interrupt process for the process times in which the information acquisition process for the winning is executed is interrupted and activated, and the timer interrupt process for the process times in which the information acquisition process for the prize winning in the lower operating port 34 is executed is interrupted and activated. Sometimes. In this case, execution of the confirmation process for holding notice within the range until the normal process of the process times in which the variation start process (including the result determination process) is executed in the situation where the result determination lottery mode is the high probability mode is executed. Assuming a configuration that is not restricted, it may be necessary to perform comparison processing with the jackpot value information 30 times within a range until one normal processing is completed.

  In the case of the assumed configuration, a phenomenon in which the time required for completing one normal processing process takes a long time occurs unexpectedly. Then, there is a concern that the progress of the game times, the transition of the game state, the control of the launch of the game ball, etc. cannot be performed satisfactorily. In the case of the assumed configuration, the pachinko machine 10 may be in a state in which 4 msec has elapsed at the timing when the execution of the processes in steps S401 to S408 is completed in the normal process. Then, the update process of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS is not executed in the processing times.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is limited that the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed until the normal process of the process times in which the change start process (including the validity determination process) is executed is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden occurrence of a phenomenon in which the time required for completing one normal process is increased.

  By the way, in order to ensure the execution of the update process of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS, a configuration in which the cycle in which the first process is executed in the normal process is longer than 4 msec is also conceivable. The cycle in which the processes of steps S401 to S408 are executed is not preferable.

  In addition, in terms of shortening the above processing time, a configuration in which the number of jackpot numerical information in the high probability mode is reduced can be considered, but in this case, the winning probability in the high probability mode is reduced accordingly, and the period of staying in the high probability mode Is not preferable because it becomes longer than necessary. In addition, by narrowing the numerical range of the jackpot random number counter C1, it is possible to shorten the above processing time without reducing the winning probability in the high probability mode. In this case, however, the winning probability in the low probability mode is It is affected and is not preferable.

  Furthermore, when the result of the comparison process in the hold command setting process corresponds to the jackpot winning, when “1” is stored as the success / failure information included in the hold information and the jackpot winning is not supported In this case, “0” is stored as the success / failure information included in the hold information, and in the success / failure determination process, it is possible to determine whether the success / failure information is “0” or “1”. In this case, it is possible to shorten the processing time of the success / failure determination process. However, in a situation where four pieces of hold information are stored, it takes a long time for the fourth hold information to be the target of the success / failure determination process depending on whether or not the game times related to each piece of hold information have occurred. Sometimes. Then, the possibility that the success / failure information of “0” is rewritten to “1” due to causes such as electrical noise is increased, and if it is rewritten, a big win will be generated, which is not preferable.

  With respect to each configuration exemplified above, the pachinko machine 10 performs the confirmation process for the hold notice until the normal process of the process times in which the fluctuation start process (including the validity determination process) is executed is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a phenomenon in which the time required to complete the normal processing of one processing time is prolonged without causing the above-described inconvenience. It is done.

  By the way, the average digestion time of one game time is about 10 seconds, and the number of times the normal process with a 4 msec period is executed during the 10 seconds is about 2500 times. In other words, when viewed in units of one game, the change start process is executed only for the normal process of one process out of the normal process of 2500 process times. Execution is also limited to once every 2500 times. In addition, when viewed in units of one business day in the game hall, even if the game of the pachinko machine 10 is performed all day, the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is limited to one or two times. It becomes. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that the confirmation process for the hold notice is limited until the normal process of the process times in which the fluctuation start process (including the success / failure determination process) is completed, It is rare that the execution of the confirmation process is actually restricted, and it is considered that there is no substantial influence on the presentation of the hold notice.

  Next, the case where the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted under the condition (II) will be described.

  As described above, the restriction flag is always stored when any one game round is ended, and the normal process of the process times after the normal process of the process times when the end process of the game round is executed. A new game time variation start process is executed at, and is erased in the normal process of the process times executed next to the normal process of the process times in which the change start process is executed. Therefore, the restriction flag is basically stored in the situation where the hold information is not stored, and the condition (I) is satisfied in the situation where the winning / no-drawing lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  However, immediately after the restriction flag is erased due to the occurrence of noise or the like, there is a situation in which the hold information is not stored because the restriction flag is not stored. On the other hand, in such a situation, the condition (II) is satisfied. Then, in the hold command setting process (FIG. 20), a negative determination is made in step S1103, and the process advances to step S1114 without executing the hold notice confirmation process shown in steps S1104 to S1113. In step S1114, a mismatch hold command is set as described above, and then the hold command setting process is terminated.

  As a result, even when the hold information is acquired immediately after the restriction flag is erased due to the occurrence of noise or the like, the normal process of the process times in which the change start process (including the validity determination process) is executed is completed. Until that time, the confirmation process for holding notice is limited.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A hold notice corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 may be executed at a timing before the hold information becomes a target of the determination of whether or not the hold is made. As a result, for the player, not only a game that generates a prize to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 and a game that confirms the result of determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning game, but also a plurality of holdings. If the information is stored on hold, a game is added to confirm the result when the order of determination of success / failure is the target of success / failure determination for the subsequent hold information according to the content of the hold notice. Diversification. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, in the high probability mode in which the number of jackpot value information to be referred to is set, the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed within the range of the normal process of the processing times in which the success / failure determination process is executed. There are no restrictions. As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one process of the normal process is completed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through execution of the hold notice while ensuring good execution of the normal process.

  In particular, since the success / failure determination process is directly linked to the profit of the player, the jackpot value information set for the high probability mode is not related to the processing time until the execution of one process time of the normal process is completed. While it is necessary to refer to everything, the confirmation process for the hold notice is a process for performing the notice of the hold notice, so even if its execution is restricted, it does not affect the player's profit .

  Further, when the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is limited, the confirmation process for the hold notice is not executed. This simplifies the processing configuration related to the restriction.

  Further, the above restriction is not performed in the low probability mode. As a result, in the low-probability mode, the confirmation process for the hold notice is surely executed, and the opportunity for executing the confirmation process for the hold notice is suppressed from being extremely reduced.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the success / failure determination process is not executed in the normal process of the process times in which the process of ending the game time is executed, and the success / failure determination process can be executed in a process time after the process times. The restriction is started when a process for ending the game round is executed. As a result, even if the confirmation process for holding notice is performed prior to the success / failure determination process within the range of one processing time of the normal process, the processing times of the normal process in the case where the success / failure determination process is performed can be performed. Within the range, it is possible to limit the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice.

  Further, in the situation where the above restriction is performed, the restriction is released within the range of the processing times after the processing times of the normal processing within the range where the success / failure determination process is executed. Thus, even if the confirmation process for holding notice is performed after the success / failure determination process within the range of one processing time of the normal process, the range of the process times of the normal process when the success / failure determination process is performed The execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice can be restricted.

  In addition, according to this configuration, when the hold information is newly acquired in a situation where the execution of the success / failure determination process is not blocked and the hold information is not stored, the confirmation for the hold notice is made for the hold information. Execution of processing is restricted. Therefore, in such a situation, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one process of the normal process is completed.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted is different from that in the first embodiment. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

  First, the winning operation for the operation port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the upper operation opening winning flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the upper operation opening winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1408 without executing the processes of steps S1402 to S1407. If the upper working opening winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1402.

  In step S1402, the upper action opening winning flag is deleted. Thereafter, in step S1403, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved start storages N is less than the upper limit value. If the start pending storage number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the process directly proceeds to step S1408. If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1404, and the start pending storage number N is incremented by one.

  In the subsequent step S1405, the values (respective numerical information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are stored in the free reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE. The data is stored in the first reserved area, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the number of reserved memories added by 1 in step S304.

  In the subsequent step S1406, when a standby flag (standby information) is stored in a standby flag storage area (standby information storage means) provided in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204, the standby flag is erased. The standby flag is stored when execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is avoided, and is information for specifying in the MPU 202 that the standby process is in a standby state to be described later. Thereafter, a hold command setting process is executed in step S1407.

  Here, the hold command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the hold command setting process, in steps S1501 to S1514, the same processes as in steps S1101 to S1114 in the first embodiment are executed. Therefore, even in this embodiment,
(I) When a restriction flag is stored (step S1501: YES), and the winning / rafting lottery mode is a high probability mode (step S1503: NO)
(II) Even when the restriction flag is not stored, a plurality of pieces of holding information are not stored (step S1502: YES), and the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode (step S1503: NO).
If any of the above conditions is satisfied, the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice shown in steps S1504 to S1513 is restricted.

  When the condition (I) or the condition (II) is satisfied, a negative determination is made in step S1503, and the process proceeds to step S1515. In step S1515, it is determined whether or not the number N of start-pending memories exceeds “1”. If it is equal to or less than “1”, a mismatch hold command is set in step S1514, and then this setting process is terminated. . If “1” is exceeded, a standby flag is stored in the RAM 204 in step S1511, and a mismatch hold command is set in step S1514, and then this setting process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the winning operation for the operation opening (FIG. 25), in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the lower operation opening winning flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the lower working port winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1410 as it is. If the lower working opening winning flag is stored, the processing of steps S1404 to S1407 is executed after the lower working opening winning flag is deleted in step S1409. In this case, by making a negative determination in the process of step S1408 after the processes of steps S1404 to S1407, the process proceeds to step S1410.

  In step S1410, it is determined whether a limit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the restriction flag is stored, the main winning process is terminated. If the limit flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1411 whether or not a standby flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the standby flag is not stored, the main winning process is terminated.

  If the standby flag is stored, the standby flag is erased in step S1412 and the standby process is executed in step S1413, and then the main winning process is terminated. The waiting process is subject to the condition that the pending information for which the mismatch pending command is sent can be corrected regardless of whether the confirmation process for the pending notice is restricted and the jackpot value information is supported. In this case, the confirmation process for holding notice is executed, and when the jackpot value information is supported, a correction command indicating that is sent.

  The standby processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that in the pachinko machine 10, the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is limited only in the high probability mode of the low probability mode and the high probability mode, and thus the standby process is also performed only in the high probability mode. Executed.

  In step S1601, the information acquired from the information for determining jackpot, that is, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 among the previously acquired hold information is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, the number of confirmations is set to “10” by updating the information in the confirmation number counter area of the RAM 204 to information of “10”, which is the number of jackpot value information for the high probability mode.

  Thereafter, in step S1603, the jackpot value information of the address corresponding to the number of confirmation is acquired from the information set as the success / failure table. In subsequent step S1604, a comparison process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot determination information acquired in step S1601 is compared with the acquired jackpot value information acquired in step S1603. Thereafter, in step S1605, it is determined whether or not both pieces of information match as a result of performing the comparison process in step S1604.

  If the comparison results do not match, the confirmation number counter area is decremented by 1 in step S1606 to decrement the confirmation number by 1. Thereafter, in step S1607, it is determined whether or not the information on the confirmation number stored in the confirmation number counter area is larger than the information “0”. If the information is larger than the information “0”, the process returns to step S1603, and comparison processing is performed with reference to the next jackpot value information.

  If it is determined in step S1605 that the comparison results match, the correction process is set in step S1608, and the standby process is terminated. On the other hand, if none of the jackpot value information corresponding to the confirmation number set in step S1602 matches, a negative determination is finally made in the process of step S1607. In this case, the standby process is terminated as it is.

  The correction command set in step S1608 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the correction command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. When the display control device 212 receives a correction command, the display control device 212 executes a process corresponding to the hold notice control process.

  Here, the hold notice control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Each process of step S1701 to step S1710 is the same as each process of step S1201 to step S1210 of the hold notice control process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment.

  In this pending notice control process, if a negative determination is made in step S1708 or if the process of step S1710 is executed, it is determined in step S1711 whether a correction command has been received. If the correction command has not been received, the reservation notice control process is terminated as it is. If a correction command has been received, a notification generation lottery process is executed in step S1712. The processing contents of the notification generation lottery processing are the same as those in step S1204.

  In a succeeding step S1713, it is determined whether or not the result of the notification generation lottery process is a notification generation winning. If it is not a notification generation winning, the hold notice control process is terminated as it is. In the case of notification generation winning, after executing the correction process in step S1714, the hold notice control process is terminated.

  In the correction process, in the unit area 272 to 275 in the hold display area 271, the unit area corresponding to the current display-side hold storage number SN is stored in the VDP 255 so that the hit information is stored instead of the outlier information. An internal command is output. Thereby, in spite of the fact that it is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot value information, the unit hold display area Ga1 to which the outage information was displayed in accordance with the execution of the confirmation process for hold notification is limited The hit information is displayed in the corresponding area of Ga4.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in the situation where the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode as in the first embodiment, until the normal process of the processing times in which the success / failure determination process is executed is completed. Is restricted from being executed for confirmation processing for holding notice. Therefore, the same operational effects as those of the first embodiment based on the restriction can be obtained.

  Also, in this embodiment, even if execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is restricted, if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed later for the hold information related to the restriction. Is done. As a result, the hold notice confirmation process is executed for each hold information while restricting the hold notice confirmation process from being executed until the normal process of the processing times in which the success / failure determination process is executed is completed. The opportunity to be increased is higher than that in the first embodiment.

  In particular, when the execution of the confirmation process for hold notice is restricted, the hold information corresponds to the jackpot value information regardless of whether the hold information subject to restriction corresponds to the jackpot value information. If it is determined that it corresponds to the jackpot value information after the confirmation result for the hold notice is executed for the hold information subject to the restriction, and the corresponding correction result is Derived. Even if execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is restricted by deriving the specific result, the process related to the hold notice can be performed smoothly, and once the amendment result is derived, Even if the execution is restricted, it becomes possible to execute the hold notice after that, and the opportunity to execute the hold notice is increased.

  In addition, when the hold information is newly acquired at the timing after the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is restricted and before the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed for the restricted information subject to the restriction The confirmation process for the hold notice is not executed for the hold information that is the restriction target. As a result, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the processing for specifying which holding information should be performed for the holding notice confirmation process from being complicated. .

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted is different from that in the first embodiment. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a hold command setting process in the present embodiment.

In the hold command setting process, the same processes as steps S1101 to S1103 in the first embodiment are executed in steps S1801 to S1803. Therefore, even in this embodiment,
(I) When a restriction flag is stored (step S1801: YES), and the winning / no-win lottery mode is a high probability mode (step S1803: NO)
(II) Even when the restriction flag is not stored, a plurality of hold information is not stored (step S1802: YES), and the winning / not-lotting mode is the high probability mode (step S1803: NO).
When any of the above conditions is satisfied, the execution of the normal confirmation process in step S1804 is restricted. In the normal confirmation process, the same processes as in steps S1104 to S1114 in the first embodiment are executed.

  If the condition (I) or the condition (II) is satisfied, a negative determination is made in step S1803, and the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1805, information on the jackpot determination information among the hold information acquired in step S305 based on the current winning, that is, information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. In subsequent step S1806, the number of confirmations is set to “4” by updating the information of the confirmation number counter area of the RAM 204 to information of “4”, which is information of the partial determination number.

  After step S1806, the same processing as in steps S1108 to S1114 in the first embodiment is executed in steps S1807 to S1813. That is, in step S1807, the jackpot value information of the address corresponding to the number of confirmations is acquired from the information set as the success / failure table. In the subsequent step S1808, a comparison process between the jackpot determination information acquired in step S1805 and the jackpot value information acquired in step S1807 is executed. Thereafter, in step S1809, it is determined whether or not it is determined in the comparison process that both pieces of information match.

  If the comparison results do not match, 1 is subtracted from the confirmation number counter area by subtracting 1 from the information in the confirmation number counter area in step S1810. Thereafter, in step S1811, it is determined whether or not the information on the confirmation number stored in the confirmation number counter area is larger than the information “0”. If the information is larger than the information “0”, the process returns to step S1807, and comparison processing is performed with reference to the next jackpot value information.

  If it is determined in step S1809 that the comparison results match, the matching hold command is set in step S1812, and then the hold command setting process ends. On the other hand, if it does not match any of the jackpot value information corresponding to the number of confirmations set in step S1806, a negative determination is finally made in the process of step S1811. In this case, after setting the mismatch hold command in step S1813, the setting process of the hold command is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the execution of the normal confirmation process related to the confirmation for the hold notice is restricted, among the plurality of jackpot value information set for the high probability mode A confirmation process for holding notice is executed with a part of the confirmation target being confirmed. As a result, even if the start process of the game times overlaps with the acquisition process of the hold information within the range until one process time of the normal process is completed, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is limited, The hold command is set in a state in which the content of the hold information related to the acquisition is reflected to some extent, and it is possible to make a hold notice even if the hold information is related to the restriction.

  Also, in the confirmation process related to the above restriction, not all of the multiple jackpot value information set for the high probability mode are to be confirmed, but a part is to be confirmed. Compared to the configuration described above, even if the start processing of the game times and the acquisition processing of the hold information overlap within the range until one processing time of the normal processing is completed, the time required to complete the processing times is reduced. Conversion is planned.

  Note that the partial determination number is not limited to “4”, and may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of jackpot numerical information set for the high probability mode and 1 or more, for example, “2”. Or "3" may be sufficient and "5" or more may be sufficient.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the game times control process is different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the game times control processing in the present embodiment.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. When the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn progression process in steps S1902 to S1907.

  In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S1902, it is determined whether or not the current game times fluctuation display time has elapsed. If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S1903 and a fluctuation end command is set in step S1904. The processing in step S1903 and step S1904 is the same as the processing in step S509 and the processing in step S510 in the first embodiment.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed and a negative determination is made in step S1902, a variable display process is executed in step S1905. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S508 in the first embodiment. In a succeeding step S1906, it is determined whether or not it is a restriction start timing of the confirmation process for holding notice.

  Here, the restriction start timing is a timing that is a processing time that is the number of times of the restriction start times before the processing time of the normal process in which the variation end process is executed for the game times being executed. It is. In the pachinko machine 10, the limit start number is set as one time, but the number is not limited to this and may be set as a plurality of times. However, in order to minimize the period during which the confirmation process for holding notice is limited, it is preferable to set the limit start count as one.

  In addition, although a specific configuration for specifying the restriction start timing is arbitrary, the pachinko machine 10 stores variable display time information in order to specify the end timing of the game times at the start of the game times. This is performed by determining whether or not the information in the variable display time counter area becomes a value corresponding to the limit start count.

  Note that the configuration related to storage of variable display time information in the variable display time counter area and the configuration related to subtraction are the same as those in the first embodiment. In addition, in the configuration in which the update of the variable display counter area is performed not by the subtraction method but by the addition method, it may be configured to determine whether or not the value after the addition is a value corresponding to the limit start count. .

  If it is not the restriction start timing, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If it is the restriction start timing, after the restriction flag is stored in the restriction flag storage area in the various flag storage area 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1907, the game number control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, or after the process of step S1904 is executed, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S1908 to S1912.

  In the game turn starting process, first, in step S1908, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S1909 whether the start pending storage number N is “0”.

  If the start pending storage number N is “0”, the game times control process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number N is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S1910, a change start process is executed in step S1911, and a change in various flag storage areas 234 of the RAM 204 is further executed in step S1912. After storing the variation start flag in the start flag storage area, the game times control process is terminated. The processes in steps S1910 to S1912 are the same as the processes in steps S504 to S506 in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the game times control process according to the present embodiment, the game times progression process is preferentially performed, and the game times progression process is not performed or the game times progression process is performed. When the process related to the end of the game round is executed, the game round start process is performed. As a result, for example, when the hold information is held and stored in a situation where one game time is being executed, the next game time is within the range of the normal process of the process time in which the end process of the game time is executed. Therefore, the period from the end of one game time to the start of the next game time can be shortened.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the configuration of the game times control process is different from that of the first embodiment, but the other process configurations are the same. Specifically, in the normal process (FIG. 12), the restriction release process is executed at a timing prior to the game turn control process, and the processing configuration of the restriction release process is the first processing described above. This is the same as the processing configuration in the embodiment (specifically, the processing configuration shown in FIG. 23). In addition, the processing configuration of the hold command setting processing and the processing configuration of the hold notice control processing in the display control device 212 are also the processing configuration in the first embodiment (specifically, the processing shown in FIG. 20 for the former). The configuration and the latter are the same as the processing configuration shown in FIG.

  Next, how the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  FIG. 31 (a) shows the timing at which the first process of the normal process is executed, FIG. 31 (b) shows the timing at which the change start process is executed, and FIG. 31 (c) shows the game times being performed. 31 (d) shows the timing when the restriction flag is stored, FIG. 31 (e) shows the timing when the hold information is acquired, and FIG. 31 (f) shows the confirmation process for hold notice. The execution timing is shown. FIG. 31 shows a case where the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode.

  A new process time of the normal process is started at a timing t1, which is a situation where a predetermined game time is being executed. The normal process of the process times is a normal process related to the process times one time before the normal process of the process times in which the variation end process is executed for the currently executed game times. Therefore, the restriction flag is stored by executing the game times control process at the timing t2 for the normal process of the process times.

  Thereafter, a new processing time of the normal processing is started at the timing t3. Then, the variation end process is executed for the game times currently performed at the timing of t4, and the variation start process is executed at the timing of t5 to start a new game time. After that, the hold information is newly acquired at the timing t6, which is the timing before the completion of the normal processing of the processing times started at the timing t3, but the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode. Since the restriction flag is stored in a certain situation, execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice is restricted.

  Thereafter, a new processing cycle of the normal process is started at the timing t7, and the restriction release process (FIG. 23) is executed at the timing t8, whereby the restriction flag is deleted. Thereafter, hold information is newly acquired at the timing of t9, and a confirmation process for hold notice is executed for the acquired hold information. Thereafter, a new processing time of the normal processing is started at the timing of t10.

  As described above, in the game times control process, the game times progress process is preferentially performed, and even when the game times progress process is not performed or when the game times progress process is performed, the game times are terminated. Even if the game turn start process is executed in the same game number control process when such a process is executed, the restriction flag storage timing and erase timing are set as described above. Thus, it is restricted that both the game-time start process and the normal confirmation process for holding notice are executed within a range until one process time of the normal process is completed.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for advancing a game in the main controller 81 is different from that in the first embodiment. Therefore, the processing configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. The main process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  First, in step S2001, a startup process associated with power-on is executed. In the subsequent step S2002, access to the RAM 204 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S2003, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 98 is turned on. In subsequent step S2004, it is determined whether or not the power interruption flag is stored in the RAM 204. In step S2005, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S2006, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined.

  If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the power interruption flag is stored and the RAM determination value is normal, the power interruption flag is erased from the RAM 204 in step S2007, and the RAM is deleted in step S2008. Erase the judgment value. Thereafter, interrupt permission is set in step S2009, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S2010, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S2011. And after performing the process of step S2009-step S2011, it returns to step S2009 and repeats the process of step S2009-step S2011.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which performs the setting of an interruption prohibition immediately after setting an interruption permission in step S2009. In this case, the timer interrupt processing to be described later may be configured to wait for execution until the next interrupt permission setting is performed when the start timing is reached in a situation where the interrupt prohibition setting is performed. .

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to steps S2012 to S2013. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to step S2012 to step S2013. .

  In step S2012, the used area of the RAM 204 is cleared to "0" (initialized), and in step S2013, initialization of the RAM 204 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to steps S2009 to S2011.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81.

  In the timer interrupt process, in steps S2101 to S2105, processes similar to those in steps S101 to S105 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) in the first embodiment are executed.

  Thereafter, in step S2106, update processing of the variation type counter CS is executed, game time control processing is executed in step S2107, game state transition processing is executed in step S2108, and electric power support support is executed in step S2109. The process is executed, a game ball launch control process is executed in step S2110, and an external output process is executed in step S2111. Of the steps S2106 to S2111, the processes other than the game turn control process of step S2107 are the same as the corresponding processes in steps S401 to S407 of the normal process (FIG. 12) in the first embodiment. .

  Hereinafter, the game times control process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game times control process, in steps S2201 to S2205, processes similar to steps S501 to S505 of the normal process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed. Then, after the change start process is executed in step S2205, if the restriction flag is stored in the RAM 204 in step S2206, the restriction flag is deleted.

  Further, in steps S2207 to S2211, the same processing as that in steps S507 to S511 of the normal processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed. Therefore, after setting the change end command in step S2210, the limit flag is stored in the RAM 204 in step S2211.

  That is, in the game turn control process in the present embodiment, the limit flag storage timing is the same as in the first embodiment, but the limit flag erasure timing is different, and the variation start process is executed. The restriction flag is cleared if

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game turn control process is set in one of the normal process and the timer interrupt process that is interrupted and started, and the hold command setting process is set in the other. Instead, one of normal processing and timer interrupt processing, more specifically, as a series of timer interrupt processing, a pending command setting process and a game times control process are set. In addition, the order in which the pending command setting process is executed in the one-time timer interrupt process is earlier than the game times control process. Further, in the game times control process, when the change end process is executed in one process time, the change start process is not executed in the process time even if the hold information is stored on hold. The variation start process related to the hold information is executed in the next game number control process. A limit flag is stored when the variation end process is executed, and the limit flag is deleted when the change start process is executed.

  With the above configuration, for example, when a variation end process of one game is executed and a restriction flag is stored, at least a timer for a pending notice in a pending command setting process in a timer interrupt process of the next process Execution of the confirmation process is restricted. Then, when the variation start process is executed thereafter, the restriction flag is cleared after the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted in the timer interrupt process of the processing times in which the change start process is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent both the normal holding notice confirmation process and the success / failure determination process from being executed within the range of one timer interrupt process.

  In particular, if a situation occurs in which the time required to complete one processing of a timer interrupt process that is started periodically is extremely long, multiple timer interrupt processes are prevented from being started redundantly. Therefore, it is necessary to lengthen the cycle at which the timer interrupt process is started. If it does so, the processing speed in progressing a game will become slow, and it is not preferable. On the other hand, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed by restricting the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice as described above.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the game times control process is different from that of the fifth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the game times control processing in the present embodiment.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. When the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the process proceeds to the game turn progression process in steps S2302 to S2307.

  In the game time progression processing, first, in step S2302, it is determined whether or not the current game time variation display time has elapsed. If the fluctuation display time has elapsed, a fluctuation end process is executed in step S2303 and a fluctuation end command is set in step S2304. The processing in step S2303 and step S2304 is the same as the processing in step S509 and the processing in step S510 in the first embodiment.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed and a negative determination is made in step S2302, variable display processing is executed in step S2305. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S508 in the first embodiment. In a succeeding step S2306, it is determined whether or not it is a restriction start timing of the confirmation process for holding notice. The details of the restriction start timing and the specific configuration for specifying the restriction start timing are the same as those in the fourth embodiment.

  If it is not the restriction start timing, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If it is the restriction start timing, after storing the restriction flag in the RAM 204 in step S2307, the game turn control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2301 that the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, or after the process of step S2304 is executed, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S2308 to S2312.

  In the game turn starting process, first, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S2309 whether the start pending storage number N is “0”.

  If the start pending storage number N is “0”, the game times control process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number N is not “0”, the data setting process is executed in step S2310, the fluctuation start process is executed in step S2311, and the limit flag is erased from the RAM 204 in step S2312, The game times control process is terminated. The processes in steps S2310 to S2312 are the same as the processes in steps S504 to S506 in the first embodiment.

  As described above, in the game times control process according to the present embodiment, the game times progression process is preferentially performed, and the game times progression process is not performed or the game times progression process is performed. When the process related to the end of the game round is executed, the game round start process is performed. Thereby, for example, when the hold information is held and stored in the situation where one game time is being executed, the next game time is within the range of the normal process of the process time in which the process of ending the game time is executed. Therefore, the period from the end of one game time to the start of the next game time can be shortened.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the configuration of the game times control process is different from that of the fifth embodiment, but the other process configurations are the same. Specifically, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 33), the hold command setting process including the hold notice confirmation process is executed at a timing prior to the game times control process. Also, the processing configuration of the hold command setting process and the processing configuration of the hold notice control process in the display control device 212 are the same as the processing configuration in the fifth embodiment (that is, the processing configuration in the first embodiment). It is the same.

  With the above configuration, the game times advancement process is preferentially performed in the game times control process, and the game times progress process is not performed or the game times progress process is performed. Even if the process for starting game times is executed in the same game number control process when the process related to the end of the game is executed, the process times before the end of one game time are executed. A restriction flag is stored in the timer interruption process of the processing times, and the restriction flag is a processing time related to the start of the next game round, and is deleted after the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted. Therefore, it is limited that both the success / failure determination process related to the start of the game times and the normal confirmation process for holding notice are executed within a range until one processing time of the timer interrupt processing is completed.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the timer interrupt process is different from that of the fifth embodiment. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not a restriction flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the restriction flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2403 after deleting the restriction flag in step S2402. If the restriction flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2403 without executing the process in step S2402.

  Thereafter, a game turn control process is executed in step S2403, a game state transition process is executed in step S2404, a power support process is executed in step S2405, and a game ball launch control process is executed in step S2406. In step S2407, a reading process is executed. In step S2408, various counter updating processes are executed. In step S2409, a through-winning process is executed. In step S2410, a working-award winning process is executed. Later, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the game times control processing in the present embodiment.

  In the game times control process, the same processes as steps S501 to S505 of the normal process (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment are executed in steps S2501 to S2505. Then, after executing the fluctuation start process in step S2505, the restriction flag is stored in the RAM 204 in step S2506. Further, in steps S2507 to S2510, the same processing as that in steps S507 to S510 of the normal processing (FIG. 13) in the first embodiment is executed.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the order in which the hold command setting process including the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed in the timer interrupt process of one process is after the game times control process. Further, the restriction flag is stored when the fluctuation start process is executed, and is erased after the processing time related to the execution of the fluctuation start process, specifically, in the timer interrupt process of the next processing time of the processing time. Is done.

  Due to the above configuration, for example, when a variation start process of one game time is executed and a limit flag is stored, the normal interruption notice is performed in the timer interrupt process related to the process time in which the change start process is executed. Execution of the confirmation process is restricted, and the restriction flag is cleared in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent both the normal holding notice confirmation process and the success / failure determination process from being executed within the range of one timer interrupt process.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for making a reservation notice is different from that of the first embodiment. Therefore, the configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

<About various processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201>
First, the processing configuration in the present embodiment executed by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 will be described.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing normal processing in the present embodiment.

  Similar to the first embodiment, the normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on. As an outline, the processes of steps S2601 to S2606 are executed as a series of processes performed at a cycle of 4 msec, and the processes of steps S2607 to S2614 are executed as the processes for the remaining time.

  In normal processing, first, in step S2601, external output processing is executed. Specifically, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. In subsequent step S2602, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  Thereafter, a game turn control process is executed in step S2603, a game state transition process is executed in step S2604, a power support process is executed in step S2605, and a game ball launch control process is executed in step S2606. To do. Among these processes, the game state transition process in step S2604, the power combination support process in step S2605, and the game ball launch control process in step S2606 are the same as those in the first embodiment. On the other hand, part of the game content control process in step S2603 is different from the first embodiment. Details of such processing will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S2606, whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached in step S2607, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Determine whether. If the next normal processing start timing has not been reached, the processing from step S2608 to step S2614 is executed.

  Specifically, first, in step S2608, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the generation of timer interrupt processing, and in subsequent step S2609, confirmation processing for holding notice and processing for setting a holding command as an output target are performed. Executes the pending command setting process. The details of the hold command setting process will be described later. In step S2610, an interrupt permission setting is made to switch from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a permitted state.

  After that, in step S2611, interrupt prohibition is set again to prohibit the generation of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S2612, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S2613, the variation type counter CS is updated. Perform the update. In step S2614, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed.

  Then, it returns to step S2607 and repeats the process of step S2608-step S2614 until it affirmation determinates in step S2607.

  In other words, in the remaining processing, a plurality of types of processing are set, and among the plurality of types of processing, interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission processing are set across some processing, and some other processing is set. Interrupt disable and interrupt enable processing is set across the processes. That is, when the process from the interrupt prohibition process to the interrupt permission process is regarded as one unit process, the remaining process includes a plurality of one unit processes.

  Further, in a plurality of one-unit processes, the number of control targets is different between a predetermined one-unit process and another one-unit process. That is, in one unit of processing executed at a relatively early timing after the negative determination is made in step S2607, only one type of control target for setting a hold command is included. In addition, one unit of processing executed at a later timing includes two types of control objects, that is, update of the random number initial value counter CINI and update of the variation type counter CS. However, the longest processing time required for each unit of processing is longer for one unit of processing on the front side than for one unit of processing on the rear side.

  Note that the longest processing time in each unit of processing is not limited to a different configuration, and each unit of processing is processed so that the longest processing time in each unit of processing is the same. Allocation may be performed. In this case, the period in which the interrupt is permitted can be the same, substantially the same, or the same. Further, the configuration for determining whether or not 4 msec has elapsed in step S2607 is not essential. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not the timer interrupt processing has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment.

  Also in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process is periodically executed with a relatively short period of 2 msec. Here, a hardware configuration for periodically executing timer interrupt processing in the MPU 202 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 201 is provided with a clock circuit 301 as pulse signal output means for outputting a pulse signal at a predetermined cycle, and the clock circuit 301 is electrically connected to the MPU 202. A frequency dividing circuit 302 is provided as a frequency changing means for changing the period of the pulse signal on a predetermined signal path connecting the clock circuit 301 and the MPU 202.

  The frequency dividing circuit 302 is provided so as to output a pulse signal for specifying the start timing of the timer interrupt processing by the MPU 202. That is, a pulse signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit 302 to the MPU 202 at intervals of 2 msec. The MPU 202 executes a process for confirming the occurrence of a specific signal form such as the rise or fall of the pulse signal, and starts and executes the timer interrupt process with at least one condition that the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed. To do.

  In this case, when the occurrence of the specific signal form is confirmed in the situation where the start of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, the interrupt is permitted from the state where the interrupt is prohibited. Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, depending on the execution status of the process in the MPU 202, there is a case where the next timer interrupt process is started after 2.1 msec from the start of the previous timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started after 1.9 msec from the start of the immediately preceding timer interrupt process.

  However, since the output of the pulse signal from the frequency dividing circuit 302 is performed at a specific cycle of 2 msec regardless of the progress of processing in the MPU 202, the timer interrupt processing is basically started at the specific cycle. Furthermore, the processing configuration of the MPU 202 is such that even if the timer interrupt process at a predetermined timing is started after a period exceeding a specific period since the previous timer interrupt process was started, a timing next to the predetermined timing is reached. In the timer interrupt processing at, the portion exceeding the specific period is absorbed, and the timer interrupt processing at the next timing is set to be started at the timing when the input of the pulse signal is confirmed. The configuration related to the start of the timer interrupt process is the same in an embodiment different from the eighth embodiment.

  In the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment, first, in step S2701, a process of storing the return address in the register of the MPU 202 is executed. In other words, the timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the normal process (FIG. 38), but when the timer interrupt process of the processing time related to this interrupt is completed, it is executed before the interrupt in the normal process. It is necessary to return to the previous process. By executing the process for storing the return address in the normal process in step S2701, it is possible to return to the process before the interruption of the normal process.

  In subsequent step S2702, a process of saving the information stored in the current register of the MPU 202 to the RAM 204 is executed. This makes it possible to restore data that has been used up to that point when returning to normal processing.

  In subsequent step S2703, a power interruption process is executed. In this embodiment, the power interruption signal from the power interruption monitoring board 205 is input to the input port of the MPU 202 instead of the NMI terminal. In step S2703, the input state of the power interruption signal at this input port is monitored. . And when generation | occurrence | production of a power failure is confirmed, the process at the time of a power failure is performed. In the power interruption process, a power interruption flag is stored in the RAM 204, and a RAM determination value is calculated and stored, and an infinite loop is continued after access to the RAM 204 is prohibited.

  In a succeeding step S2704, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 40, first, in step S2801, information input to the input port of the MPU 202 from the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation port 33 is confirmed, and a winning signal of the upper operation port 33 is confirmed. Whether or not is input. The specific content of this process is the same as that in step S201 in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined that the winning signal of the upper working port 33 is not input, the information on the counter area for the upper working port of the RAM 204 is set as the winning reference number information in step S2802. Specifically, the information on the counter area for the upper working port is set to “2”. Thereafter, in step S2803, after the detected state of the upper working port is canceled, the process proceeds to step S2809. The detected state of the upper working port is a state for identifying in the MPU 202 that the winning has already been confirmed when the winning of one game ball to the upper working port 33 is confirmed. For example, it is determined whether or not the state is already detected based on the presence or absence of a flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning signal of the upper working port 33 is input, it is determined in step S2804 whether or not the upper working port has been detected. If the upper operating port is already detected, it means that the process related to the generation of the winning to the upper operating port 33 has been completed for the winning signal input this time, and the process directly proceeds to step S2809. .

  If the upper working port has not been detected, 1 is subtracted from the information in the upper working port counter area in step S2805. In a succeeding step S2806, it is determined whether or not the counter area for the upper working port is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2809. If it is “0”, the upper operation port winning flag is stored in the RAM 204 in step S2807, and the upper operation port is detected in step S2808. Then, the process proceeds to step S2809.

  In step S2809, information input to the input port of the MPU 202 from the detection sensor corresponding to the lower operation port 34 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not a winning signal is input to the lower operation port 34. The specific content of this process is the same as that in step S206 in the first embodiment.

  If it is determined that the winning signal of the lower working port 34 is not input, the information of the counter area for the lower working port of the RAM 204 is set as the winning reference number information in step S2810. Specifically, the information of the lower working port counter area is set to “2”. Thereafter, in step S2811, after the detected state of the lower working port is canceled, the process proceeds to step S2817. The detected state of the lower operating port is a state for identifying in the MPU 202 that the winning has already been confirmed when the winning of one game ball to the lower operating port 34 is confirmed, For example, it is determined whether or not the state is already detected based on the presence or absence of a flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning signal of the lower working port 34 is input, it is determined in step S2812 whether or not the lower working port has been detected. If the lower operating port is already detected, it means that the process related to the generation of a prize to the lower operating port 34 is completed for the winning signal input this time, and the process directly proceeds to step S2817. .

  If the lower working port has not been detected, 1 is subtracted from the information in the lower working port counter area in step S2813. In a succeeding step S2814, it is determined whether or not the counter area for the lower working port is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2817 as it is. If it is “0”, the lower operation port winning flag is stored in the RAM 204 in step S2815, and the lower operation port is detected in step S2816, and then the process proceeds to step S2817.

  In step S2817, as other reading processing, the detection results from the detection sensor corresponding to the general winning opening 31, the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32, and the like are confirmed, and processing according to the confirmation result is executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when determining whether or not the MPU 202 has won a prize in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, it is first confirmed that a signal indicating that no winning has occurred is received. Then, it is confirmed whether or not the signal indicating that a winning has been received is continued a plurality of times, specifically twice. In this case, each confirmation is performed once in one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. In other words, the timer interrupt process needs to be executed a plurality of times, specifically three times after confirming that one prize has been generated at the upper operating port 33 and confirming that the next prize has occurred. is there. Similarly, the timer interrupt process is executed a plurality of times, specifically, three times after confirming that one winning in the lower operating port 34 has occurred and confirming that the next winning has occurred. There is a need.

  However, a detection sensor is individually provided for each of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and the process related to the winning monitoring to the upper working port 33 and the winning monitoring to the lower working port 34 are monitored. Since both of the processes related to the above are performed in one timer interrupt process, there may be a case where the occurrence of winning in both the operation ports 33 and 34 is confirmed in one process of the timer interrupt process. In addition, the occurrence of winning in the lower working port 34 may be confirmed in the next processing time with respect to the processing time in which the winning in the upper working port 33 is confirmed.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39), after executing the read process in step S2704, the process proceeds to step S2705. In step S2705, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. In subsequent step S2706, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated.

  After that, a through winning process is executed in step S2707, a winning process for the operating port is executed in step S2708, a register return process is executed in step S2709, and a return address is set in step S2710. After referencing, this timer interrupt processing ends.

  The through winning process in step S2707 is the same as step S104 in the first embodiment. In step S2709, the data saved in the RAM 204 in step S2702 is returned to the register of the MPU 202. In step S2710, the return address stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S2701 is referred to. The address of the normal process that will return after the process is completed is grasped. As a result, after the timer interrupt process is completed, it is possible to return to the process that was being executed before the timer interrupt process was started. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Winning process for working port>
The winning process for the operation port in step S2708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the upper operation opening winning flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the upper operation opening winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2907 without executing the processes in steps S2902 to S2906. If the upper working opening winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S2902.

  In step S2902, the upper operation opening winning flag is deleted. In the subsequent step S2903, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read, and the starting reserved storage number N stored in the reserved area RE is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “4 ]) Or less. If the start pending storage number N is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S2907. When the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S2904, and 1 is added to the start pending storage number N.

  In subsequent step S2905, each value (each numerical value information) of the current jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS is set to the first of the free holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE. In the reserved area, that is, in the reserved area corresponding to the reserved storage number added by 1 in step S2904. Here, in the first embodiment, when the hold information is acquired for the occurrence of winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, the value of the variation type counter CS among the above values is set. The value of the variation type counter CS is acquired in the variation start process without being acquired, but in the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS is also acquired as the hold information.

  In subsequent step S2906, in order to make the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the sub-side control devices, recognize that the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 has occurred, Execute the setting process at the time of acquisition, which is a necessary process. This process will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2901, a negative determination is made in step S2903, or after the processing in step S2906 is executed, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the lower operation opening prize flag is stored in the RAM 204. judge. If the lower operation opening winning flag is not stored, the main winning process is terminated as it is. If the lower working port winning flag is stored, the process of steps S2903 to S2906 is executed after the lower working port winning flag is erased in step S2908. In this case, by making a negative determination in the process of step S2907 after the processes of steps S2903 to S2906, the main winning process is terminated.

  In a configuration in which an upper operating port 33 and a lower operating port 34 are provided as operating ports in the game area, and winning to both the operating ports 33 and 34 can occur simultaneously, the upper operating port can be achieved by one processing of timer interrupt processing. It is determined whether or not a winning to 33 has occurred and whether or not a winning to the lower operating port 34 has occurred, and when winning to both operating ports 33 and 34 has occurred simultaneously, The information acquisition process of step S2903 to step S2905 and the process of step S2906 are executed for the winning. As a result, even when winnings to both the operating ports 33 and 34 occur at the same time, acquisition of holding information based on winning to the upper operating port 33 and acquisition of holding information based on winning to the lower operating port 34 are obtained. It is possible to perform without delay, and it is possible to perform processing for causing the sub-side to recognize that the hold information has increased without delay.

<Setting process during acquisition>
Next, the setting process at the time of acquisition of step S2906 is demonstrated, referring the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3001, a hold number grasping process is executed. Specifically, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read. In the subsequent step S3002, a command at the time of acquisition including information on the number of holdings grasped in step S3001 is read from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 and set as an output target.

  The command at the time of acquisition is a command that indicates that the hold information is newly acquired, and indicates the number of hold information that is currently on hold. The acquisition command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S2601 in the normal process (FIG. 38). The voice lamp control device 82 receives the command at the time of acquisition, specifies that the hold information has increased, and performs light emission control of the hold lamp unit 45. In addition, the audio lamp control device 82 transmits the acquisition time command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. Processing in the display control apparatus 212 when the acquisition command is received will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S3003, it is determined whether or not a process waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204. The process waiting flag is information for specifying in the MPU 202 whether or not the pending information is in a standby state in which the pending notice confirmation process should be executed when the pending information has already been acquired. It is. If the process waiting flag is stored, the present setting process is terminated as it is, and if the process waiting flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3004.

  In step S3004, a process waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S3005, the current values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are stored in a hold determination area provided in the RAM 204. Incidentally, since there is no processing for updating the counters C1 to C3 and CS between the processing in step S2905 and the processing in step S3005, each numerical information stored in step S3005 is stored in the immediately preceding step S2905. It is the same as each numerical information stored in the holding area RE.

  Note that the process for storing the same numerical information as the numerical information acquired in the immediately preceding hold information acquisition process in the hold determination area is not limited to the above process. For example, immediately before step S2905 The numerical information stored in the holding area RE may be read from the holding area RE and written to the holding determination area. Also, instead of the process of writing each numerical information in the hold determination area, the MPU 202 can recognize which hold area RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE is stored in the hold area RE. When referring to the hold command setting process described later, the information may be read from the hold area RE.

  In a succeeding step S3006, a holding number counter update process is executed. Specifically, the number of holds held in step S3001 is overwritten in the hold number counter area in the hold number counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. For example, if it is determined in step S3001 that the number of holds is “1”, the information in the hold number counter area is “1” in step S3006, and the number of holds is “4” in step S3001. If it is grasped, the information on the hold number counter area becomes “4” in step S3006. The holding number counter area refers to any holding information in the holding area RE when the checking process for holding notice is executed in the holding command setting process to be described later, It is used for the MPU 202 to grasp whether it corresponds to information. After executing the process of step S3006, the present setting process is terminated.

  Here, as already described, the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the holding information is acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 34 in one processing time of the timer interruption process. May be performed. On the other hand, when one piece of hold information is set as a target for confirmation processing for hold notice, the process waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204, and in the situation where the process waiting flag is stored, the result is negative in step S3003. With this configuration, if new hold information is acquired in a situation where one hold information is set as the target for confirmation processing for hold notice, the hold information is confirmed for hold notice. Excluded from the subject.

  In addition, a situation in which newly acquired hold information is excluded from the confirmation process for the hold notice is that the hold command setting process described later is performed after the hold information that is the object of the hold notice confirmation process is obtained. This also occurs when a timer interrupt process is newly started and new hold information is acquired by the timer interrupt process before the execution. However, even if it is excluded from the confirmation processing for the hold notice, the command at the time of acquisition is output to the control device on the sub side for the hold information, so the control on the sub side for the recognition of the number of hold information There is no difference between the devices.

  As described above, by removing a part of the hold information from the confirmation process for the hold notice under the predetermined condition, the MPU 202 is compared with the case where all the hold information is made the confirmation process for the hold notice. It is possible to execute the process related to the hold notice while reducing the processing load.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process executed in step S2603 of the normal process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the game turn control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S3102.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S3103 to S3109. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved start storages N is “0”. If the start pending storage number N is “0”, the game times control process is terminated as it is.

  If the start pending storage number N is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S3104, and a change start process is executed in step S3105. The data setting process in step S3104 is the same as step S504 in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the variation start process in step S3105 is replaced with a configuration in which the numerical information at that time is acquired from the variation type counter CS in the first embodiment in the variation display time setting process (FIG. 17). The difference is that the numerical value information of the variation type counter CS included in the hold information related to the current variation start is used.

  In addition, as a variable display time table, a table for normal jackpot results, a table for probability variable jackpot results, a table for miss reach, and a table for complete miss are prepared. A table corresponding to the game result of the corresponding game round is selected, and the selected table is compared with the value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variation display time. In this case, when referring to the complete deviation table, not only the value of the fluctuation type counter CS but also the number of the hold information at that time is referred to, and the shorter the change display time is selected as the number of hold information increases. However, when referring to a table other than the table for complete detachment, the number of hold information is not referred to. In addition, the selection rate of the variable display time corresponding to each of the super reach that is set in multiple types is different between the table for normal jackpot results, the table for probability variation jackpot results, and the table for outlier reach. For example, the selection rate of the variable display time corresponding to a specific super reach is set such that the probability variation jackpot result table> the normal jackpot result table> the outreach table. In the variation start process in step S3105, processes other than the process for setting the variation display time are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In the subsequent step S3106, as the update processing of the holding number counter area, the numerical information of the holding number counter area is subtracted by 1 on condition that the numerical information of the holding number counter area provided in the RAM 204 is “1” or more. Execute the process. As a result, even if a new start of change occurs after the specified hold information is subject to the confirmation process for the hold notice and before the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed, In the confirmation process, it is possible for the MPU 202 to grasp which holding information is in the digestion order for which the confirmation process is being executed.

  In the subsequent step S3107, it is determined whether or not the information in the updated number-of-holds counter area is “0”. If it is not “0”, the game turn control process is terminated, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S3108. In step S3108, the process waiting flag stored in the RAM 204 is erased, and in the subsequent step S3109, the hold determination area in the RAM 204 is initialized, and the game turn control process is terminated.

  By executing the processing in steps S3107 to S3109 as described above, it is possible to prevent the confirmation processing for holding notice from being executed on the holding information that has already been digested for starting the change. The situation in which such processing is executed is, for example, a situation in which there is no holding information and neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the holding information is newly acquired. This occurs when the game times control process is executed before the hold command setting process described later is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3102 that the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, it is determined in step S3110 whether or not the current game variation display time has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the game display control process is terminated after the variable display process is executed in step S3111. If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S3112 and the game end control process is terminated after setting the variation end command in step S3113.

  In the first embodiment, the process for storing the change start flag and the process for storing the limit flag are executed in the game times control process. However, in the present embodiment, these change start flags are used. There is no limit flag, and the process related to the setting of these flags does not exist in the game times control process.

<Hold command setting process>
Next, the hold command setting process executed in step S2609 of the normal process (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the hold command setting process, a confirmation process for hold notice is executed in steps S3201 to S3218 and steps S3222 to S3224, and a process for setting the hold command as an output target in steps S3219 to S3220. Execute.

  In detail, in step S3201, it is determined in step S3201 whether or not a process waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the process waiting flag is not stored, it means that there is no hold information for which the confirmation process for hold notice is to be executed, and thus this setting process is ended as it is.

  If the process waiting flag is stored, the process waiting flag is deleted in step S3202, and then the process proceeds to step S3203. In step S3203, the numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1 is read from the hold determination area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S3204, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S3205, the number of confirmations is set to “1” by updating the information of the confirmation number counter area of the RAM 204 to information of “1”. On the other hand, in the case of the high probability mode, in step S3206, the number of confirmations is set to “10” by updating the information of the confirmation number counter area of the RAM 204 to information of “10”.

  After step S3205 or step S3206, in step S3207, the jackpot value information of the address corresponding to the number of confirmations is acquired from the information set as the success / failure table. In subsequent step S3208, a comparison process is executed. Specifically, the jackpot determination information read in step S3203 is compared with the jackpot value information acquired in step S3207. Thereafter, in step S3209, it is determined whether or not both pieces of information match as a result of performing the comparison process in step S3208.

  If the comparison results do not match, the confirmation number counter area is decremented by one in step S3210, thereby decrementing the confirmation number by one. Thereafter, in step S3211, it is determined whether or not the information on the confirmation number stored in the confirmation number counter area is larger than the information “0”. If the information is larger than the information “0”, the process returns to step S3207, and the comparison process is performed with reference to the next jackpot value information.

  If none of the jackpot value information corresponding to the confirmation number set in step S3205 or step S3206 coincides, a negative determination is finally made in step S3211. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3212.

  In step S3212, the outlier information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In subsequent step S3213, numerical information relating to the reach random number counter C3 is read from the hold determination area of the RAM 204. In the subsequent step S3214, it is determined whether or not the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 read in step S3213 corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

  Incidentally, the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach is set as a partial range of continuous numerical information among the predetermined range of numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3. Accordingly, in the processing in step S3214, the numerical information read in step S3213 is collated with the minimum value of the partial range, and the partial range is collated with the maximum value of the partial range. It is determined whether or not the read numerical information is included.

  If it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, the process proceeds directly to step S3221. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, the process advances to step S3215 to store the detachment information in the register of the MPU 202. In the subsequent step S3216, numerical information relating to the variation type counter CS is read from the hold determination area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S3217, a variation type grasping process is executed. Specifically, the outlier reach table is read out as the fluctuation display time table, and the numerical information related to the fluctuation type counter CS read out in step S3216 is collated with the outlier reach table.

  Incidentally, in the variation display time table, numerical information in a predetermined range in the variation type counter CS is divided in units of a plurality of continuous numerical information. In step S3217, by comparing the minimum value and maximum value of each section with the numerical information read in step S3216, it is determined which variation type is supported.

  In a succeeding step S3218, the information of the variation type is stored in the register of the MPU 202. Specifically, information corresponding to the variable display time derived from the collation result in step S3217 is stored in the register.

  Thereafter, in step S3219, the information stored in the reserved number counter area of the RAM 204 is read. In step S3220, a hold command selection process is executed. Specifically, the hold command corresponding to the outlier reach information stored in step S3215, the variation type information stored in step S3218, and the hold count information read in step S3219 is stored in the ROM 203 command. Read from the information storage area 223 and set as an output target.

  The hold command functions as a trigger to determine whether or not the hold notice should be started in the sub-side control device, and when the hold notice is determined to start, the sub-side control device recognizes the content of the hold notice This command is used for. The hold command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S2601 in the normal process (FIG. 38). The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the hold command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. Processing in the display control device 212 when the hold command is received will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S3221, initialization of the hold determination area in the RAM 204 is executed, and then this setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3209 that the comparison results match, the process proceeds to step S3222. In step S3222, the numerical information related to the big hit type counter C2 is read from the hold determination area of the RAM 204.

  In a succeeding step S3223, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, numerical information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot information is acquired from the distribution table in the ROM 203. Then, the numerical information read in step S3222 is compared with the numerical information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot information to determine whether or not the probability variation jackpot result is supported.

  Incidentally, in the distribution table, numerical information in a predetermined range in the jackpot type counter C2 is divided into units of a plurality of continuous numerical information. In step S3222, the jackpot result is determined by comparing the minimum and maximum values of each section with the numerical information read in step S3222.

  Thereafter, in step S3224, the jackpot type information corresponding to the processing result in step S3223 is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the subsequent step S3216, as already described, the numerical information related to the variation type counter CS is read from the hold determination area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S3217, the grasping process of the variation type is grasped. In this case, a table corresponding to the jackpot type information stored in step S3224 is read out as the variable display time table. In other words, when storing information on the normal jackpot result, the table for the normal jackpot result is read to grasp the variation type, and when storing the information on the probability variation jackpot result, the table for the probability variation jackpot result is read and the variation type To figure out. In the subsequent step S3218, as already described, the variation type information is stored in the register of the MPU 202.

  Thereafter, in step S3219, the information stored in the holding number counter area of the RAM 204 is read, and in step S3220, a holding command selection process is executed. Specifically, a hold command corresponding to the jackpot type information stored in step S3224, the variation type information stored in step S3218, and the hold number information read in step S3219 is stored in the ROM 203. It is read from the command information storage area 223 and set as an output target. Thereafter, in step S3221, initialization of the hold determination area in the RAM 204 is executed, and then this setting process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the information on whether or not a hold command results in a jackpot result, but also information on whether or not a losing reach occurs, and information on the jackpot type if a jackpot result is obtained. The variation type information and the information indicating which of the current hold information the hold command corresponds to are included. Thereby, compared with the said 1st Embodiment, the variation of the content notified with respect to a player in a hold notice increases.

<Regarding the hold notice control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212>
Next, the hold notice control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The pending notice control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252 and is started approximately at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle).

  In the hold notice control process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not an acquisition time command is received from the sound lamp control device 82. If an acquisition time command has been received, the display-side reserved storage number SN stored in the hold counter area 263 of the work RAM 254 is incremented by 1 in step S3302. The display-side reserved storage number SN corresponds to the hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257 as in the first embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S3303, a hold display area setting process is executed. In the setting process, in the hold display area 271, internal information is set for the VDP 255 so that outlier information is set for the unit areas 272 to 275 corresponding to the display-side hold storage number SN as a result of addition in step S3302. Output the command.

  However, the information set for the unit areas 272 to 275 is not reflected in the hold display area Ga of the display screen G at the timing when the setting process is executed. That is, the data set in the frame buffer of the video RAM 257 is output to the symbol display device 41, and an image corresponding to the data is displayed on the display screen G. The timing at which the process of step S3303 is executed. However, since the data is not reflected on the frame buffer, it is not reflected on the hold display area Ga.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3301 or after the processing of step S3303 is executed, it is determined in step S3304 whether or not a shift command has been received from the audio lamp control device 82. If a shift command has been received, the display-side reserved storage number SN stored in the hold counter area 263 is decremented by 1 in step S3305. In the subsequent step S3306, a shift process is executed. The shift process outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 so that the hold display information set in the first unit area 272 to the fourth unit area 275 of the hold display area 271 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. .

  However, as in the case of step S3303, the information set for the unit areas 272 to 275 is not reflected in the hold display area Ga of the display screen G at the timing when the setting process is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3304, or after the processing in step S3306 is executed, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. In the present embodiment, the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 transmits a start command to the sound lamp control device 82 when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, and sends an end command to the sound lamp control when the opening / closing execution mode ends. The display control device 212 is configured to be able to determine whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode by receiving these commands from the sound lamp control device 82.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, output setting processing is executed in step S3308. In the output setting process, an internal command is output to the VDP 255 so that the hold display information currently set in the first unit area 272 to the fourth unit area 275 of the hold display area 271 is reflected in the frame buffer. To do. Thereby, the current hold display information is reflected in the hold display area Ga of the display screen G.

  In a succeeding step S3309, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the sound lamp control device 82. If no hold command has been received, the hold notice control process is terminated. If a hold command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3310.

  In step S3310, a notification generation lottery process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice is executed. In the notification generation lottery process, the winning probability is set so that the notification generation winning is achieved with a probability of 1/3 regardless of the type of the pending command. However, the winning probability is not limited to 1/3 and is arbitrary, and the winning probability may be different depending on the type of the pending command.

  In a succeeding step S3311, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S3310 is a notification generation winning. If it is not a notification generation winning, the hold notice control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is a notification generation winning, in step S3312, a hold command content grasping process is executed. Specifically, the pending command that received the information on the presence / absence of the jackpot result, the information on the jackpot type if it is a jackpot result, the information on the presence / absence of reach in the case of a losing result, and the information on the variation type this time From the contents of the.

  In a succeeding step S3313, display content selection processing is executed. In the selection process, information for holding notice according to the content grasped in step S3312 is selected. However, in the selection process, the information for hold notice is not selected unambiguously with respect to the content grasped in step S3312, but at a predetermined selection rate from the selection targets corresponding to the grasped content. Make a selection. For example, if it corresponds to a probable jackpot result, it is selected from information for holding notice such as “probable change confirmed”, “big hit”, “big hit?”, “Reach!”, “Chance”. In the case of dealing with outreach, selection is made from information for holding notice such as “big hit?”, “Reach!”, “Chance”.

  In a succeeding step S3314, a holding number grasping process is executed. In the hold number grasping process, it is grasped what number of hold information corresponds to the hold command received this time in the digestion order.

  In a succeeding step S3315, a pending display area correction process is executed. Specifically, the information of the unit areas 272 to 275 corresponding to the order grasped in step S3314 is overwritten from the outlier information to the information for holding advance notice selected in step S3313.

  Thereafter, output setting processing is executed in step S3316. The processing content of the output setting process is the same as that in step S3308, and by executing this process, a hold notice corresponding to the content of the hold command received this time is performed. After executing the process of step S3316, the reservation notice control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3307 that the open / close execution mode is in effect, a hold notice cancellation process is executed in step S3317. In the cancellation notice cancellation processing, all the information set in the area for the current display-side storage storage number SN among the unit areas 272 to 275 of the storage display area 271 is set as outlier information, and the frame buffer The information of the unit areas 272 to 275 is not reflected. As a result, the hold notice can be terminated in response to the opening / closing execution mode, and the hold notice can be prevented from being performed during the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, notification of the number of pieces of hold information can be resumed while preventing resumption of the hold notice. After executing the process of step S3317, the hold notice control process is terminated.

  Note that the hold display area Ga itself may be deleted from the display screen G when the process of step S3317 is executed. In this case, when the next output setting process is executed, the display of the hold display area Ga on the display screen G may be resumed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A hold notice corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 may be executed at a timing before the hold information becomes a target of the determination of whether or not the hold is made. As a result, as in the first embodiment, the game is diversified and the attention of the game is increased.

  In this case, the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 performs predetermined processing that is executed non-periodically while performing holding information acquisition processing within the range of timer interrupt processing that constitutes part of the periodic processing that is periodically executed. In the remaining process (specifically, steps S2607 to S2614), a confirmation process for holding notice and a process for setting a holding command as an output target (hereinafter also referred to as a process relating to a holding notice) are executed. . Assuming a configuration that performs all of the processing related to the hold notice in the timer interrupt process, it is assumed that the time until the timer interrupt process is completed becomes extremely long. Then, the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port The situation where the process of monitoring the presence / absence of a prize at 34 and the process of acquiring the hold information cannot be performed regularly occurs, and there is a possibility that these processes cannot be performed suitably. On the other hand, since the process related to the hold notice is executed as a residual process as described above, the time until the timer interrupt process is completed is prevented from being extremely long, and the timer interrupt process is excellent. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through the execution of the hold notice while ensuring proper execution.

  Further, the timer interrupt process is interrupted and started even in the middle of the remaining process, and the process related to the above-described hold notice is set in the remaining process on the interrupted side. Thereby, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through execution of the hold notice while suppressing the influence on the start timing of the timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the processes related to the reservation notice are not executed in steps S2601 to S2606 of the normal process that constitutes a part of the periodic process that is periodically executed, but these processes are executed in the remaining process. . For example, in the situation of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the variation start process is executed in the game turn control process in step S2603, and the electric accessory 34a is opened in the electric role support process in step S2605. If the lottery of whether or not the process of opening the electric accessory 34a is executed and 4 msec has already passed at the timing when the process of step S2606 is completed, the process related to the hold notice is not executed. It is possible to return to the process of step S2601. This makes it easy to ensure regular execution of steps S2601 to S2606 of normal processing.

  In the remaining processing, the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited when the process related to the hold notice starts, so that the preferential execution of the timer interrupt process completely obstructs the execution of the process related to the hold notice. Can be suppressed. Further, since the setting of prohibition of interruption is continued until the processing related to the hold notice is completed, the processing can be satisfactorily completed when the processing is started.

  Further, in the remaining process, not only the process related to the above-described reservation notice, but also a process for updating various counters CINI and CS is executed. While the update process is being executed, the timer interrupt process is executed. Is prohibited. Thereby, when the update process is started, the process can be satisfactorily completed.

  Further, in the configuration in which the processing related to the hold notice and the processing for updating various counters CINI and CS are executed in the remaining processing, a timer interrupt is temporarily performed at the timing when one of these processing is completed. Processing interrupts are allowed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the start timing of the timer interrupt process from being extremely delayed.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for advancing the game in the main control device 81 is different from that in the eighth embodiment. Therefore, the processing configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. The main process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  First, in step S3401, a startup process associated with power-on is executed. In the subsequent step S3402, access to the RAM 204 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S3403, it is determined whether or not a RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 98 is turned on. In subsequent step S3404, it is determined whether or not a power interruption flag is stored in the RAM 204. In step S3405, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S3406, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined.

  If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the power interruption flag is stored and the RAM determination value is normal, the power interruption flag is erased from the RAM 204 in step S3407, and the RAM is deleted in step S3408. Erase the judgment value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S3411 to S3417.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to steps S3409 to S3410. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to steps S3409 to S3410. .

  In step S3409, the used area of the RAM 204 is cleared to “0” (initialized), and in step S3410, initialization of the RAM 204 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process of steps S3411 to S3417.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S3411, interrupt inhibition is set, and in subsequent step S3412, a hold command setting process is executed. The contents of the hold command setting process are the same as those in step S2609 in the eighth embodiment. In step S3413, interrupt permission is set.

  Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set again in step S3414, and the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in subsequent step S3415, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S3416. In step S3417, an interrupt permission is set.

  Then, it returns to step S3411 and repeats the process of step S3411-step S3417.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3501, a process of storing the return address in the register of the MPU 202 is executed. In subsequent step S3502, a process of saving information stored in the current register of the MPU 202 to the RAM 204 is executed.

  Thereafter, in steps S3503 to S3508, processing similar to that in steps S2703 to S2708 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 39) in the eighth embodiment is executed, and in steps S3509 to S3513, The same processing as Step S2602 to Step S2606 of the normal processing (FIG. 38) in the eighth embodiment is executed.

  In the subsequent step S3514, external output processing is executed. In step S3515, the data saved in the RAM 204 in step S3502 is restored to the register of the MPU 202. In step S3516, the return address stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S3501 is referred to. Grasp the address of normal processing that will return after completion. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game times control process in which the success / failure determination process is executed at the start of the game times, and the winning process for the operating port that performs the acquisition of the hold information are the normal process and the timer interrupt process. Rather than being set separately, these processes are set as a series of timer interrupt processing.

  In this case, assuming that the timer interrupt process is configured to perform all of the confirmation process for the hold notice and the process for setting the hold command as an output target (hereinafter also referred to as a process related to the hold notice), the timer interrupt process It is assumed that the time until is completed becomes extremely long. In particular, since the number of numerical information to be referred to is increased in the high probability mode as compared with the low probability mode, it is possible to determine whether or not to determine whether or not the game is started and hold information within the range of one timer interrupt process. Assuming a configuration in which such a determination process is performed, the time until the timer interrupt process is completed becomes extremely long. Then, the process for monitoring the presence or absence of winning in the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, the process for obtaining the hold information, the process related to the start of the game round, and the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 and the electric accessory 34a. There may be a situation in which processing or the like cannot be performed regularly, and these processing may not be performed appropriately. On the other hand, since the process related to the hold notice is executed in the residual process executed between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, the time until the timer interrupt process is completed is It is possible to prevent the game from becoming extremely long, and to improve the degree of attention of the game through the execution of the hold notice while ensuring the good execution of the timer interrupt process.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the setting process at the time of acquisition executed by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 is different. The setting process at the time of acquisition in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the setting process at the time of acquisition is subsequently executed when the hold information is newly acquired, as in the eighth embodiment.

  First, in step S3601, a hold number grasping process is executed. In the subsequent step S3602, an acquisition time command including information on the number of holdings grasped in step S3601 is set as an output target.

  In the following step S3603, a processing waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204, and in step S3604, the current big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variable type counter CS are provided in the RAM 204. Overwrite the hold judgment area. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the hold information is newly acquired in the situation where the hold information that is already subject to the confirmation process for the hold notice exists, it is already the target of the check process. The held information is maintained as a target of the confirmation process as it is, and the newly acquired hold information is excluded from the target of the confirmation process. On the other hand, in the setting process at the time of acquisition in the present embodiment, the process corresponding to step S3003 in the eighth embodiment is not executed, so the hold that has already been subject to the confirmation process for the hold notice. If hold information is newly acquired in the situation where the information exists, the hold information that was the target first is excluded from the target of the confirmation process, and the newly acquired hold information is It becomes a target.

  As described above, even if acquisition of multiple hold information occurs continuously without interposing a confirmation process for hold notice, the target for which the confirmation process for hold notice is executed is always Since it becomes the hold information, it is not necessary to provide the hold number counter area in the RAM 204, and it is not necessary to provide a process for updating the hold number counter area. Therefore, simplification of the process for grasping in MPU 202 the object for which the confirmation process for holding notice is performed.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the internal lottery and the configuration related to the hold notice are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 49 is a front view of the game board 24 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, the configuration of the main display unit 305 is different from the main display unit 43 in the first embodiment. Specifically, the main display unit 43 is based on the first result display unit AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 33 and the winning at the lower working port 34. And a second result display section BS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed.

In the first result display section AS, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the upper working port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 33 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. When the variable display is performed in the first result display section AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. In the second result display section BS, the winning of the lower operation port 34 is used as a trigger. The change display is performed, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 is clearly shown by the display as a stop result of the change display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly.

  The main display unit 305 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the main display unit 305 is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT and a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 305, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  Corresponding to the provision of the first result display portion AS and the second result display portion BS as described above, the center frame 42 is provided with a plurality of holding lamp portions 306 and 307. More specifically, a first result holding section 306 corresponding to the first result display section AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the lower left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operation port 33 is reserved, and the number of reserves is displayed when the first result holding lamp section 306 is turned on. Also, a second result holding lamp portion 307 corresponding to the second result display portion BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the lower right portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the lower operating port 34 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the second result holding lamp section 307 is turned on.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a configuration related to the internal lottery in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, and the random number initial stage A value counter CINI and an electric accessory release counter C4 are provided. The configuration relating to the updating of each of the counters C1 to C4, CS, and CINI is the same as that in the first embodiment. However, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 among the above counter values are included in the hold information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. Although only the reach random number counter C3 is included, in this embodiment, in addition to these counter values, a variation type counter CS is included.

  The reserved ball storage area 232 in the present embodiment is provided with a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total number of reservations storage area. ing.

  The first result display section reservation area Ra provided as the first acquisition information storage means includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, and a fourth area Ra4. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS is stored in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls. Note that the combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the first result display holding area Ra is the holding information related to the upper operating port 33. The hold information corresponds to the first special information in the present embodiment.

  In the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4, when the winning to the upper working port 33 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4 Each numerical information is sequentially stored in time series. By providing the four areas Ra1 to Ra4 in this way, up to four game ball winning histories to the upper operation port 33 are held and stored.

  The second result display section holding area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means includes a first area Rb1, a second area Rb2, a third area Rb3, and a fourth area Rb4, and goes to the lower working port 34. This is a holding area for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls. Note that the combination of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS stored in the second result display area holding area Rb is the holding information related to the lower operating port 34. The hold information corresponds to the second special information in the present embodiment.

  In the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4, when the winning to the lower working port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first area Rb1 → second area Rb2 → third area Rb3 → fourth area Rb4 Each numerical information is sequentially stored in time series. By providing the four areas Rb1 to Rb4 in this way, up to four game ball winning histories to the lower operation port 34 are stored on hold.

  When the execution area AE starts the variable display of each result display section AS, BS, each value stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb is stored. It is an area for moving.

  Next, the success / failure table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  51A shows a success / failure table for the low-probability mode, and FIG. 51A-1 is referred to when executing the success / failure determination process for the hold information acquired based on winning in the upper working port 33. FIG. FIG. 51 (a-2) is a success / failure table which is referred to when executing the success / failure determination process on the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34. FIG. 51 (b) shows a high / probability mode success / failure table, and FIG. 51 (b-1) is referred to when executing the success / failure determination processing for the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33. FIG. 51 (b-2) is a success / failure table that is referred to when performing the success / failure determination process on the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operation port 34.

  In a gaming state in which the low / probability mode success / failure table is referred to, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the value of the random number for winning the jackpot is one. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the value of the random number for winning the jackpot is ten. In this case, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  In each winning / failing lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value that is a big winner, but in this embodiment, the special result (small result) and the normal result are excluded as the result. Two types of results are set. Neither special failure result nor normal failure result will trigger the transition to the winning / failing lottery mode or support mode, but the special failure result will trigger the switching to the opening / closing execution mode, while the normal failure result will switch to the opening / closing execution mode. It will not be an opportunity for transition.

  As will be described in detail later, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by a special loss result is a mode in which a winning to the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur, and the opening / closing execution mode has an influence on the game ball grant rate. In this mode, the operation of the variable winning device 32 is used as an effect while suppressing.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a-1) and FIG. 51 (b-1), when the hold information related to the upper working port 33 is the target of the determination process, the special failure result is included in the selection target. As shown in FIG. 51 (a-2) and FIG. 51 (b-2), when the hold information related to the lower working port 34 is the target of the success / failure determination process, a special loss result is included in the selection target. Absent. Acquisition of the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is difficult to occur when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, but easily occurs when the support mode is the high-frequency support. The high-frequency support mode corresponds to a state where the time required for game times to be digested is shortened, which is referred to as a so-called short-time state. In such a state, it is difficult to generate a special outage result. It is possible to give priority to shortening the time by suppressing the use of the execution mode as an effect.

  Next, the distribution table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 52A is a distribution table that is referred to when the type determination process is performed on the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33, and FIG. It is a distribution table referred when performing classification determination processing about the hold information acquired based on winning.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot result selected based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the success / failure determination process, the low-probable jackpot result, the most advantageous jackpot result, the jump-up jackpot result, the explicit high-probability jackpot result, An implicit high-probability outcome is set. Each of these jackpot results has three types: (1) contents relating to the opening / closing execution mode, (2) contents relating to the success / failure lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) contents relating to the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. At least one of the contents is different.

  Here, the contents of various game results that trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

  Of the various game results shown in FIG. 53, the various jackpot results are game results that are selected when the jackpot winning is selected in the winning / notting lottery, and the special loss result is selected when the jackpot winning is not determined in the winning / notifying lottery. It is a game result.

  The transition mode between the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode will be described. If the result is a special losing result, the transition between the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur before and after the opening / closing execution mode as described above. In the case of a low probability winning result, after the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode, and the number of games after the support mode shifts is the reference end number (specifically, 100 times). It becomes high frequency support mode until it becomes. After the end reference count has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  When the most advantageous jackpot result, jump-up jackpot result, and explicit high-probability jackpot result are obtained, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode, and the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode continues until at least the next jackpot result occurs. When the result is an unspecified high probability winning result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode, and the support mode is maintained before the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, when the high-frequency support mode is set, the high-frequency support mode continues until at least the next jackpot result occurs.

  Next, the contents of the opening / closing execution mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, a round number regulation mode and an opening / closing number regulation mode are set as the opening / closing execution modes.

  The round number regulation mode is a mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit. In addition, the round game means that the upper limit duration (upper limit duration) set corresponding to the round game has elapsed, and the upper limit number of game balls set corresponding to the round game is a big winning mouth. It is a game that continues until one of the conditions for winning a prize is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a round game corresponds to the opening / closing of the upper limit number of times for the round game set in correspondence with the round game, and to the round game. The upper limit number of game balls set in this way may be a game that continues until one of the conditions for winning a prize winning opening 32a is satisfied. By the way, although the upper limit number that is one end condition of the round game is set to nine, it is not limited to this and may be one or other plural, and for each type of round game It is good also as a structure from which a number differs.

  Based on one of the jackpot results, it will shift to the round number regulation mode, but even if any jackpot result is triggered, the maximum number of land games is the common number (specifically Is the same at 15 times). As described above, since the upper limit number of round games is common, a dedicated display unit for notifying the upper limit number of round games is not provided.

  On the other hand, in the opening / closing number regulation mode, round games are not set, the number of opening / closing of the variable winning device 32 becomes the upper limit number, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win the big winning opening 32a. This mode is terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied. Incidentally, the upper limit number in the open / close number regulation mode is set to nine, which is the same as the upper limit number of round games, but is not limited to this and may be smaller than the upper limit number of round games. It may be a large number. The round number regulation mode shifts based on any jackpot result, and the open / close number regulation mode shifts based on a special loss result.

  The detailed contents of the opening / closing execution mode in each game result will be described.

  In the opening / closing execution mode that shifts when triggered by either the low probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result, the mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with 15 times as the upper limit number. Opening and closing of the big prize winning opening 32a is performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a single opening mode of the variable winning device 32 has a plurality of types with different opening durations (opening durations) from when the big winning opening 32a is opened until it is closed. Is set. Specifically, a long-time mode (long-term mode) set to 29 sec, which is the longest open time, and a short time set to 0.06 sec, which is the shortest time shorter than the longest time, are described above. A mode (short-term mode) is set.

  In the present embodiment, in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec. . In addition, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to 9 for round games, and the upper limit number of end conditions is also set to 9 in the open / close number regulation mode. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or the open / close number regulation mode is set. . On the other hand, in the short time mode, a time shorter than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game or the open / closed number regulation mode, more specifically, a time shorter than the launch period of the game ball is released. The duration is set. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time manner, the maximum number of winnings in one round game or the open / closed number regulation mode is generated at the large winning opening 32a. If the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a short time mode, there will be no winning at the big winning opening 32a or even if a winning occurs. There is expected.

  In the opening / closing execution mode that shifts in response to either the low-probability jackpot result or the most advantageous jackpot result, as described above, one round winning opening 32a is opened / closed in a long-time manner in each round game, so that there are many players. It becomes possible to receive payout of game balls.

  In game times that result in a low probability winning result, a combination of the same even number of symbols is stopped and displayed on one active line on the symbol display device 41, and a special effect called effect A is performed during the opening / closing execution mode. Further, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, an effect for game times is performed in a manner corresponding to the low probability winning result. Therefore, the player can grasp from the content of the production that the low probability big hit result has been obtained.

  Similarly, in the game times that are the most advantageous jackpot results, the combination of the same odd number of symbols is stopped and displayed on one active line on the symbol display device 41, and a special effect called effect B is performed during the opening / closing execution mode. Is called. Further, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, an effect for game times is performed in a manner corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. Therefore, the player can grasp from the content of the production that the most advantageous big hit result has been achieved.

  In the open / close execution mode that shifts when triggered by either the explicit high-precision jackpot result or the non-explicit high-precision jackpot result, the round game is entered in the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit of 15 times, and each round game has a short time. Opening and closing of the one big winning opening 32a according to the mode is performed. Further, when a special outage result is obtained, the mode shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the large winning opening 32a is opened / closed 15 times in a short time mode.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode that shifts in response to any of the explicit high-accuracy big hit results, the non-explicit high-precision big hit results, and the special outlier results, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed only in a short time mode, and the number of times is 15 The total number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 32a is 15 times. As described above, the opening / closing of the special winning opening 32a is performed only in a short time mode, so that even if the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the payout of the game ball to the player does not occur substantially. Therefore, the opening / closing execution mode can be executed as a kind of effect that does not substantially increase the player's ball.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, not only the opening / closing mode of the special winning opening 32a, but also the waiting time for opening, the time between successive opening / closing operations, and the waiting time for ending are the same. Therefore, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the operation of the variable winning device 32 is visually similar regardless of the game result that is the trigger of the shifting, and any game result is determined from the operation of the variable winning device 32. The player is unable to grasp the trigger.

  By the way, there is no dedicated display part indicating that it is in the round number regulation mode, and the number of round games that are played due to the fact that the upper limit number of rounds in the round number regulation mode is all the same is shown. There is no dedicated display. Therefore, it is impossible to grasp which of the round number regulation mode and the open / close number regulation mode based on the dedicated display section.

  The symbol display device 41 stops displaying a common symbol combination and displays at least halfway from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode in the game times that are one of the explicit high probability jackpot result, the non-explicit high probability jackpot result, and the special missed result. The production in the opening / closing execution mode is common to production C until the timing of. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed, at least until halfway timing, even if the production including the display content of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed, it is understood which game result is the trigger. Can not do it. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the player can play a game while predicting which game result is triggered.

  If the implicit high-probability outcome and the special outlier result trigger the transition, the previous support mode will continue. The production in the opening / closing execution mode is common to production C until the end. Therefore, in the event that the non-explicit high-probability outcome and the special out-going result trigger the transition, the player predicts whether the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode or the high probability mode. And the degree of attention of the game after the opening / closing execution mode can be improved.

  On the other hand, when an explicit high probability winning result is obtained, the high-frequency support mode is set regardless of the support mode used so far. Therefore, for example, in the situation of the low frequency support mode, an explicit high probability result is obtained, and when the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the player It is possible to recognize that the game result that has become an opportunity is an explicit high-precision jackpot result.

  In response to such a situation, if an explicit high-accuracy big hit result is obtained, the explicit high-precision big hit result is obtained from the end of the last opening / closing in the open / close execution mode until the ending waiting time elapses. An effect E corresponding to is executed. As a result, when an explicit high-probability winning result is obtained, an explicit high-probability winning result is obtained from the middle while allowing the player to predict which game result was triggered until the middle of the opening / closing execution mode. This can be taught.

  In the opening / closing execution mode that shifts with the jump-up jackpot result as a trigger, the mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with an upper limit of 15 times, and the opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a in a short time mode is performed in the 1R round game. 15 times. In other words, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed a plurality of times in one round game. In other words, in one round game, there occurs at least once a phenomenon that the special winning opening 32a is changed from the open state to the closed state and subsequently opened again. In each round game of the 2R to 15R, the single prize winning opening 32a is opened and closed once for a long time.

  In other words, in the opening / closing execution mode, the special prize opening 32a is first opened and closed 15 times in a short time mode, and then the special prize opening 32a is opened and closed 14 times in a long time mode. As a result, in the opening / closing execution mode, there is substantially no payout of game balls to the player from the start timing to midway timing, but after that midway timing, a large amount of game balls have been paid out to the player. Arise.

  The opening / closing execution mode is the same as the opening / closing execution mode in which the waiting time for opening and the time between successive opening / closing operations are triggered by a special loss result or an unspecified high-precision hit result. Therefore, in the both opening and closing execution modes, there is a common section (low identification section or non-identifiable section) in which the operation of the variable winning device 32 is visually similar. In the common section, the operation of the variable winning device 32 is The player cannot grasp which game result is the opportunity.

  Further, in the game times that result in the jump-up jackpot result, the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the 1R round game is completed from the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode or the 2R round. The effect C until the game is started is common to the effect C. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed, at least until halfway timing, even if the production including the display content of the symbol display device 41 is confirmed, it is understood which game result is the trigger. Can not do it. Therefore, when the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the player can play a game while predicting which game result is triggered.

  On the other hand, when the jump-up jackpot result is reached, the common section ends in the 1R round game, and the 2nd and subsequent rounds open and close the big prize opening 32a in a long-time manner. Therefore, the player who has confirmed the aspect can recognize that the game result that has caused the transition is a jump-up jackpot result. In response to such a situation, when the jump-up jackpot result is obtained, the effect D corresponding to the jump-up jackpot result is executed after the 2R round game. As a result, when a jump-up jackpot result is reached, the player predicts which game result was triggered until the middle of the opening / closing execution mode, and confirms that the jump-up jackpot result from the middle. It becomes possible to teach.

  The mode of allocation to each jackpot result among the game results is different between the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 34. is doing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52A, in the distribution table for the first result display unit, “0 to 34” out of the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 99” has a low probability. Corresponding to the jackpot result, “35 to 69” corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result, “70 to 72” corresponds to the jump-up jackpot result, and “73 to 84” is the explicit high probability hit It corresponds to the result, and “85 to 99” corresponds to the non-explicit high probability hit result.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), in the distribution table for the second result display section, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 34” is the low probability big hit result. "35-94" corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result, "95-97" corresponds to the jump-up jackpot result, "98" corresponds to the explicit high-probability jackpot result “99” corresponds to the non-explicit high-precision jackpot result.

  As described above, in any of the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the probability that the game result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode is selected. It is the same. Therefore, the probability that the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the case where the big win result is based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the big hit result based on the winning to the lower working port 34 It becomes the same in the case of becoming.

  However, when a jackpot result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode is generated based on the winning to the lower working port 34, the opening / closing execution mode in which the opening of the large winning port 32a in the long-time mode occurs is set to 63/65. When the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the high probability mode is generated based on the winning to the upper working port 33 while the transition is made with probability, the opening / closing that causes the opening of the large winning port 32a in the long-time mode occurs Transition to execution mode with a probability of 38/65. That is, the player who wins the jackpot result based on the winning of the lower operating port 34 is more advantageous to the player than the player who wins the jackpot result based on the winning of the upper operating port 33. As a result, the player plays a game while expecting a prize to be generated in the lower operating port 34 out of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and accordingly, a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 34. The player's attention to the high-frequency support mode that increases in frequency increases.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the advantage of winning the lower operating port 34 is not limited to the above configuration. For example, in the allocation table for the second result display unit, the low-accuracy winning result and the most advantageous winning hit are obtained. Only the result may be set, and each jackpot result may be set in the distribution table for the first result display unit. In other words, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which the selection ratio of the set jackpot result is different, a difference may be provided in the advantage by making the type of the set jackpot result different.

<About various processes executed by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201>
Next, the processing configuration in the present embodiment executed by the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 will be described.

<Timer interrupt processing>
The timer interrupt process in the present embodiment has the same processing configuration as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 39) in the eighth embodiment, and is periodically started with a relatively short cycle of 2 msec. Steps S2701 to S2710 are executed. However, the processing configuration of the winning process for the operation port in step S2708 is different from that in the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, the winning process for the operation port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the upper operation opening winning flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the upper operation opening winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3706 without executing the processes of steps S3702 to S3705. If the upper operation opening winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3702.

  In step S3702, the upper operation opening winning flag is deleted. In the subsequent step S3703, the start hold storage number RaN stored in the first result display section hold area Ra is set (hereinafter also referred to as the first start hold storage number RaN). When this process is executed, a prize ball command corresponding to payout of three game balls is set as an output target.

  Thereafter, information acquisition processing is executed in step S3704, and setting processing at the time of acquisition is executed in step S3705.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3701, or after the processing in step S3705 is executed, it is determined in step S3706 whether or not the lower operation opening prize flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the lower operation opening winning flag is not stored, the main winning process is terminated as it is. If the lower working opening winning flag is stored, the lower working opening winning flag is erased in step S3707, and the start stored in the second result display holding area Rb in step S3708. The reserved memory number RbN is set (hereinafter also referred to as the second start reserved memory number RbN). When this process is executed, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is set as an output target.

  Thereafter, information acquisition processing is executed in step S3704, and setting processing at the time of acquisition is executed in step S3705. In this case, by making a negative determination in the process of step S3706 after the process of step S3705, the main winning process is terminated.

  Of the information acquisition processing in step S3704 and the setting processing at the time of acquisition in step S3705, the setting processing at the time of acquisition will be described later, and the information acquisition processing in step S3704 will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. .

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether the start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S3703 or step S3708 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If the start pending storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding result display area holding area is set to 1 in step S3802. At the same time, 1 is added to the total reserved number CRN in step S3803.

  Thereafter, after executing the process of step S3804, the information acquisition process is terminated. In step S3804, each value (each numerical value information) of the current jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS is used as a free area Ra1 in the corresponding result display area reservation areas Ra and Rb. ˜Ra4, Rb1˜Rb4, the first area, that is, the area corresponding to the reserved storage number added by 1 in step S3802 is stored.

  That is, when the first start pending storage number RaN is set, the values of the current jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS are used for the first result display unit. Stored in the first area among the empty areas Ra1 to Ra4 of the reserved area Ra, that is, the area corresponding to the first start reserved memory number RaN added by 1 in step S3802.

  Further, when the second start pending storage number RbN is set, the values of the current big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS are used for the second result display section. Stored in the first area among the free areas Rb1 to Rb4 of the reserved area Rb, that is, the area corresponding to the second start reserved memory number RbN added by 1 in step S3802.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing normal processing in the present embodiment.

  Similar to the first embodiment, the normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on. As its outline, the processing from step S3901 to step S3906 is executed as a series of processing performed at a cycle of 4 msec, and the processing from step S3907 to step S3917 is executed as the processing for the remaining time.

  In normal processing, first, in step S3901, external output processing is executed. Specifically, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. In a succeeding step S3902, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Thereafter, a game times control process is executed in step S3903.

  In the game times control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, first, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the game turn control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S4002.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S4002 whether the main display unit 305 is in a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS is in a variable display.

  If the main display unit 305 is not in a variable display, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not the total number of reservations CRN is “0”. The case where the total reserved number CRN is “0” means that the start reserved memory number is “0” for both the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34. Therefore, the game times control process is finished as it is. If the total number of reservations CRN is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S4004.

  In the data setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 58, first, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the second start hold memory number RbN stored in the second result display section hold area Rb is “0”. judge. When the second start hold memory number RbN is “0”, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S4102 to S4107 is executed, and when the second start hold memory number RbN is not “0”. Executes the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S4108 to S4113.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is a case where the total reserved number CRN is 1 or more as described above. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold storage number RbN is “0”. If it is not “0”, that is, the hold information for variable display is displayed for the second result display unit BS. If stored, the data stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is set for variable display regardless of whether or not the first start reservation storage number RaN is 1 or more. I made it. Thereby, when the hold information is stored in both the first result display portion reservation area Ra and the second result display portion reservation area Rb, the second result display portion reservation corresponding to the lower operation port 34 is performed. The hold information stored in the area Rb is prioritized. In other words, even if the hold information based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is acquired first, if the holding information based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is acquired, it is acquired first. The hold information related to the lower operation port 34 acquired after the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 that has been performed is preferentially digested.

  As already described, when the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 34 is the target of the determination process, the holding information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 is determined to be correct. The type of jackpot result that is selected when the jackpot is won is more advantageous for the player than when it is a target of processing. In addition, when the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the high-frequency support mode, winning in the lower working port 34 is more likely to occur than winning in the upper working port 33. In such a configuration, in the determination process, the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is preferentially digested over the hold information related to the upper operation port 33, so that the player can benefit in the high frequency support mode. It will be easier to get.

  In addition, a player who does not want the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 to be the target of the success / failure determination process continues the firing of the game ball, and the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is determined to be the target of the determination process. It is thought that it is going to maintain the state which becomes. In this case, it is expected that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is improved.

  Returning to the description of the data setting process, in the data setting process for the first result display unit, first, in step S4102, the first start reserved memory number RaN in the first result display unit reserved area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S4103, 1 is subtracted from the total reserved number CRN. Thereafter, in step S4104, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display section reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S4105, a process of shifting the data stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas Ra1 to Ra4 to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1, and the second area Ra2 → The data in each area is shifted such as the first area Ra1, the third area Ra3 → the second area Ra2, the fourth area Ra4 → the third area Ra3.

  In the subsequent step S4106, if the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204, it is deleted, and if not stored, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

  In the subsequent step S4107, an upper shift command, which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data of the first result display area reservation area Ra has been shifted is set. To do. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The upper shift command set in step S4107 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S3901 in the normal process (FIG. 56). The voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the first result hold lamp unit 306 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold based on the received upper shift command.

  In the data setting process for the second result display unit, first, in step S4108, 1 is subtracted from the second reserved storage number RbN of the second result display unit reservation area Rb. In subsequent step S4109, 1 is subtracted from the total reserved number CRN. Thereafter, in step S4110, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, the process which shifts the data stored in 2nd result display part holding | maintenance area Rb in step S4111 is performed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas Rb1 to Rb4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Rb1 and the second area Rb2 → The data in each area is shifted such as first area Rb1, third area Rb3 → second area Rb2, and fourth area Rb4 → third area Rb3.

  In the subsequent step S4112, if the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the second result display unit flag is stored. If stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S4113, a lower shift command, which is information for making the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, recognize that the data shift of the second result display area reservation area Rb has been performed. Set. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The lower shift time command set in step S4113 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S3901 in the normal process (FIG. 56). The voice lamp control device 82 executes processing for changing the display on the second result holding lamp unit 307 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings, based on the received lower shift command.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 57), after the data setting process is executed in step S4004, a change start process is executed in step S4005. In the variation start process in the present embodiment, first, the success / failure determination process (FIG. 16) is executed in the same manner as the variation start process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment. In this case, in the present embodiment, the success / failure table described with reference to FIG. 51 is referred to, and when the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is a target, in addition to the determination of whether or not the jackpot is won, a special It is determined whether or not the result is an outlier.

  In the type determination process in step S703, when the target hold information is related to the upper operation port 33, the distribution table for the first result display unit is referred to, and the lower operation port 34 is set. In such a case, the distribution table for the second result display unit is referred to. Then, a stop result setting process corresponding to the game result derived from the results of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process is executed. The stop result setting process is a process for setting the pattern form that is finally set in the main display unit 305 in the current game round, and the low probability big hit result, the most advantageous big hit result, the jump up jackpot result, The form of the pattern is different in correspondence with each of the explicit high probability hit result, the non-explicit high probability hit result, the special outlier result, and the normal outlier result. In this case, since the display area of the main display unit 305 is smaller than that of the symbol display device 41, it is difficult for the player to recognize and the pattern mode is also difficult for the player to identify.

  Further, in step S708, the variable display time is determined with reference to the variable display time table corresponding to each game result. In step S709, the current game time is stored in the hold information related to the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34. A change command including information that can be recognized by the sub-side control device as to which of the hold information is targeted is set as an output target. Further, in step S710, the variable display is started on the side corresponding to the hold information that is the object of the current determination of the first or second result display unit AS or second result display unit BS of the main display unit 305.

  After executing the variation start process in step S4005, the process of step S4006 to step S4014 is executed, and then the game turn control process is terminated. The processes in steps S4006 to S4014 will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the main display unit 305 is in a variable display, the process proceeds to step S4015. In step S4015, it is determined whether or not the current game times variation display time has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S4016. In the process for variable display, the display mode in the result display section related to the current game time is changed. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  If the variable display time has elapsed, the variable end process is executed in step S4017. In the variation end process, display control is performed on the result display unit so that the pattern mode set in the previous variation start process is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game time. In the subsequent step S4018, a change end command is set. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the normal process (FIG. 56), after the game times control process is executed in step S3903, the game state transition process is executed in step S3904. In the gaming state transition process, the winning opening opening / closing process is executed so that the opening / closing execution mode is executed in a manner corresponding to each game result as described with reference to FIG. 55, and after the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Performs the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode so that the determination of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode is performed in a manner corresponding to each game result as described with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, a power support process is executed in step S3905, and a game ball launch control process is executed in step S3906. These processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. After executing the process of step S3906, whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached in step S3907, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Determine whether. If the next normal processing start timing has not been reached, the remaining processing of steps S3908 to S3917 is executed.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S3908, interrupt prohibition is set in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In subsequent step S3909, it is necessary to execute the hold notice for the hold information related to the upper operation port 33. Executes the upper pending command setting process for command output settings. The processing content of the upper hold command setting process will be described later. Then, in step S3910, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted is performed.

  After that, in step S3911, interrupt prohibition is set again to prohibit the generation of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S3912, a command necessary for executing the hold notice for the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is set. Executes the lower hold command setting process for setting the output. The processing content of the lower hold command setting process will be described later. In step S3913, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S 3914, interrupt prohibition is set again to prohibit the generation of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S 3915, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S 3916, the variation type counter CS is updated. Perform the update. In step S3917, an interrupt permission setting is made to switch from the state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted.

  Thereafter, the process returns to step S3907, and the processes of step S3908 to step S3917 are repeated until an affirmative determination is made in step S3907.

  In other words, in the remaining process, a plurality of types of processes including a process related to the progress of the game and a process related to data setting necessary for proceeding with the game are set, and some of the plurality of types of processes are set. Interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission processes are set across the processes, and interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission processes are set across some other processes. That is, when the process from the interrupt prohibition process to the interrupt permission process is regarded as one unit process, the remaining process includes a plurality of one unit processes.

  Further, in a plurality of one-unit processes, the number of control targets is different between a predetermined one-unit process and another one-unit process. That is, in one unit of processing executed at a relatively early timing after the negative determination is made in step S3907, only one type of control target for setting the upper hold command is included, and the next is the first. One unit of processing executed at the timing includes only one type of control target, that is, setting of the lower hold command, whereas in one unit of processing executed at the latest timing, the random number initial Two types of control objects, that is, update of the value counter CINI and update of the variation type counter CS are included. However, the longest processing time required for each unit of processing is longer in the first unit and the intermediate unit than in the rear unit.

  Note that the longest processing time in each unit of processing is not limited to a different configuration, and each unit of processing is processed so that the longest processing time in each unit of processing is the same. Allocation may be performed. In this case, the period in which the interrupt is permitted can be the same, substantially the same, or the same. In addition, the configuration for determining whether or not 4 msec has elapsed in step S3907 is not essential. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not the timer interrupt processing has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

<Setting process during acquisition>
Next, the setting process at the time of acquisition executed in step S3705 in the winning process for the operation opening (FIG. 54) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S4201, by determining whether the currently set start hold memory number N is the first start hold memory number RaN or the second start hold memory number RbN, the hold information acquired this time is increased. It is determined which of the operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 is associated with winning. If the hold information acquired this time relates to winning in the upper working port 33, an affirmative determination is made in step S4201, and the processing in steps S4202 to S4207 is executed.

  In step S4202, a process of determining the upper holding number from the first start holding memory number RaN is executed. In the subsequent step S4203, an upper acquisition command including information indicating the number of holds determined in step S4202 and information indicating that the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 has increased is read from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203, and output target Set as.

  The upper acquisition time command indicates that the hold information has been newly acquired based on the winning to the upper operation port 33, and the hold information is the current number of hold information in the hold area Ra for the first result display section. It is a command which shows whether it concerns. The upper acquisition command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S3901 in the normal process (FIG. 56). The voice lamp control device 82 receives the upper acquisition time command to identify that the hold information has increased, and performs light emission control of the hold lamp unit 306 for the first result. Also, the audio lamp control device 82 transmits the upper acquisition time command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. Processing in the display control device 212 when the upper acquisition command is received will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S4204, it is determined whether or not the upper process waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204. The upper process waiting flag is a standby state in which a holding notice confirmation process should be executed for the hold information when acquisition of the hold information based on winning in the upper working port 33 has already occurred. This is information for specifying the MPU 202. If the upper process wait flag is stored, the present setting process is terminated as it is. If the upper process wait flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4205.

  In step S4205, the upper process waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S4206, each value of the current jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS is stored in the upper hold determination area provided in the RAM 204. Incidentally, since there is no processing for updating the counters C1 to C3 and CS between the processing in step S3704 and the processing in step S4206, the numerical information stored in step S4206 is stored in the immediately preceding step S3704. It is the same as each numerical information stored in the first result display area for reserved area Ra.

  Note that the process for storing the same numerical information as the numerical information acquired in the immediately preceding hold information acquisition process in the hold determination area is not limited to the above process. For example, immediately before step S3704 The numerical value information stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra may be read from the area Ra and written in the upper reservation determination area. Further, instead of the process of writing each numerical information in the upper hold determination area, the MPU 202 can recognize which area Ra1 to Ra4 of the hold result Ra for the current result display unit Ra is stored. When referring to the hold information in the hold command setting process to be described later, the information may be read from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit.

  In a succeeding step S4207, an update process of the upper holding number counter is executed. Specifically, the upper hold number counter area obtained in step S4202 is overwritten on the upper hold number counter area in the upper hold number counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. For example, if it is determined in step S4202 that the upper holding number is “1”, the information in the upper holding number counter area is “1” in step S4207, and the upper holding number is “4” in step S4202. If it is determined that the upper hold number counter area information is “4” in step S4207. The upper hold counter area is the first result display section hold when the confirmation process for holding notice is executed in the setting process of the upper hold command described later. It is used for the MPU 202 to grasp which holding information in the area Ra corresponds to the holding information. After executing the process of step S4207, the present setting process is terminated.

  Here, when one hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is set as a confirmation process for the upper hold notice, the upper process wait flag is stored in the RAM 204 and the upper process wait flag is stored. In the situation, a negative determination is made in step S4204, so that one hold information related to the upper working port 33 is newly set as a target for confirmation processing for the hold advance notice, and a new related to the upper working port 33 is concerned. When the hold information is acquired, the hold information is excluded from the confirmation process for the hold notice. As a result, it is possible to execute the process related to the hold notice while reducing the processing load of the MPU 202 as compared to the case where all the hold information related to the upper operating port 33 is the target of the confirmation process for the hold notice. It becomes.

  The situation in which the newly acquired hold information related to the upper operating port 33 is excluded from the confirmation process for the hold notice is described later after the hold information that is the object of the confirmation process for the upper hold notice is obtained. This occurs when the timer interrupt process is newly started and the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is newly acquired by the timer interrupt process until the upper hold command setting process is executed. However, even if it is excluded from the confirmation process for the upper hold notice, the upper acquisition time command is output to the sub-side control device for the hold information. There is no difference between the control device on the sub-side in terms of number recognition.

  If the hold information acquired this time is related to winning in the lower working port 34, a negative determination is made in step S4201, and the processes of steps S4208 to S4213 are executed.

  In step S4208, a process of determining the lower hold number from the second start hold memory number RbN is executed. In the subsequent step S4209, the lower acquisition time command including the information on the number of holdings grasped in step S4208 and the information indicating that the holding information related to the lower operation port 34 has increased is read from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 and output. Set as target.

  The lower acquisition time command indicates that the hold information has been newly acquired based on the winning to the lower operation port 34, and the hold information is the current hold number in the second result display portion hold area Rb. This is a command indicating whether it is related to information. The lower acquisition time command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S3901 in the normal process (FIG. 56). The voice lamp control device 82 receives the lower acquisition time command to identify that the hold information has increased, and performs the light emission control of the hold lamp unit 307 for the second result. In addition, the audio lamp control device 82 transmits the lower acquisition time command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. Processing in the display control device 212 when the lower acquisition time command is received will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S4210, it is determined whether or not a lower processing waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204. Whether the lower processing waiting flag is a standby state in which a holding notice confirmation process should be executed for the holding information when the holding information has already been acquired based on the winning to the lower operation port 34. This is information for specifying whether or not the MPU 202 determines whether or not. If the lower process wait flag is stored, the present setting process is terminated as it is. If the lower process wait flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S4211.

  In step S4211, the lower process waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S4212, each value of the current jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and variation type counter CS is stored in the lower hold determination area provided in the RAM 204. Incidentally, since there is no processing for updating the counters C1 to C3 and CS between the processing in step S3704 and the processing in step S4212, each numerical information stored in step S4212 is stored in the immediately preceding step S3704. It is the same as each numerical information stored in the first result display area for reserved area Ra.

  Note that the process for storing the same numerical information as the numerical information acquired in the immediately preceding hold information acquisition process in the hold determination area is not limited to the above process. For example, immediately before step S3704 The numerical value information stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb may be read from the area Rb and written in the lower reservation determination area. Also, instead of the process of writing each numerical information in the lower hold determination area, the MPU 202 can recognize which area Rb1 to Rb4 of the hold result Rb for the second result display unit is stored in the second result display area Rb. When the hold information is referred to in a hold command setting process described later, the information may be read from the hold area Rb for the second result display unit.

  In a succeeding step S4213, an update process of the lower holding number counter is executed. Specifically, the lower hold count counter area obtained in step S4208 is overwritten on the lower hold count counter area for the lower hold count counter area provided in the various counter areas 233 of the RAM 204. For example, if it is determined in step S4208 that the lower hold number is “1”, the information in the lower hold number counter area is “1” in step S4213, and the lower hold number is set in step S4208. If it is determined that it is “4”, the information in the lower hold number counter area is “4” in step S4213. The lower hold number counter area refers to the second result display section when the hold information to be executed in the confirmation process when the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed in the lower hold command setting process described later. This is used for the MPU 202 to grasp which holding information in the holding area Rb corresponds to the holding information. After executing the process of step S4213, the present setting process is terminated.

  Here, when one hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is set as a confirmation process for the lower hold notice, the lower process wait flag is stored in the RAM 204 and the lower process wait flag is stored. In the situation where a negative determination is made in step S4210, one hold information related to the lower action opening 34 is newly set in the situation where the confirmation process for the hold notice is set. When the hold information related to 34 is acquired, the hold information is excluded from the confirmation process for the hold notice. Thereby, it is possible to execute the process related to the hold notice while reducing the processing load of the MPU 202 as compared with the case where all the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is the target of the confirmation process for the hold notice. It becomes.

  In addition, the situation in which the newly acquired hold information related to the lower operating port 34 is excluded from the target for the confirmation process for the hold notice is that the hold information that is the target for the confirmation process for the lower hold notice is acquired. This occurs when the timer interrupt process is newly started and the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is newly acquired by the timer interrupt process before the lower hold command setting process described later is executed. However, even if it is excluded from the confirmation process for the lower hold notice, the lower acquisition command is output to the sub control device for the hold information. There is no difference in the recognition of the number of information from the control device on the sub side.

<Processing related to update of upper hold number counter and lower hold number counter>
Next, a process for updating the information in the upper hold number counter area and the lower hold number counter area in accordance with the new execution of the change start process will be described. Such update processing is executed in steps S4006 to S4014, which are timings after the variation start processing is executed in the game times control processing (FIG. 57).

  First, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the object for which a new change has been started this time is the first result display section AS of the main display section 305. That is, it is determined whether or not the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 has been digested in order to start the game round.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4006, in step S4007, the upper hold number counter area update process is performed under the condition that the numerical information in the upper hold number counter area provided in the RAM 204 is “1” or more. In addition, a process of subtracting 1 from the numerical information in the upper reserved number counter area is executed. As a result, a new start of fluctuation occurs after the predetermined hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is subjected to the confirmation process for the upper hold notice and before the confirmation process for the upper hold notice is executed. Even in this case, it is possible for the MPU 202 to know which holding information is being used for the confirmation process for the upper-order hold notice confirmation process.

  In a succeeding step S4008, it is determined whether or not the information of the updated upper reservation number counter area is “0”. If it is not “0”, the game turn control process is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, the upper process waiting flag stored in the RAM 204 is erased, and in the subsequent step S4010, the upper hold determination area of the RAM 204 is initialized, and the game turn control process ends.

  By executing the processing of steps S4008 to S4010 as described above, it is possible to prevent the confirmation processing for the upper hold notice from being executed on the hold information that has already been digested for starting the change. The situation in which such processing is executed is, for example, the situation in which the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 and the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 are both zero, and neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed Occurs when a new acquisition of the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is performed in the situation and the game times control process is executed before the upper hold command setting process described later is executed for the hold information. To do.

  In addition, it is not limited to this structure, It is good also as a structure by which the confirmation process for upper side hold notice is performed also with respect to the hold information already digested for a change start. In this case, the confirmation process for the upper hold notice is executed for the predetermined hold information in a situation where the effect for the game turn is executed for the predetermined hold information related to the upper operating port 33. It is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the result of the confirmation process during the effect.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4006, the numerical value information in the lower hold number counter area provided in the RAM 204 is “1” or more as update processing of the lower hold number counter area in step S4011. On the condition that there is, a process of subtracting 1 from the numerical information in the lower hold number counter area is executed. As a result, after the predetermined hold information related to the lower working opening 34 is subjected to the confirmation process for the lower hold notice, a new change starts before the confirmation process for the lower hold notice is executed. Even if this occurs, it becomes possible for the MPU 202 to know which holding information is being used for the confirmation process for the digestion order in the confirmation process for the lower hold notice.

  In the subsequent step S4012, it is determined whether or not the information in the updated lower hold number counter area is “0”. If it is not “0”, the game turn control process is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S4013. In step S4013, the lower process waiting flag stored in the RAM 204 is erased, and in the subsequent step S4014, the lower hold determination area for the RAM 204 is initialized, and this game number control process ends.

  By executing the processing of steps S4012 to S4014 as described above, it is possible to prevent the confirmation processing for the lower hold notice from being executed on the hold information that has already been digested for starting the change. A situation in which such processing is executed is, for example, a situation in which there is no hold information related to the lower operation port 34, and neither the game times nor the opening / closing execution mode is executed. This occurs when a new acquisition is performed and the game times control process is executed before the lower hold command setting process described later is executed for the hold information.

  In addition, it is not limited to this structure, It is good also as a structure by which the confirmation process for a lower side hold notice is performed also with respect to the hold information already digested for a change start. In this case, the confirmation process for the lower hold notice is executed for the predetermined hold information in a situation in which the effect for the game turn is executed for the predetermined hold information related to the lower operation port 34. It is possible to produce an effect corresponding to the result of the confirmation process during the production.

<Upper hold command setting process>
Next, the upper pending command setting process executed in step S3909 of the normal process (FIG. 56) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the upper hold command setting process, the upper hold notice confirmation process is executed in steps S4301 to S4309 and step S4313, and the upper hold command is set as an output target in steps S4310 to S4311. Execute.

  In detail, the setting process of the upper hold command is first determined in step S4301 whether or not the upper process waiting flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the upper process wait flag is not stored, it means that there is no hold information on which the upper hold notice confirmation process is to be executed, and thus the present setting process is terminated.

  If the upper process wait flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4303 after the upper process wait flag is deleted in step S4302. In step S4303, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. In subsequent step S4304, it is determined whether or not the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is in the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4303 or step S4304, the process proceeds to step S4312, without performing the subsequent confirmation process for upper hold notice and the process of setting the upper hold command as an output target, and the upper hold determination area. After the initialization is completed, this setting process is terminated.

  As described above, during the opening / closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode, the processing in steps S4305 to S4311 and step S4313 is not executed for the hold information related to the upper operation port 33, so It is possible to reduce the processing load during the support mode.

  If a negative determination is made in both step S4303 and step S4304, a process for determining whether or not it is true is executed in step S4305. In the processing for determining whether or not there is an appropriateness, by referring to the appropriateness table for the first result display unit shown in FIGS. 51 (a-1) and 51 (b-1), the hold in the eighth embodiment is held. Steps S3203 to S3212 of the command setting process (FIG. 44) are executed. Incidentally, in the process for determining whether or not the result is correct, it is not only determined whether or not the result is a jackpot result, but also determines whether or not the result is a special loss result. In this case, although the processing load increases, the variation of the content of the hold notice is diversified. In the following step S4306, it is determined whether or not the processing result in step S4305 is a result corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode. That is, it is determined whether the result is a jackpot result or a special loss result.

  If the result is not the result corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode, the process for determining the detachment reach is executed in step S4307. In the outlier reach determination process, the process of step S3213 and step S3215 of the hold command setting process (FIG. 44) in the eighth embodiment is executed. In a succeeding step S4308, it is determined whether or not the processing result in the step S4307 is a result corresponding to the occurrence of detachment reach.

  If it does not correspond to the occurrence of outreach, the process proceeds to step S4312 without executing the processes in steps S4309 to S4311, and after the upper hold determination area is initialized, this setting process ends. If it corresponds to the occurrence of outliers, the process for determining the variation type is executed in step S4309. In the variation type determination process, the process from step S3216 to step S3218 of the hold command setting process (FIG. 44) in the eighth embodiment is executed.

  In subsequent step S4310, information stored in the upper reserved number counter area of RAM 204 is read. In step S4311, an upper pending command selection process is executed. Specifically, the upper reach command corresponding to the outreach information stored in step S4307, the variation type information stored in step S4309, and the upper hold count information read in step S4310 is stored in the ROM 203. Are read out from the command information storage area 223 and set as output targets.

  The upper hold command functions as a trigger for determining whether or not the upper hold notice should be started in the sub-side control device, and when it is determined to start the upper hold notice, the contents of the upper hold notice are sent to the sub-side control device. This command is used for recognition. The upper hold command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S3901 in the normal process (FIG. 56). The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the upper hold command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. Processing in the display control device 212 when the upper hold command is received will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S4312, initialization of the upper hold determination area in the RAM 204 is executed, and then this setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4306 that the opening / closing execution mode is supported, the process proceeds to step S4313. In step S4313, processing for type determination is executed. In the type determination process, the process from step S3222 to step S3224 of the hold command setting process (FIG. 44) in the eighth embodiment is executed. In this case, the game result information stored in the register of the MPU 202 includes a low probability jackpot result, a most advantageous jackpot result, a jump-up jackpot result, an explicit high probability jackpot result, an implicit high likelihood jackpot result, and a special outlier result. It is.

  In the subsequent step S4309, as already described, the process for determining the variation type is executed. Here, in the present embodiment, the variation display time table referred to in the variation start process in step S4005 of the game times control process (FIG. 57) corresponds to the low-accuracy large hit result and the most advantageous big hit result. Correspondence, jump-up jackpot results, explicit high-probability jackpot results, explicit high-probability jackpot results and special outlier results, outlier reach correspondence, and complete outage correspondence are set. ing. In step S4309, the variation display time table corresponding to the game result grasped in step S4313 is read, and the numerical information related to the variation type counter CS stored in the upper hold determination area is collated with the read table. To do. Then, the variation type information corresponding to the collation result is stored in the register of the MPU 202.

  Thereafter, the information stored in the upper hold counter area of the RAM 204 is read in step S4310, and the upper hold command selection process is executed in step S4311. Specifically, the upper hold command corresponding to the game result type information stored in step S4313, the variation type information stored in step S4309, and the upper hold number information read in step S4310. Are read from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 and set as output targets. Thereafter, in step S4312, initialization of the upper hold determination area in the RAM 204 is executed, and then this setting process is terminated.

<Lower hold command setting process>
Next, the lower hold command setting process executed in step S3912 of the normal process (FIG. 56) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the setting process of the lower hold command, the confirmation process for the lower hold notice is executed in steps S4401 to S4408 and step S4412, and the process for outputting the lower hold command is executed in steps S4409 to S4410. Execute.

  More specifically, the lower hold command setting process determines whether or not the lower process wait flag is stored in the RAM 204 in step S4401. If the lower process waiting flag is not stored, it means that there is no hold information for which the confirmation process for the lower hold notice is to be executed, and thus the present setting process is terminated.

  If the lower process wait flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4403 after erasing the lower process wait flag in step S4402. In step S4403, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, the process proceeds to step S4411 without performing the subsequent lower hold notice confirmation process and the process of setting the lower hold command as an output target, and the lower hold determination area. After the initialization is completed, this setting process is terminated.

  As described above, during the opening / closing execution mode, the processing load during the opening / closing execution mode can be reduced by not performing the processing of steps S4404 to S4410 and step S4412 for the hold information related to the lower operation port 34. It becomes.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4403, a processing for determining whether or not it is appropriate is executed in step S4404. In the process for determining whether or not it is appropriate, by referring to the determination table for the second result display section shown in FIGS. 51 (a-2) and 51 (b-2), the hold in the eighth embodiment is held. Steps S3203 to S3212 of the command setting process (FIG. 44) are executed. Incidentally, since the special result is not set in the success / failure table for the second result display section, unlike in the case of the upper pending command setting process (FIG. 60), the success / failure result is a jackpot result. It is determined whether or not there is, but it is not determined whether or not the result is a special outlier result.

  In the following step S4405, it is determined whether or not the processing result in step S4404 is a result corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode. That is, it is determined whether it is a jackpot result.

  If the result does not correspond to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode, processing for determining a detachment reach is executed in step S4406. In the outlier reach determination process, the process of step S3213 and step S3215 of the hold command setting process (FIG. 44) in the eighth embodiment is executed. In a succeeding step S4407, it is determined whether or not the processing result in the step S4406 is a result corresponding to the occurrence of detachment reach.

  If it does not correspond to the occurrence of outreach, the process proceeds to step S4411 without executing the processes of steps S4408 to S4410, and after the initialization of the lower hold determination area, the present setting process is terminated. . If it corresponds to the occurrence of outliers, the process for determining the variation type is executed in step S4408. In the variation type determination process, the process from step S3216 to step S3218 of the hold command setting process (FIG. 44) in the eighth embodiment is executed.

  In a succeeding step S4409, information stored in the lower hold number counter area of the RAM 204 is read. In step S4410, lower hold command selection processing is executed. Specifically, the lower hold command corresponding to the outlier reach information stored in step S4406, the variation type information stored in step S4408, and the lower hold count information read in step S4409 is displayed. , Read from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203, and set as an output target.

  The lower hold command functions as a trigger to determine whether or not the lower hold notice should be started in the sub-side control device, and when the lower hold notice is decided to start, the contents of the lower hold notice are sent to the sub side. This command is used for recognition by the control device. The lower hold command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S3901 in the normal process (FIG. 56). The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the lower hold command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. Processing in the display control device 212 when the lower hold command is received will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S4411, initialization of the lower hold determination area of the RAM 204 is executed, and then this setting process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4405 that the opening / closing execution mode is supported, the process proceeds to step S4412. In step S4412, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the process from step S3222 to step S3224 of the hold command setting process (FIG. 44) in the eighth embodiment is executed. In this case, the game result information stored in the register of the MPU 202 includes a low probability jackpot result, a most advantageous jackpot result, a jump-up jackpot result, an explicit high probability jackpot result, and an implicit high probability jackpot result.

  In subsequent step S4408, as already described, the process for determining the variation type is executed. In the variation type determination process, the variation display time table corresponding to the type of jackpot result grasped in step S4412 is read, and numerical information relating to the variation type counter CS stored in the lower hold determination area is obtained. It collates against the read table. Then, the variation type information corresponding to the collation result is stored in the register of the MPU 202.

  Thereafter, information stored in the lower hold counter area of the RAM 204 is read in step S4409, and lower hold command selection processing is executed in step S4311. Specifically, the lower side corresponding to the information on the type of the jackpot result stored in step S4412, the information on the variation type stored in step S4408, and the information on the number of lower holdings read in step S4409. The hold command is read from the command information storage area 223 of the ROM 203 and set as an output target. Thereafter, in step S4411, initialization of the lower hold determination area of the RAM 204 is executed, and then this setting process ends.

<Regarding Upper Hold Notice Control Process Performed by MPU 252 of Display Control Device 212>
Next, the upper reservation notice control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The upper hold advance notice control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252 and is started approximately at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle).

  In the upper hold advance notice control process, it is first determined in step S4501 whether or not an upper acquisition time command has been received from the voice lamp control device 82. If the upper acquisition command has been received, 1 is added to the first display-side reserved storage number SN1 stored in the hold counter area 263 of the work RAM 254 in step S4502.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the holding information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the holding information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 are distinguished from each other in the MPU 202 of the main control board 201. Further, the hold notice is performed by distinguishing the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34. In order to perform the hold notice in such a distinguished state, the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 includes a first hold display area Ga corresponding to the hold information related to the upper working port 33 as a hold display area, and a lower action. The second hold display area Gb corresponding to the hold information related to the mouth 34 is set (see FIG. 64). The first hold display area Ga is set to have four unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4, which is a number corresponding to the upper limit number of hold information related to the upper operation port 33, and the second hold display area Gb is operated downward. It is set so as to have four unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 which are numbers corresponding to the upper limit number of the hold information related to the mouth 34. Further, in correspondence with the setting of the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb in this way, the hold display area 271 of the video RAM 257 includes 1 in the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4. A first hold display area having a unit area so as to correspond one-to-one, and a second hold display area having a unit area so as to correspond one-to-one to the unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 Is provided. The first display-side reserved storage number SN1 that has been updated in step S4502 corresponds to the first hold-display area of the video RAM 257.

  In the subsequent step S4503, an upper holding display area setting process is executed. In the setting process, an internal command is sent to the VDP 255 so as to set outlier information for the unit area corresponding to the first display-side reserved storage number SN1 as a result of addition in step S4502 in the upper hold-display area. Is output. However, the point that the reflection to the first hold display area Ga is not performed at this timing is the same as step S3303 of the hold notice control process (FIG. 45) in the eighth embodiment.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4501 or after the processing of step S4503 is executed, it is determined in step S4504 whether or not an upper shift command is received from the audio lamp control device 82. If an upper shift command has been received, the first display-side reserved storage number SN1 stored in the hold counter area 263 is decremented by 1 in step S4505. In a succeeding step S4506, an upper shift process is executed. The upper shift process outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 so as to sequentially shift the hold display information set in the first unit area to the fourth unit area of the first hold display area to the lower area side. . However, the point that the reflection to the first hold display area Ga is not performed at this timing is the same as step S3306 of the hold notice control process (FIG. 45) in the eighth embodiment.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4504 or after execution of the processing in step S4506, it is determined in step S4507 whether the open / close execution mode is in effect, and whether the frequent support mode is in step S4508. Determine whether or not.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 transmits a start command corresponding to the MPU 202 to the opening / closing execution mode to the voice lamp control device 82 and corresponds to the case where the opening / closing execution mode ends. A configuration in which an end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82, and the display control device 212 can receive the commands from the sound lamp control device 82 to determine whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. It has become.

  In addition, the MPU 202 of the main control board 201 transmits a start command corresponding to the high frequency support mode to the voice lamp control device 82 when shifting to the high frequency support mode, and also corresponds to the end command when the high frequency support mode ends. Is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82, and the display control device 212 can receive the commands from the sound lamp control device 82 to determine whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. It has become.

  If neither the open / close execution mode nor the high frequency support mode is in effect, the upper output setting process is executed in step S4509. In the upper output setting process, an internal command is output to the VDP 255 so that the hold display information currently set in the first unit area to the fourth unit area of the first hold display area is reflected to the frame buffer. To do. Thereby, the current hold display information is reflected in the first hold display area Ga of the display screen G.

  In a succeeding step S4510, it is determined whether or not the upper hold command is received from the voice lamp control device 82. If the upper hold command has not been received, the upper hold notice control process is terminated as it is. If the upper hold command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4511.

  In step S4511, a notification generation lottery process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the upper reservation notice is executed. The contents of the notification generation lottery process are the same as step S3310 of the hold notice control process (FIG. 45) in the eighth embodiment. In a succeeding step S4512, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S4511 is a notification generation winning. If it is not a notification generation winning, the upper hold notice control process is terminated.

  If it is a notification generation winning, in step S4513, the content grasping process of the upper hold command is executed. Specifically, information on whether there is a jackpot result, information on the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot result, information on whether there is a special loss result, information on whether a reach has occurred if it is a normal loss result, and fluctuation The type information and the contents of the upper hold command received this time are grasped.

  In a succeeding step S4514, an upper display content selection process is executed. In the selection process, information for holding notice according to the content grasped in step S4513 is selected. However, in this selection process, the information for hold notice is not selected unambiguously with respect to the content grasped in step S4513, but at a predetermined selection rate from the selection targets corresponding to the grasped content. Make a selection. For example, in the case of corresponding to a jackpot result that becomes a high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode, information of the hold notice information such as “probability confirmation”, “jackpot”, “jackpot?”, “Reach!”, “Chance” In contrast to selecting from among them, if it corresponds to outlier reach, select from among information for holding notice such as “Big hit?”, “Reach!”, “Chance”.

  In a succeeding step S4515, a grasping process of the upper holding number is executed. In the upper hold number grasping process, it is grasped what number of hold information the upper hold command received this time corresponds to in the digestion order.

  In a succeeding step S4516, the upper holding display area correction process is executed. Specifically, the unit area information corresponding to the order grasped in step S4515 in the first hold display area is overwritten from the outlier information to the hold notice information selected in step S4514.

  Thereafter, upper output setting processing is executed in step S4517. The processing content of the upper output setting process is the same as that in step S4509. By executing this process, an upper hold notice corresponding to the content of the hold command received this time is performed. After executing the process of step S4517, the reservation notice control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4507 that it is in the opening / closing execution mode or if it is determined in step S4508 that it is in the high-frequency support mode, in step S4518, cancellation processing of the upper pending notice is executed. In the cancellation process of the upper hold notice, all the information set in the area corresponding to the current first display side hold memory number SN1 among the unit areas of the first hold display area is set as outlier information, and the frame The information of each unit area is not reflected on the buffer. As a result, the hold notice can be terminated in response to the opening / closing execution mode, and the hold notice can be prevented from being performed during the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the notification of the number of the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 can be resumed while preventing the resumption of the upper hold notice. After executing the process of step S4518, the upper hold notice control process is terminated.

  Note that the processing in steps S4507 to S4509 and step S4518 is executed at a timing later than the processing in steps S4510 to S4517, or waits for a predetermined period until the output setting processing is executed after receiving the upper acquisition command. It is good also as composition to do. As a result, when the upper hold command is received immediately after receiving the upper acquisition command, it is possible to prevent the hold information from being corrected to the content for the hold notice immediately after the detachment information is displayed for one hold information. .

<Regarding Lower Hold Notice Control Process Performed by MPU 252 of Display Control Device 212>
Next, the lower hold notice control process executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The lower hold advance notice control process is a part of a plurality of types of processes repeatedly executed in the MPU 252 and is started approximately at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec cycle).

  In the lower hold advance notice control process, first, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not a lower acquisition time command is received from the voice lamp control device 82. If the lower acquisition time command has been received, 1 is added to the second display-side reserved storage number SN2 stored in the hold counter area 263 of the work RAM 254 in step S4602. The second display-side reserved memory number SN2 corresponds to the second reserved display area of the video RAM 257.

  In a succeeding step S4603, a lower hold display area setting process is executed. In the setting process, the VDP 255 is internally set so that outlier information is set for a unit area corresponding to the second display-side reserved storage number SN2 as a result of addition in step S4602 in the lower hold-display area. Output the command. However, the point that the reflection to the second hold display area Gb is not performed at this timing is the same as step S3303 of the hold notice control process (FIG. 45) in the eighth embodiment.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4601 or after the processing of step S4603 is executed, it is determined in step S4604 whether or not a lower shift command is received from the sound lamp control device 82. If a lower shift command has been received, the second display-side reserved storage number SN2 stored in the hold counter area 263 is decremented by 1 in step S4605. In the subsequent step S4606, a lower shift process is executed. The lower shift process outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 so that the hold display information set in the first unit area to the fourth unit area of the second hold display area is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. To do. However, the point that the reflection to the second hold display area Gb is not performed at this timing is the same as step S3306 of the hold notice control process (FIG. 45) in the eighth embodiment.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4604, or after the processing in step S4606 has been executed, it is determined in step S4607 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the lower output setting process is executed in step S4608. In the lower output setting process, an internal command is sent to the VDP 255 so that the hold display information currently set in the first unit area to the fourth unit area of the second hold display area is reflected in the frame buffer. Output. Thus, the current hold display information is reflected in the second hold display area Gb of the display screen G.

  In a succeeding step S4609, it is determined whether or not a lower hold command is received from the voice lamp control device 82. If the lower hold command has not been received, the lower hold notice control process is terminated. If the lower hold command has been received, the process advances to step S4610.

  In step S4610, a notification generation lottery process for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the lower hold notice is executed. The contents of the notification generation lottery process are the same as step S3310 of the hold notice control process (FIG. 45) in the eighth embodiment. In the following step S4611, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in step S4610 is a notification generation winning. If the notification is not generated, the lower hold notice control process is terminated.

  If it is a notification generation winning, in step S4612, a content grasping process of the lower hold command is executed. Specifically, this time we received information on whether or not there is a jackpot result, information on the jackpot type if it is a jackpot result, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if it is a losing result, and information on the fluctuation type Determine from the contents of the lower hold command.

  In a succeeding step S4613, a lower display content selection process is executed. In the selection process, information for holding notice according to the content grasped in step S4612 is selected. The contents of the selection process are the same as those in step S4514 of the upper reservation notice control process (FIG. 62).

  In a succeeding step S4614, a lower hold number grasping process is executed. In the lower hold number grasping process, it is grasped what number of hold information the lower hold command received this time corresponds to in the digestion order.

  In a succeeding step S4615, a lower hold display area correction process is executed. Specifically, in the second hold display area, the unit area information corresponding to the order grasped in step S4614 is overwritten from the outlier information to the hold notice information selected in step S4613.

  Thereafter, lower output setting processing is executed in step S4616. The processing content of the lower output setting process is the same as that in step S4608. By executing this process, a lower hold notice corresponding to the content of the lower hold command received this time is performed. After executing the process of step S4616, the lower hold notice control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4607 that the opening / closing execution mode is in effect, the lower hold notice cancellation processing is executed in step S4617. In the release processing of the lower hold notice, all the information set in the area for the current second display side hold memory number SN2 among the unit areas of the second hold display area is set as outlier information, The information of each unit area is not reflected on the frame buffer. Thereby, the hold notice can be terminated with the opening / closing execution mode as a trigger. Furthermore, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the notification of the number of the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 can be resumed while preventing the lower hold notice from being resumed. After executing the process of step S4617, the lower hold notice control process ends.

  It should be noted that the processing of step S4607 to step S4608 and step S4617 is executed at a timing later than the processing of step S4609 to step S4616, or a predetermined period from when the lower acquisition time command is received until the output setting processing is executed It is good also as a structure which waits. As a result, when receiving the lower hold command immediately after receiving the lower acquisition command, it is possible to prevent the hold information from being corrected to the content of the hold notice immediately after the outlier information is displayed for one hold information. Can do.

<State of execution of hold notice>
Next, a state of execution of the hold notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 64A shows a case where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the low frequency support mode. In this case, the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the number of hold information is clearly shown in the display areas Ga and Gb. In addition, a predetermined hold notice image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga1, the second unit hold display area Ga2, and the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 in the first hold display area Ga.

  The player who has confirmed the image of the hold notice recognizes that a reach will occur when the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is digested next, and the next hold information related to the upper operation port 33 If it is digested, it will be recognized that the player can expect a jackpot occurrence, such as the occurrence of super reach, and if the hold information related to the fourth upper operating port 33 is digested, the jackpot result Recognize that the occurrence of this can be expected.

  FIG. 64 (b) shows a case where the support mode of the electric accessory 34a is the high-frequency support mode. In this case, as in the case of FIG. 64 (a), the first hold display area Ga and the second hold display area Gb are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In each display area Ga, Gb, The number of pending information is specified.

  However, in the high-frequency support mode, the hold notice regarding the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is blocked, and therefore no hold notice is made in the first hold display area Ga. On the other hand, even in the high frequency support mode, the hold notice for the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is not blocked, so the hold notice is given in the second hold display area Gb.

  A configuration in which a hold notice for hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section is performed at a predetermined frequency in a situation where a winning to the lower operating port 34 which is a priority side in the lottery determination is likely to occur. Assuming that, the following problems 1 and 2 are concerned.

  (Problem 1) Although the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section, the hold information is activated at a timing before the hold information becomes a target of the lottery. It is assumed that the winning in the mouth 34 continues and the timing at which the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice becomes the target of the lottery is delayed with respect to the execution timing of the hold notice. Then, for example, there is a risk that it will be difficult to understand what hold information the hold notice was made for, and on the other hand, in order to clarify it, the form of the hold notice may be restricted. Furthermore, when the winning at the lower operating port 34 continues for a predetermined number of times, the suspension notice is temporarily stopped, and then the winning at the lower operating port 34 does not occur for a predetermined period. Is configured to restart, or when the winning to the lower operating port 34 continues for a predetermined number of times, a configuration of changing the mode of the hold notice may be considered, but in this case, the winning frequency to the lower operating port 34, etc. Need to be monitored, and the mode of the hold notice needs to be changed accordingly, which may increase the processing load.

  (Problem 2) In the high-frequency support mode, when a holding notice is made that the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display section corresponds to the most advantageous jackpot result, for the player By stopping the operation of the firing handle 54 so as not to generate a prize for the lower operating port 34, it is advantageous to immediately generate the most advantageous jackpot result. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode and in the high-probability mode, when a hold notice is made that the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit corresponds to the low probability hit result For the player, the winning in the lower operating port 34 is repeated, and the holding information that triggered the execution of the holding notice is not subject to the lottery, while the winning is based on the winning in the lower operating port 34. It would be advantageous to generate the most advantageous jackpot result with the acquired hold information. That is, in the high-frequency support mode, when the hold notice about the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is performed at a predetermined frequency, the launch handle 54 is set so that an advantageous result is obtained for the player. It becomes possible to change the operation mode. However, the easiness of occurrence of winning in the lower operating port 34 in the high frequency support mode can be changed depending on the adjustment of the nail 38 in the game area, and then the operation mode of the firing handle 54 for each game hole. Since the effect of changing is different, it is not preferable.

  On the other hand, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the above-mentioned problem 1 and problem 2 are prevented by preventing the hold notice from being executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. While suppressing the occurrence, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through the hold notice.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, in addition to the effects described in the eighth embodiment, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The holding information stored in the second result display area holding area Rb corresponding to the lower operating port 34 is more than the holding information stored in the first result display area holding area Ra corresponding to the upper operating port 33. The priority determination is performed with priority. As a result, an expectation for a launch operation such as performing a launch operation in anticipation of entering the upper working port 33 or performing a launch operation in anticipation of entering the lower working port 34 depending on the game situation or the like. Diversification is achieved and the level of attention of the game can be increased. Moreover, it becomes possible to diversify the mode of the hold notice by making both the hold information relating to the upper working opening 33 and the hold information relating to the lower working opening 34 subject to the hold notice.

  Further, a confirmation process for holding advance notice for the hold information related to the upper working opening 33 and a process for setting the upper hold command as an output target (hereinafter also referred to as processing related to the upper holding notice), and hold information relating to the lower working opening 34 Both the confirmation process for hold notice for and the process that sets the lower hold command as the output target (hereinafter also referred to as the process related to the lower hold notice) are residuals that are predetermined processes that are executed irregularly It is executed in the process (specifically, steps S3907 to S3917). Assuming a configuration that performs all processes related to the upper hold notice and the lower hold notice in the timer interrupt process, it is assumed that the time until the timer interrupt process is completed will be extremely long. If so, there may occur a situation in which processing for monitoring the presence or absence of winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 or processing for obtaining hold information cannot be performed regularly, and these processing may not be performed suitably. . On the other hand, since the process related to the upper hold notice and the process related to the lower hold notice are executed in the remaining process as described above, the time until the timer interrupt process is completed becomes extremely long. Thus, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through the execution of the upper hold notice and the lower hold notice while ensuring good execution of the timer interrupt process.

  In addition, in step S3901 to step S3906 of the normal process that constitutes a part of the periodic process that is periodically executed, the confirmation process for the hold notice and the process that sets the hold command as an output target are not executed. These processes are executed in the remaining process. Assuming a configuration in which the processes related to the upper hold notice and the lower hold notice are all executed in steps S3901 to S3906 of the normal process, for example, in the high probability mode, the big hit is made until the process of step S3906 is completed. It may be necessary to perform the process of collating with numerical information corresponding to the number of times 30 times, and it may happen that 4 msec has already passed greatly at the timing when the process of step S3906 is completed. On the other hand, in the case where 4 msec has already elapsed at the timing when the process of step S3906 is completed because the process related to the upper hold notice and the process related to the lower hold notice are set in the remaining process. It is possible to return to the process of step S3901 without executing the process related to the upper hold notice and the process related to the lower hold notice. This makes it easy to ensure regular execution of steps S3901 to S3906 of normal processing.

  When the process related to the upper hold notice is started, the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and the setting of the interrupt inhibition is continued until the process related to the upper hold notice is completed. In addition, when the process related to the lower hold notice is started, the execution of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and the setting of the interrupt prohibition is continued until the process related to the lower hold notice is completed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the process related to the upper hold notice and the process related to the lower hold notice from being completely obstructed by the preferential execution of the timer interrupt process, and when each process is started. Can successfully complete the process.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the process related to the upper hold notice and the process related to the lower hold notice are executed in the remaining process, the timer interrupt process is temporarily interrupted at the timing when one of these processes is completed. Allowed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the start timing of the timer interrupt process from being extremely delayed.

  In addition, when the timer interrupt process is executed before the process related to the lower hold notice after the process related to the upper hold notice, the timing earlier than the process related to the upper hold notice after the timer interrupt process is executed. The process related to the lower hold notice is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency from being extremely different between the process related to the upper hold notice and the process related to the lower hold notice due to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the eighth embodiment, when the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and when the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 In either case, the timer interrupt process needs to be executed three times. The timer interrupt process is started by interrupting the normal process including the variation start process for starting the game time, and is executed twice for one process time of the normal process. Then, depending on the passing speed when the game ball passes through the detection area of the detection sensor provided in the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34, the detection area of the detection region is within a range in which the timer interrupt process is executed twice. When the passing is completed and the detection of the next game ball can be started after the timer interrupt process is executed once, the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is acquired within the range of the normal process in the predetermined process time. Even if it is a case, the pending | holding information which concerns on the lower operating port 34 may be newly acquired within the range of the normal process in the next process time. The same applies to the hold information related to the upper working port 33. In the remaining process, interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission are executed before and after the upper pending command setting process (step S3909), and interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission are performed before and after the lower pending command setting process (step S3912). Executed.

  In the case of the configuration as described above, for example, acquisition of the hold information related to the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 within the range of the normal processing of a predetermined processing time in which the variation start processing in the high probability mode is executed. When the hold information is acquired, the normal process of the predetermined process time ends without executing the upper hold command setting process and the lower hold command setting process and the next process time normal process starts. May be. Then, within the range of the normal process of the next processing time, after the upper pending command setting process is executed and the interrupt is permitted (step S3910), immediately before the lower pending command setting process. The second timer interrupt process is executed until the interrupt prohibition (step S3911) is executed, and there is hold information related to the lower operation port 34 for which the process related to the lower hold notice has not been completed. It is assumed that the hold information related to the lower working port 34 is newly acquired under the situation. On the other hand, in the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 59), the process of step S4210 is executed, and in the situation where the hold information related to the lower operating port 34 is already on standby, the newly acquired lower operating port 34 Such hold information is not subject to execution of processing related to the lower hold notice. Accordingly, for example, compared to a configuration in which a plurality of pieces of hold information are handled in the process related to one lower hold notice, it is possible to suppress the time required for executing the process related to the lower hold notice from being prolonged, and the remaining process. Is prevented from becoming longer.

  In the present embodiment, the newly acquired hold information may be the execution target of the process related to the hold notice as in the tenth embodiment. That is, when there is pending information that is waiting for execution of the process related to the upper pending notice, when the pending information related to the upper working port 33 is newly acquired, the pending information that is waiting to be executed is It is good also as a structure which makes it the execution target of the process which concerns on the newly acquired hold information while excluding from the execution target of the process which concerns on an upper hold notice. Similarly, when there is pending information that is waiting for execution of the process related to the lower hold notice, when the pending information relating to the lower operation port 34 is newly acquired, the pending information is awaiting execution. The held information is excluded from the execution target of the process related to the lower hold notice and the newly acquired hold information may be set as the execution target of the process related to the lower hold notice.

<Twelfth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for advancing a game in the main controller 81 is different from that in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, the processing configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of timer interrupt processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is the same processing configuration as the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 47) in the ninth embodiment. However, in the winning process for the operation opening in step S3508, the game turn control process in step S3510, and the game state transition process in step S3511, the same process as in the eleventh embodiment is executed.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. The main process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  First, in step S4701, start-up processing associated with power-on is executed. In the subsequent step S4702, access to the RAM 204 is permitted. Thereafter, in step S4703, it is determined whether or not a RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 98 is turned on. In subsequent step S4704, it is determined whether or not a power interruption flag is stored in the RAM 204. In step S4705, a RAM determination value is calculated. In subsequent step S4706, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data.

  If the RAM erase switch is not turned on, the power interruption flag is stored, and the RAM determination value is normal, the power interruption flag is erased from the RAM 204 in step S4707, and the RAM is deleted in step S4708. Erase the judgment value. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process in steps S4711 to S4720.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to steps S4709 to S4710. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to steps S4709 to S4710. .

  In step S4709, the used area of the RAM 204 is cleared (initialized) to “0”, and in step S4710, initialization of the RAM 204 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to the remaining process in steps S4711 to S4720.

  In the remaining process, first, the prohibition of interrupt is set in step S4711, and the setting process of the upper pending command is executed in the subsequent step S4712. The processing content of the upper hold command setting processing is the same as step S3909 in the eleventh embodiment. In step S4713, interrupt permission is set.

  After that, in step S4714, interrupt prohibition is set again, and in subsequent step S4715, lower hold command setting processing is executed. The processing content of the lower hold command setting process is the same as that in step S3912 in the eleventh embodiment. In step S4716, interrupt permission is set.

  Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set again in step S4717, and the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S4718, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S4719. In step S4720, an interrupt permission is set.

  Then, it returns to step S4711, and repeats the process of step S47111-step S4720.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game turn control process in which the success / failure determination process is executed at the start of the game turn, the winning opening process for the operating port for acquiring the hold information related to the upper operating port 33, and the lower operation The winning process for the operating port for acquiring the hold information related to the port 34 is not set separately for the normal process and the timer interrupt process, but is set as a series of processes for the timer interrupt process.

  In this case, in the timer interrupt process, a confirmation process for holding notice for the hold information related to the upper operating port 33 and a process for setting the upper hold command as an output target (hereinafter also referred to as a process related to the upper hold notice), When assuming a configuration that performs all of the confirmation processing for the hold notice for the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 and the process for setting the lower hold command as an output target (hereinafter also referred to as the process related to the lower hold notice) It is assumed that the time until the timer interrupt process is completed becomes extremely long. In particular, since the number of numerical information to be referred to is increased in the high probability mode as compared with the low probability mode, it is possible to determine whether or not to determine whether or not the game is started and hold information within the range of one timer interrupt process. Assuming a configuration in which such a determination process is performed, the time until the timer interrupt process is completed becomes extremely long. Then, the process for monitoring the presence or absence of winning in the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, the process for obtaining the hold information, the process related to the start of the game round, and the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 and the electric accessory 34a. There may be a situation in which processing or the like cannot be performed regularly, and these processing may not be performed appropriately. On the other hand, since the process related to the upper hold notice and the process related to the lower hold notice are executed in the residual process executed between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt It is suppressed that the time until the process is completed is extremely long, and the attention degree of the game is improved through the execution of the upper hold notice and the lower hold notice while ensuring good execution of the timer interrupt process. Can be planned.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the eighth embodiment, when the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and when the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 In either case, the timer interrupt process needs to be executed three times. In addition, when starting game times, the variation start process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process is the same even if the change start process is executed in the high probability mode. It is set so that timer interrupt processing can be completed within the range of the execution cycle. The same applies to the process related to the upper hold notice and the process related to the lower hold notice. That is, within the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, the change start process in the high probability mode and the upper hold notice in the high probability mode. Among the processing and the processing related to the lower reservation notice in the high probability mode, execution of at least one processing can be completed. In addition, when a game round is started, it is new within the range of at least two timer interruption processes after the timer interruption process that executed the fluctuation start process in relation to the shortest fluctuation display time of the game round. The variable start process is not executed. Then, although it depends on the passing speed when the game ball passes through the detection area of the detection sensor of the upper operation opening 33 and the lower operation opening 34, the passage of the detection area is completed within a range in which the timer interrupt process is executed twice. In addition, even if detection of the next game ball can be started after the timer interrupt process is executed once, a plurality of hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is in a state of waiting for execution of the process related to the upper hold notice. In addition, the plurality of pieces of hold information related to the lower operation port 34 are not put into a state of waiting for execution of processing related to the lower hold notice.

  That is, in one processing time of the timer interrupt process, the change start process in the high probability mode is executed, and the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 and the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 are acquired, Even if the timer interrupt processing of the next processing time is started without executing the processing related to the reservation notice for both of the hold information, the remaining processing range after the timer interrupt processing of the next processing time is completed. The process related to the hold notice is executed for one of the two hold information, and the other of the hold information is held within the range of the remaining process after the timer interrupt process of the next process is completed. Processing related to the notice is executed. And until the timer interruption process after the said remaining process is performed, acquisition of new pending | holding information is not performed about any of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34. FIG. As described above, with this configuration, the same type of hold information handled in the same manner in the success / failure determination process and the type determination process (that is, the hold information related to the upper operating port 33 is the same type, and The types of hold information relating to the operation port 34 are different), but a plurality of hold information is not stored until the processing related to the corresponding hold notice is executed. Therefore, there is no need to execute a process for excluding newly acquired hold information from the execution target of the process related to the hold notice using the process waiting flag as in the eleventh embodiment. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 202 can be reduced.

  In addition, in a configuration in which the same type of hold information is not stored until the processing related to the corresponding hold notice is executed, even if the hold command is combined with the function of the acquisition command, Since no problem occurs, a configuration may be adopted in which no command is transmitted at the time of acquisition.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for advancing a game in the main controller 81 is different from that in the twelfth embodiment. Therefore, the processing configuration in the present embodiment will be described below.

  FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. The main process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

  In the main process, the same processes as steps S4701 to S4710 of the main process (FIG. 65) in the twelfth embodiment are executed in steps S4801 to S4810.

  Thereafter, the upper hold command setting process is executed in step S4811, and the lower hold command setting process is executed in step S4812. Here, in the twelfth embodiment, the setting of interrupt prohibition and the setting of interrupt permission are performed with the upper hold command setting process in between, and the lower hold command setting process in between. In the present embodiment, the setting of the upper hold command and the setting process of the lower hold command are executed in the interrupt enabled state. Therefore, the timer interrupt process may be activated in the middle of the upper pending command setting process, and the timer interrupt process may be activated in the middle of the lower pending command setting process.

  After that, in step S4813, interrupt prohibition is set. In subsequent step S4814, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S4815, the variation type counter CS is updated. In step S4816, interrupt permission is set. Then, it returns to step S4811 and repeats the process of step S4811-step S4816.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S4901, it is determined whether or not the current timer interrupt process is activated during the upper hold command setting process or the lower hold command setting process. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, a return address for starting midway is stored in step S4902. The return address for midway start is set to the processing address in step S4813. In the next step S4903, the processing waiting flag on the side corresponding to the setting process of the hold command ended halfway this time is erased, and in the step S4904, the hold determination area corresponding to the setting process of the hold command ended halfway this time is stored. Perform initialization.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4901, the current return address is stored in step S4905. The return address is the processing address of the normal processing that was executed immediately before the current timer interrupt processing is started.

  After executing the process of step S4904 or step S4905, a process of saving information stored in the current register of the MPU 202 to the RAM 204 is executed in step S4906. In the subsequent step S4907, processing corresponding to steps S3503 to S3514 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 47) in the ninth embodiment is executed as main processing.

  Thereafter, in step S4908, the data saved in the RAM 204 is restored to the MPU 202 register, and in step S4909, the return address stored in the MPU 202 register in step S4902 or step S4905 is referred to, and the current timer interrupt The address of the normal process that will return after the process is completed is grasped. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting process for the upper hold command and the setting process for the lower hold command are executed in the interrupt-enabled state, so the middle of the upper hold command setting process and the lower hold command setting process. When the timer interrupt processing start timing is reached, priority is given to starting the timer interrupt processing. While the upper hold command setting process and the lower hold command setting process are processes executed for the effect of a notice of hold, the main processes executed in the timer interrupt process are the lottery and open / close execution modes. Including processing for controlling the inside. According to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a process for making a reservation notice while giving priority to periodic execution of main processes.

  Further, when the timer interrupt process is activated during the upper hold command setting process and the lower hold command setting process, the return address is uniquely stored so that the process returns to the process of step S4813 after the end. By adopting the configuration, it is possible to simplify the process related to the return when the timer interrupt process is started halfway.

  In addition, when the timer interrupt process is started during the setting process of the upper hold command and the setting process of the lower hold command, the process wait flag corresponding to the setting process related to the cancellation and the hold determination area By performing the initialization, it is not necessary to redo or restart the hold command setting process. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

  Note that the configuration in which the hold command setting process is executed in the state where the interrupt prohibition setting is not performed as in the thirteenth embodiment may be applied to the eighth to tenth embodiments. Good.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration for setting the hold command is different from those in the above embodiments. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. In the present embodiment, as in the eighth to tenth embodiments, each of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 is provided with a detection sensor, and a prize is awarded to the upper working port 33. It is assumed that the hold information acquired based on the above and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished.

  FIG. 68A is a block diagram for explaining the hold determination area 311 in this embodiment.

  The hold determination area 311 is provided in the RAM 204 of the main controller 81, and includes a first determination area 312a, a second determination area 312b, a third determination area 312c, and a fourth determination area 312d. . In the first to fourth determination areas 312 a to 312 d, when the holding information is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 232 based on winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the holding is held. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter CS corresponding to the information is stored. In this case, the first determination area 312a corresponds to the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE, the second determination area 312b corresponds to the second reservation area RE2, and the third determination area 312c. Corresponds to the third reserved area RE3, and the fourth determination area 312d corresponds to the fourth reserved area RE4. Therefore, when a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first determination area 312a → the second determination area 312b → the third determination area 312c → the fourth determination. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the use area 312d.

  Each of the first to fourth determination areas 312a to 312d is provided with areas 313a to 313d of confirmation required flags in a one-to-one correspondence. The confirmation flag areas 313a to 313d are used to specify in the MPU 202 whether or not the values stored in the first to fourth determination areas 312a to 312d are subject to the confirmation process for the hold notice. Is done.

  FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing setting processing at the time of acquisition in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S5001, a hold number grasping process is executed. Specifically, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read. In the subsequent step S5002, an acquisition time command including the information on the number of holds determined in step S5001 is set as an output target. The actions and effects obtained by executing these processes are the same as those obtained by executing the processes of steps S3001 and S3002 in the eighth embodiment.

  In subsequent step S5003, the current values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are obtained from the first to fourth determination areas 312a to 312d of the hold determination area 311. In step S5001, the information is stored in an area corresponding to the number of holds determined. That is, the same numerical information as the holding information stored in the holding ball storage area 232 in the immediately preceding step S2905 is stored in the determination areas 312a to 312d corresponding to the holding areas RE1 to RE4 in which the holding information is stored. .

  In the subsequent step S5004, “1” is stored as a set of required flag in the required flag areas 313a to 313d corresponding to the determination areas 312a to 312d stored in step S5003. Thereby, it becomes possible for the MPU 202 to recognize that it is necessary to execute the confirmation process for the hold notice for the information in the determination areas 312a to 312d corresponding to the area where the flag is set. After executing the process of step S5004, the present setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the game times control processing in the present embodiment.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the game turn control process is terminated without executing the processes after step S5102.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S5102 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S5103 to S5106. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S5103, it is determined whether or not the number N of reserved start storages is “0”. If the start pending storage number N is “0”, the game times control process is terminated as it is.

  If the start pending storage number N is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S5104, and a change start process is executed in step S5105. These processes are the same as steps S3104 and S3105 in the eighth embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S5106, a shift process of the hold determination area 311 is executed. In the shift process, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth determination areas 312a to 312d of the hold determination area 311 to the lower area side is executed. Specifically, the data of the first determination area 312a and the corresponding confirmation flag area 313a are cleared, and the second determination area 312b and the corresponding confirmation flag area 313b → the first determination area 312a and the corresponding confirmation flag area 313a, the third determination area 312c, and the corresponding confirmation flag area 313c → the second determination area 312b, and the corresponding confirmation flag area 313b and the fourth determination area. The data in each area is shifted, such as the area 312d and the area 313d of the confirmation flag required corresponding thereto → the third determination area 312c and the area 313c of the confirmation flag required corresponding thereto. After the shift, the fourth determination area 312d and the corresponding confirmation flag area 313d corresponding to the fourth determination area 312d are cleared. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  Even if the variation start process is executed in order to newly start a game by executing the process of step S5106 as described above, the first to fourth determination areas 312a to 312a of the hold determination area 311 are executed. It becomes possible to maintain the correspondence between each piece of data 312d and each piece of holding information in the first to fourth holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding ball storage area 232.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5102 that the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, it is determined in step S5107 whether or not the current game variation display time has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed, the game display control process is terminated after the variable display process is executed in step S5108. If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S5109, and after setting the variation end command in step S5110, the game turn control process is terminated.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing hold command setting processing according to the present embodiment.

  First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not there is an area in which the necessary confirmation flag is set among the areas 313a to 313d of the necessary confirmation flag in the hold determination area 311. If there is no area in which the confirmation flag is required, it is not necessary to execute the confirmation process for holding notice, and the setting process is terminated as it is.

  If the confirmation flag is required, in step S5202, the determination order 312a to 312d corresponding to the fact that the confirmation flag is set is set in the order set as the game round start target. The data of one determination area 312a to 312d corresponding to the hold information is set as the current confirmation target. In step S5203, the necessary confirmation flags corresponding to the determination areas 312a to 312d set as confirmation targets in step S5202 are cleared.

  Thereafter, in step S5204, a confirmation process for pending notice is executed for the data in one of the determination areas 312a to 312d set as the confirmation target in step S5202. The contents of the confirmation process are the same as steps S3203 to S3218 and steps S3222 to S3224 in the eighth embodiment.

  In a succeeding step S5205, a corresponding hold number grasping process is executed. In the grasping process, it is grasped what number corresponds to the determination areas 312a to 312d in which the data subjected to the current confirmation process is stored in the digestion order. For example, if the data stored in the first determination area 312a is the target of the confirmation process, the number of holds is specified as “1”. In a succeeding step S5206, a pending command selection process is executed. In the selection process, the same process as step S3220 in the eighth embodiment is executed. As a result, a hold command is output to the sub-side control device, and a hold notice corresponding to the hold command can be executed as in the eighth embodiment. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if a plurality of pieces of hold information are acquired before the hold command setting process is executed, a check process for hold notice is executed for each piece of hold information. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chance that the hold notice is executed.

  Further, even if a plurality of pieces of hold information are acquired before the hold command setting process is executed, one hold command is the target of the hold notice confirmation process in one hold command setting process. Since it is information, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing time required to complete the hold command setting process.

  The configuration as in the present embodiment may be applied not only to the eighth embodiment and the ninth embodiment, but also to the eleventh embodiment.

  In this case, in the eleventh embodiment, the holding information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the holding information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 are stored in the holding ball storage area 232. The first result display area reservation area Ra (upper) is stored as the hold determination area 311 in association with being stored in a distinguishable manner and being handled separately in the success / failure determination process and the type determination process in the case of starting game times. A first hold determination area corresponding to the operation opening 33) and a second hold determination area corresponding to the second result display section reservation area Rb (corresponding to the lower operation opening 34).

  In addition, in the first hold determination area, a combination of the determination area and the confirmation flag area is associated with the first to fourth areas Ra1 to Ra4 of the first result display section hold area Ra on a one-to-one basis. In addition, the second hold determination area includes a combination of a determination area and a confirmation flag area that corresponds to the first to fourth areas Rb1 to Rb4 of the second result display section hold area Rb on a one-to-one basis. Is provided. Then, the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 68) and the shift process for the hold determination area (step S5106) are executed corresponding to each of the first hold determination area and the second hold determination area, and the upper hold is performed. The processing contents of the command setting process (FIG. 60) and the lower hold command setting process (FIG. 61) are changed in correspondence with the hold command setting process of FIG. Thus, in the configuration in which the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 are distinguished from each other, the above-described effects of the present embodiment are achieved. Can be played.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the reading process is different from the reading process (FIG. 40) in the eighth to fourteenth embodiments. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the reading process in the present embodiment.

  In step S5301, information input to the input port of the MPU 202 from the detection sensor of the upper working port 33 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not a winning signal for the upper working port 33 is not input. The specific content of this process is the same as that in step S201 in the first embodiment. If the winning signal of the upper working port 33 has not been input, “0” is set to the upper working port counter provided in the RAM 204 in step S5302.

  When a negative determination is made in step S5301, or after the processing in step S5302 is executed, in step S5303, information input from the detection sensor of the lower operation port 34 to the input port of the MPU 202 is confirmed, and the lower operation is performed. It is determined whether or not the winning signal of the mouth 34 is not input. The specific content of this process is the same as that in step S206 in the first embodiment. If the winning signal of the lower working port 34 is not inputted, “0” is set to the lower working port counter provided in the RAM 204 in step S5304.

  When a negative determination is made in step S5303, or after the processing in step S5304 is executed, in step S5305, the information input to the input port of the MPU 202 from the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operation port 33 is confirmed again. Then, it is determined whether or not the winning signal of the upper working port 33 is input. If the winning signal of the upper working port 33 has been input, the upper working port counter is incremented by 1 in step S5306.

  When a negative determination is made in step S5305, or after the processing in step S5306 is executed, in step S5307, the information input to the input port of the MPU 202 from the detection sensor corresponding to the lower operation port 34 is confirmed again. Then, it is determined whether or not the winning signal of the lower working port 34 is input. If the winning signal of the lower working port 34 has been input, the lower working port counter is incremented by 1 in step S5308.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5307, or after the processing of step S5308 is executed, it is determined in step S5309 whether the numerical information of the upper working port counter is “1”. If the numerical information of the upper working port counter is “1”, the upper working port winning flag is stored in step S5310 (“1” is set in this flag area). As a result, it is possible to specify that the MPU 202 has won a prize for the upper working port 33.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5309, or after the processing of step S5310 is executed, it is determined in step S5311 whether the numerical information of the lower working port counter is “1”. If the numerical information of the lower working port counter is “1”, the lower working port winning flag is stored in step S5312 (“1” is set in this flag area). As a result, it is possible to specify that the MPU 202 has won a prize for the lower working port 34.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5311, or after the process of step S5312 is executed, the reading process is terminated.

  When the reading process is executed as described above, the shortest time when the detection of one game ball is started by the detection sensor of the upper operation port 33 and the detection of the next game ball is started, and the lower operation port Although it depends on the shortest time when the detection of the next game ball is started after the detection of one game ball by the 34 detection sensors, each time a reading process is executed, It is possible to confirm the occurrence of a prize at the upper working port 33 and the occurrence of a prize at the lower working port 34. Then, even if the processing configuration of the reading process is applied to any of the above-described eighth to fourteenth embodiments, the same type of holding information similarly handled in the success / failure determination process and the type determination process corresponds to the corresponding holding process. It is assumed that a plurality of commands are acquired before the command setting process is executed.

  That is, for example, in the eighth to tenth embodiments, a plurality of pieces of hold information may be acquired based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 before the hold command setting process is executed. is assumed. Further, for example, in the eleventh to thirteenth embodiments, a plurality of pieces of hold information are acquired based on winning to the upper working port 33 before the upper hold command setting process is executed, and the lower hold command It is assumed that a plurality of pieces of hold information are acquired based on winning in the lower operation port 34 until the setting process is executed. Therefore, as in the eighth and eleventh embodiments, when the same type of hold information is already waiting for the confirmation process for the hold notice, the hold information is newly acquired. However, a configuration in which the hold information is not an execution target of the confirmation process for hold notice may be applied. Further, as in the case of the tenth embodiment, when the pending information is already acquired when the pending information of the same type is already waiting for the confirmation processing for the pending notice, A configuration may be applied in which pending information that has been waiting for processing is excluded from the execution target of the confirmation process for holding notice, and the newly acquired holding information is the execution target of the confirmation process for holding notice. . Further, as in the above-described fourteenth embodiment, a configuration may be applied in which all the hold information is subject to execution of a confirmation process for hold pre-execution until the game is started.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of normal processing is different from the normal processing (FIG. 56) in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing normal processing in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S5401, main processing is executed. The main process is the same as steps S3901 to S3906 of the normal process (FIG. 56) in the eleventh embodiment.

  After executing the main process, the remaining processes of steps S5402 to S5414 are executed. In the remaining process, first, in step S5402, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. In this determination, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, but whether or not the timer interrupt processing has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). It is good also as a structure which determines. The same applies to step S5406 and step S5410 described later.

  If it is determined that the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, the process returns to step S5401, and if it has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S5403. In step S5403, an interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the generation of the timer interrupt process is performed, and in a subsequent step S5404, a lower hold command setting process is executed. Note that the processing content of the lower hold command setting process is the same as that in step S3912 in the eleventh embodiment. In step S5405, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S5406, it is determined again whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached. If it is determined that the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, the process returns to step S5401, and if it is determined that it has not reached, the process proceeds to step S5407. In step S5407, an interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the generation of the timer interrupt process is performed, and in the subsequent step S5408, an upper pending command setting process is executed. The processing content of the upper pending command setting process is the same as that in step S3909 in the eleventh embodiment. In step S5409, an interrupt permission setting is made to switch from the state in which the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to the state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  Thereafter, in step S5410, it is determined again whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached. If it is determined that the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, the process returns to step S5401, and if it has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S5411. In step S5411, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing, and in step S5412, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S5413, the variation type counter CS is updated. . In step S 5414, an interrupt permission setting is made to switch from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. Thereafter, the process returns to step S5402.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the remaining processing, when the unit in which the interrupt prohibition processing and the interrupt permission processing are set so as to sandwich the execution of the specific processing is set as one unit processing, In other words, immediately after execution of one unit of processing, it is determined whether or not the timing for starting the normal processing of the next processing time has come. This makes it possible to place importance on the regular execution of normal processing.

  Further, in the configuration as described above, it is possible that a normal process of a new process time is started during the remaining process. In this case, the execution order in the remaining process precedes the one unit process including the lower hold command setting process than the one unit process including the upper hold command setting process. In the present embodiment, as in the eleventh embodiment, the hold information relating to the upper operation port 33 and the hold information relating to the lower operation port 34 are distinguished from each other, and the upper operation is performed at the start of the game times. The hold information related to the lower operation port 34 has priority over the hold information related to the mouth 33. Under such circumstances, one unit of processing including the lower hold command setting processing is executed in preference to one unit of processing including the upper hold command setting processing. It becomes possible to preferentially execute the process related to the hold notice for the hold information, and it is possible to increase the number of hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice.

  Here, even in the present embodiment, similarly to the eleventh embodiment, when the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and based on the winning to the lower working port 34 In any case where information is acquired, the timer interrupt processing needs to be executed three times, and the timer interrupt processing is executed twice for one processing time of the normal processing. Therefore, even if the hold information related to the lower working port 34 is acquired within the range of the normal processing in the predetermined processing time, the holding related to the lower working port 34 is within the range of the normal processing in the next processing time. Information may be newly acquired. The same applies to the hold information related to the upper working port 33. In this case, within the range of the execution cycle of the normal process (that is, within the range of 4 msec), the fluctuation start process in the high probability mode, the upper hold command setting process in the high probability mode, and the lower hold command in the high probability mode It is good also as a structure which can perform two processes reliably among these setting processes. As a result, the plurality of holding information related to the upper operating port 33 is not put into a state of waiting for execution of the processing related to the upper holding notice, and the plurality of holding information related to the lower operating port 34 is changed to the process related to the lower holding notice. There is no waiting for execution. Therefore, in this configuration, it is necessary to execute a process for excluding the newly acquired hold information from the execution target related to the hold notice using the process waiting flag as in the eleventh embodiment. Absent. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 202 can be reduced.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of normal processing is different from the normal processing (FIG. 72) in the sixteenth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing normal processing in the present embodiment.

  First, in step S5501, main processing is executed. The main process is the same as steps S3901 to S3906 of the normal process (FIG. 56) in the eleventh embodiment.

  After executing the main process, the remaining processes of steps S5502 to S5517 are executed. In the remaining process, first, in step S5502, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached. In this determination, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing, but whether or not the timer interrupt processing has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). It is good also as a structure which determines. The same applies to step S5506, step S5510, and step S5514 described later.

  If it is determined that the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, the process returns to step S5501. If it is determined that the next normal process has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S5503. In step S5503, an interrupt prohibition setting for prohibiting the generation of timer interrupt processing is performed, and in subsequent step S5504, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. In step S5505, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a permitted state is performed.

  Thereafter, in steps S5506 to S5509, processing similar to that in steps S5402 to S5405 in the sixteenth embodiment is executed, and in steps S5501 to S5513, step S5406 in the sixteenth embodiment is performed. Processing similar to that in step S5409 is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S5514, it is determined again whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached. If it is determined that the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, the process returns to step S5501. If it is determined that the next normal process has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S5515. In step S5515, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit generation of timer interrupt processing, and in step S5516, the variation type counter CS is updated. In step S5517, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S5502.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the operational effects described in the sixteenth embodiment, it is possible to preferentially update the random number initial value counter CINI.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration and processing configuration are different from those in the above embodiments. The electrical configuration and processing configuration in this embodiment will be described below.

<Electrical configuration>
FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment. In FIG. 74, a supply line for operating power from the power supply and launch control device 98 to the main control device 81 and the payout control device 97 is indicated by a double-line arrow, and other supply lines and signal lines are indicated by a solid-line arrow. .

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 201 that controls the main game and a power interruption monitoring board 205 that monitors power. An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 and a RAM 204.

  The ROM 203 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storage and retention, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The ROM 203 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data.

  The RAM 204 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires an external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing. When compared with the data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 203. The RAM 204 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 203.

  In addition to the above elements, the MPU 202 or the main control board 201 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 203 and the RAM 204 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 202, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. Note that an input / output port may be provided and switched between input and output as necessary. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81. Various control devices are connected to the input side and the output side of the MPU 202, and various sensors, various drive units, and various display units are connected. First, a configuration related to connection with various sensors, various drive units, and various display units will be described.

  On the input side of the MPU 202, instead of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e in the above-described embodiments, a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port 33, a lower operating port 34, and a through gate 35 are provided. The winning detection sensors 31a, 31b, 31c, 32e, 33a, 34c, 35a, and 35b (hereinafter collectively referred to as winning detection sensors 31a to 35b) are electrically connected via electrical wiring. Yes. In this case, the main control board 201 and each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b may be connected via one electric wiring, and a relay board is interposed in the middle of each signal path. Also good. The same applies to the configuration related to connection with other devices. In the MPU 202, signals are received from the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b through the winning IC 351 mounted on the main control board 201, and a winning determination (speech determination) to each winning portion is performed based on the reception result. .

  The winning IC 351 is a path abnormality confirmation means or a path abnormality confirmation circuit. The winning IC 351 confirms whether or not normal signal transmission is performed between the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b and the MPU 202.

  In addition to the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, a magnet detection sensor 352 and a radio wave detection sensor 353 provided for the game area are electrically connected to the input side of the MPU 202 via electric wiring. The MPU 202 receives signals from the magnet detection sensor 352 and the radio wave detection sensor 353, and based on the reception result, it is determined whether or not an abnormality that is a detection target has occurred.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32 c that opens and closes the open / close door 32 b of the variable winning device 32, and an electric combination drive unit 34 b that opens and closes the electric combination 34 a of the lower working port 34 are electrically wired. It is electrically connected via. Further, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are electrically connected to the output side of the MPU 202 via electric wiring. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of the various drive units 32c and 34b and performs display control of the various display units 43 and 44 through the driver circuit.

  Incidentally, although illustration explanation is omitted, an external terminal board is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. The MPU 202 sets information in the RAM 204 according to the progress of the game. Then, setting for signal output is performed on the external terminal board according to the information set in the RAM 204, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 is recognized by the hall computer of the game hall.

  Next, a configuration related to communication between the main control device 81 and the payout control device 97 will be described. Prior to the description of the configuration related to these communications, the electrical configuration of the payout control device 97 will be described first.

  The payout control device 97 includes a payout control board 361 that controls the payout of game balls through the payout device 96. An MPU 362 is mounted on the payout control board 361. The MPU 362 includes a ROM 363 and a RAM 364. In the following description, the MPU 202, the ROM 203, and the RAM 204 provided in the main control device 81 are distinguished from the MPU 202, the ROM 203, and the RAM 204 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 362, the ROM 363, and the RAM 364 provided in the payout control device 97 are referred to as the RAM 204, and are referred to as the payout side MPU 362, the payout side ROM 363, and the payout side RAM 364.

  The payout-side ROM 363 is configured to use, as a read-only memory, a memory that does not require external power supply for storing and holding, such as a NOR flash memory or a NAND flash memory. The payout ROM 363 stores various control programs executed by the payout MPU 362 and fixed value data.

  The payout-side RAM 364 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage unit) that requires external power supply for storage and holding, such as SRAM and DRAM, for both reading and writing, and can be randomly accessed. When compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the payout ROM 363. The payout side RAM 364 temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the payout side ROM 363. In addition, the payout side MPU 362 or the payout control board 361 is provided with an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit and the like in addition to the above elements.

  The payout side MPU 362 is electrically connected to the payout device 96. The payout device 96 is switched between a state in which the game ball supplied from the tank 95 to the payout device 96 is prevented from flowing downstream and a state in which the game ball is sent downstream. A payout motor 96a for driving a ball stopper member such as a rotating body is provided, and a payout detection sensor 96b for individually detecting the game balls sent to the downstream side is provided. A payout motor 96a is electrically connected to the output side of the payout side MPU 362 via electric wiring, and a payout detection sensor 96b is electrically connected to the input side of the payout side MPU 362 via electric wiring. Yes. In the payout side MPU 362, the payout motor 96 a is supplied with a drive signal through a driver circuit provided on the payout control board 361 so that the game ball is paid out, and the payout is completed based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 96 b. Know the number of game balls.

  Further, the payout side MPU 362 is electrically connected to a ball lending connection terminal plate 365 provided in the back pack unit 15 through electric wiring, and the ball lending connection terminal plate 365 is connected to a ball lending device through electric wiring. Y is electrically connected.

  The ball lending device Y is a so-called CR unit, which is provided on the side of the outer frame 11, although not illustrated, and a card insertion slot is provided on the front side of the ball lending device Y. Lending game balls corresponding to the amount of money stored in the card by inserting a card into the card insertion slot and manually operating a lending operation device (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 10 as appropriate. Can be received. The payout-side MPU 362 executes the control of the rental ball by transmitting / receiving an electric signal to / from the ball rental apparatus Y.

  The payout side MPU 362 controls payout of game balls based on communication with the main side MPU 202. As a configuration for performing the communication, a plurality of signal paths exist between the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97.

  In detail, the main MPU 202 recognizes a winning ball toward the payout MPU 362 when the winning MPU 362 confirms winning in the winning portion corresponding to the occurrence of the winning ball based on the detection results of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b. A command (payout command information) is transmitted, but a first signal path SL1 is provided to transmit the prize ball command. In this case, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command and information on the number of prize balls to be executed, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits. Specifically, there are a plurality of types of prize ball commands, and each prize ball command consists of 2-byte information.

  In communicating the prize ball command, the first signal path SL1 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication. That is, the information of multiple bits included in the prize ball command is sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. Note that the first signal path SL1 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 201 and the payout control board 361 are provided at both ends of the electric wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be formed by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

  As signal paths for transmitting information from the payout side MPU 362 toward the main side MPU 202, a second signal path SL2 and a third signal path SL3 are provided. The second signal path SL2 is used to transmit a payout status command (payout status information) from the payout MPU 362 to the main MPU 202. The payout status command includes a prize ball completion command indicating the completion of the prize ball and the number of the prize balls completed, an abnormality start command indicating that a predetermined abnormality has occurred with respect to the game ball payout, And an abnormal termination command indicating that the abnormality has been canceled. That is, the payout status command includes information indicating the type of the command and information indicating the content of the payout status, and is configured as information of a plurality of bits. The predetermined abnormality relating to the game ball payout includes, for example, a full state of the lower plate 72 and a no-ball state of the tank 95.

  In communication of the payout status command, the second signal path SL2 is set to perform serial communication instead of parallel communication, like the first signal path SL1. That is, a plurality of bits of information included in the payout status command are sequentially transmitted through a single signal path. The second signal path SL2 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrically connecting to the connectors provided on the main control board 201 and the payout control board 361 are provided at both ends of the electric wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be formed by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

  The third signal path SL3 is used to transmit a payout permission signal from the payout MPU 362 to the main MPU 202. The payout permission signal is information transmitted from the payout MPU 362 to the main MPU 202 so that the main MPU 202 can grasp the output timing of the prize ball command. Note that the effect of the presence of the payout permission signal will be described later.

  The payout permission signal is composed of 1-bit information, and a LOW level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is prohibited, and an HI level signal is transmitted when the output of the prize ball command is permitted. The However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a HI level signal is transmitted when the prize ball command output is prohibited, and a LOW level signal is outputted when the prize ball command output is permitted. It is good also as a structure to be made.

  The third signal path SL3 is a single connector unit in which connectors for electrical connection to the connectors provided on the main control board 201 and the payout control board 361 are provided at both ends of the electrical wiring. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of connector units may be formed by interposing a relay board or the like in the middle of the signal path.

  Here, the command communication between the main side MPU 202 and the payout side MPU 362 is not the parallel communication but the serial communication, so that the electric wiring that electrically connects the main control board 201 and the payout control board 361 is temporarily assumed. Even if an illegal act using a so-called hanging board to connect an illegal board is performed, the possibility that the illegal board is hidden in an electric wiring or the like is reduced. The above action is performed in an attempt to illegally receive a large amount of game balls, and the signal path between the main control board 201 and the payout control board 361 is likely to be targeted. In this case, in a configuration in which bidirectional command communication is performed between the main MPU 202 and the payout MPU 362, if parallel communication is adopted as command communication, the number of electrical wirings increases accordingly, and the above-described unauthorized board becomes It becomes easy to hide by electric wiring. On the other hand, when the command communication is performed by serial communication, the illegal board is not easily hidden by the electric wiring, and it is easy to find it when the board is temporarily installed.

  Next, a configuration relating to electrical connection between the main control device 81 and the payout control device 97 and the power source and launch control device 98 will be described.

  The power source and launch control device 98 includes a power source and launch control board 371, and the power source and launch control board 371 has a function of supplying operating power to various devices including the main control device 81 and the payout control device 97. A power supply circuit 372 is provided. The power supply circuit 372 is provided with a power-on power supply unit 373 and a power-off power supply unit 374.

  The power-on power supply unit 373 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like, and each of the main control device 81, the payout control device 97, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Is generated, and the generated operating voltage is supplied to the main controller 81, the payout controller 97, and the like. As its outline, the power-on power supply unit 373 takes in the AC 24 volt power supplied via the connection board provided in the backpack unit 15 and + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, motors, etc. A + 5V voltage or the like for logic is generated, and these + 12V voltage and + 5V voltage are supplied to the main controller 81, the payout controller 97, and the like. The connection board is provided with a power switch for turning on / off the power of the pachinko machine 10.

  A power interruption monitoring board 205 is provided in the middle of the power supply path between the power-on power supply unit 373 and the main MPU 202. The power interruption monitoring board 205 monitors a voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage supplied from the power-on power supply unit 373. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volts, it is determined that the power supply has been cut off, and the output setting of the power failure signal (power interruption signal) is set to correspond to the occurrence of the power failure (power interruption) in the main MPU 202. Specifically, a LOW level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has not occurred, and a HI level power failure signal is transmitted in a situation where it is determined that a power shutdown has occurred. . The relationship between LOW and HI may be reversed.

  The power supply unit 374 for power interruption includes a capacitor. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from a commercial power supply), the power supplied from the power supply unit 373 for power supply is used. Charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power (when power supply from the commercial power is cut off), the main power unit 374 is discharged from the power interruption. Storage holding power (backup power) is supplied to the side RAM 204. Therefore, even in such a situation, the information stored in the main RAM 204 is stored and held without being erased while the power for storing and holding is supplied from the power supply unit 374 for power interruption.

  Incidentally, the capacity of the power supply unit 374 for power interruption is relatively large, and the information stored in the main RAM 204 before the power is shut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). . Further, the power supply unit 374 for power interruption is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery. In the case of a non-rechargeable battery, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, it is not necessary to store power in the power supply unit 374 for power interruption, but it is necessary to replace it periodically.

  Although not shown, the power supply and launch control board 371 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure processing different from the power supply unit for power interruption 374. In the power supply and launch control board 371, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit for power failure processing discharges for a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing described later. The output of 5 volts, which is the drive power source for the control system, is configured to maintain a normal value. As a result, the main MPU 202 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  Here, a configuration related to the supply of operating power from the power supply circuit 372 to the main MPU 202 and the payout MPU 362 will be described in detail.

  The power from the power-on power supply unit 373 is supplied to the VCC terminal of the main MPU 202 and the VCC terminal of the payout MPU 362. In a situation where power is supplied from the commercial power supply by the power supplied to the VCC terminal, various control processes are executed in the MPUs 202 and 362, and information is stored and held in the RAMs 204 and 364. Is called.

  On the other hand, the power from the power supply unit 374 for power interruption is supplied to the VBB terminal of the main MPU 202 but is not supplied to the VBB terminal (not shown) of the payout MPU 362. In other words, the memory holding power from the power interruption time supply unit 374 is supplied to the main RAM 204 but is not supplied to the payout RAM 364. Therefore, in a situation where the power supply from the commercial power supply is cut off, the main RAM 204 stores information, but the payout RAM 364 does not store information. Note that the VBB terminal of the payout side MPU 362 is grounded or not connected to any electrical wiring.

  As described above, the storage holding power from the power interruption time supply unit 374 is supplied to the main RAM 204, but not supplied to the payout side RAM 364, thereby reducing the capacity of the power interruption time power supply unit 374. Is planned. Thereby, the initial cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In addition to the power supply circuit 372, the power supply and launch control board 371 is provided with a launch control circuit 375 responsible for launch control of the game ball. The firing control circuit 375 is provided with a transmission circuit 376 that satisfies the conditions, a receiving circuit 377 that permits firing, and a launching IC 378.

  The condition establishment transmission circuit 376 has a function of transmitting a condition establishment signal in a predetermined signal form to the main MPU 202 when a predetermined game ball firing condition is established. Specifically, the firing control circuit 375 has a touch sensor 53c that detects that the annular handle portion of the firing handle 54 is touched by the player and a game even when the handle portion is being rotated. A ball stop switch 53d that is manually operated by the player to stop the ball firing is electrically connected. The launch control circuit 375 is electrically connected to the payout control board 361 and receives a signal indicating whether or not the ball lending device Y is electrically connected to the ball lending connection terminal plate 365. To do.

  The transmission circuit 376 that satisfies the condition receives a signal indicating that the handle is being touched by the player from the touch sensor 53c, and receives a signal indicating that the player is not manually operated from the ball stop switch 53d. Further, when a signal indicating that the ball lending device Y is connected is received from the payout side MPU 362, a HI level condition establishment signal (a signal corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main side MPU 202. . If any of the above signals is not received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the main MPU 202. However, it is not limited to such a configuration, and the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed.

  The launch permission receiving circuit 377 receives the HI level launch permission transmitted from the main MPU 202 under the condition that the HI level condition fulfillment signal is transmitted from the condition fulfillment transmission circuit 376 to the main MPU 202. It has a function of receiving a signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) and continuously supplying the corresponding signal to the launch IC 378 when the launch permission signal is received. The main side MPU 202 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when it does not receive a HI level condition fulfillment signal from the condition fulfillment transmission circuit 376. The relationship between the LOW level signal and the HI level signal of the permission signal may be reversed. Further, the main side MPU 202 newly starts transmission of the HI level firing permission signal every time reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is started, and when reception of the HI level condition satisfaction signal is completed, The transmission permission signal is terminated.

  When the launch IC 378 receives a launch permission signal of HI level or a signal corresponding thereto from the launch permission receiving circuit 377, each of the launch solenoid 53a and the ball feeding device 53b of the game ball launching mechanism 53 It has a function of outputting a drive signal periodically. In this case, launch IC 378 outputs each drive signal as a pulse signal, and its output cycle is 0.6 sec. Further, the output timing of the drive signal is set earlier in the ball feeder 53b than in the launch solenoid 53a so that the game ball is fired after one game ball is supplied to the firing rail.

  The launch handle 54 is provided with a handle portion as described above, and the greater the amount of operation of the handle portion, the stronger the launch strength of the game ball by the launch solenoid 53a. In this case, the firing handle 54 is provided with a variable resistor as an operation amount detecting means for detecting an operation amount of the handle portion, and the firing IC 378 supplies the firing solenoid 53a with a voltage input from the variable resistor. The firing intensity is adjusted by adjusting the voltage of the driving signal to be transmitted. The adjustment function is not necessarily provided in the launch IC 378, and an adjustment circuit may be provided in the middle of the signal path between the launch IC 378 and the launch solenoid 53a.

  Next, a configuration related to electrical connection between the main control device 81 and the sound lamp control device 82 will be described.

  An audio lamp control device 82 is connected to the output side of the main MPU 202. The sound lamp control device 82 drives and controls the display lamp unit 63, the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14 based on the command received from the main MPU 202, and sends a command to the display control device 212. Send. The display control device 212 analyzes various commands received from the sound lamp control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the display of images on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. The command transmission from the main MPU 202 to the sound lamp control device 82 is performed serially, but may be configured to be performed in parallel.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 202>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 202 will be described.

  Reservation information stored on the basis of the points that the main MPU 202 performs various lotteries using the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4, and the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34, the retaining ball storage area 232 The points stored in are the same as in the above embodiments.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, detection sensors 33a and 34c are provided in the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, respectively, as in the eighth embodiment and the like. The hold information acquired based on the winning and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 are not distinguished. Unlike the eighth embodiment, the hold information does not include numerical information of the variation type counter CS, and the variation type counter at that time is determined when the variation display time is determined at the start of the game. CS numerical information is acquired.

  Further, in the present embodiment, (1) the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) the lottery mode in the winning lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to increase the occurrence frequency of winning in the variable prize winning device 32 between the start and end of the opening / closing execution mode relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in any of the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the game is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit.

  Here, the round game is one of the conditions that a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses and that a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win a prize winning opening 32a. A game that continues until is satisfied. In addition, the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result triggered by the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds (15R) regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  Moreover, in this pachinko machine 10, one opening mode of the variable prize winning device 32 is set in a plurality of types with different opening durations (opening durations) from when the big winning opening 32a is opened until it is closed. Has been. Specifically, a long-time mode (long-term mode) set to 29 seconds, which is a long open duration, and a short time set to 0.06 sec, which is a short time shorter than the above-mentioned long time, A mode (short-term mode) is set.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. . In the round game, the upper limit number of end conditions is set to nine. Then, in the long time mode among the above open modes, the open duration time is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and one round game. On the other hand, in the short-time mode, an opening continuation time is set that is shorter than the product of the game ball launch cycle and one round game, more specifically, shorter than the game ball launch cycle. Therefore, when the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a long-time manner, it is expected that the maximum number of winnings in one round game will be generated at the large winning opening 32a. When the variable winning device 32 is opened once in a short-time manner, it is expected that no winning will be made to the big winning opening 32a or even if a winning will occur.

  In the high-frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a is opened once in a round manner in each round game. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the large winning opening 32a is opened once in each round game in a short time mode.

  It should be noted that the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening 32a in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the number of round games, the opening duration for one open and the upper limit number in one round game are those in the high frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the variable winning device 32 is higher than that in the low-frequency winning mode until the opening / closing execution mode starts and ends. It is.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the main ROM 203. Then, as such distribution destinations, a low-probability jackpot result (low-probability-specific special game result), a low-winning high-probability jackpot result (explicit high-probability-corresponding game result or a result that becomes suddenly probable), High-probability special game result) is set.

  The low probability big hit result is a big hit result in which the open / close execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the open / close execution mode ends, the win / fail lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The low-winning high-probability jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  The most advantageous jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / raising lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the success / failure lottery becomes a big hit state win and shifts to the big win state by that.

  Note that the normal game state in relation to each of the above-described game states refers to a state in which the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, not the open / close execution mode. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the low prize-winning high probability hit result is not set as a game result.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability big hit result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the low winning high probability big hit result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the most favorable jackpot result.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 202>
Next, each process executed in order to advance the game in the main MPU 202 will be described. The main MPU 202 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S6101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. In the subsequent step S6102, access to the main RAM 204 is permitted, and the internal function register of the main MPU 202 is set in step S6103.

  Thereafter, in step S6104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply and launch control device 98 is manually operated. In subsequent step S6105, the power failure flag of the main RAM 204 is set to “1”. It is determined whether or not. In step S6106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S6107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S6108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shut-off is not set, or when abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S6108. In step S6108, the main RAM 204 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 204. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, “1” is set in the power failure flag, and the checksum is normal, and step S6109 is not executed without executing step S6108. Proceed to In step S6109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 204 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is given to the voice lamp control device 82 in order to recognize the current gaming state. Send to. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the payout side RAM 364 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout side MPU 362. Furthermore, an interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of timer interrupt processing.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to residual processing in steps S6110 to S6116. In the remaining process, interrupt prohibition is set first in step S6110, and a hold command setting process is executed in subsequent step S6111. The contents of the hold command setting process are the same as those in step S2609 in the eighth embodiment. In step S6112, the interrupt permission is set.

  Thereafter, interrupt prohibition is set again in step S6113, and in subsequent step S6114, random number initial value update processing for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S6115, the variation type counter CS is updated. The variable counter update process is performed. In step S 6116, interrupt permission is set. Then, it returns to step S6110 and repeats the processing of step S6110 to step S6116.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interruption process is periodically executed at a cycle of 4 msec.

  In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S6201, a process of storing the return address in the register of the main MPU 202 is executed in the same manner as in step S2701 in the eighth embodiment. In the subsequent step S6202, as in step S2702 in the eighth embodiment, a process for saving the information stored in the current register of the main MPU 202 to the main RAM 204 is executed.

  In subsequent step S6203, a power failure information storage process is executed. Although details will be described later, in the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power outage monitoring board 205. Execute.

  In subsequent step S6204, lottery random number update processing is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information Then, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, in step S6205, random number initial value update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S6114, and in step S6206, variation counter update processing is executed in the same manner as in step S6115. In a succeeding step S6207, a game stop determination process is executed. As will be described in detail later, in the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped, and if the progress of the game is to be stopped, the process for advancing the game is executed. Stop.

  Thereafter, in step S6208, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped, and the processing after step S6209 is executed on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped.

  In step S6209, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32c and 34b is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special winning opening 32a to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32c is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set. The output of the drive signal is stopped. When the information for switching the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S6210, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In the subsequent step S6211, the signals received from the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b are read, and a winning detection process for performing processing corresponding to the read information is executed. In step S6212, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of predetermined timer counters provided in the main RAM 204 is executed.

  In subsequent step S6213, fraud detection processing for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is performed, and in step S6214, firing control for performing game ball firing control is performed. Execute the process. Also, in step S6215, as input status monitoring processing, based on the information read in the reading processing in step S6210, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor 31a-35b, opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed. Confirm.

  In the subsequent step S6216, special figure special electric control processing for performing execution control of game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and in step S6217, opening lottery of the electric accessory 34a and opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34a are performed. Execute the ordinary power control process to perform. In step S6218, output information is set for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the main display unit 43 in the first hold lamp unit 45 based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S6216 and S6217. The output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information related to the accessory display unit 44 to the second hold lamp unit 46 is set. In step S6218, output information for updating the display content of the main display unit 43 is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S6216 and S6217, and the display content of the accessory display unit 44 is changed. Set the output information to be updated.

  In the subsequent step S6219, in the situation where both the game times and the opening / closing execution mode are not executed, a demonstration display process for making the display content of the symbol display device 41 for standby display is executed, and in step S6220, The contents of the command and signal received from the payout-side MPU 362 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S6221, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed.

  In subsequent step S6222, the signal output state to the external terminal board is switched so as to control the start and end of the output of the external signal in accordance with the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. Execute external information setting processing. In step S6223, a process for editing the test fire test information is executed.

  In addition, the winning detection process of step S6211, the timer update process of step S6212, the fraud detection process of step S6213, the launch control process of step S6214, the input state monitoring process of step S6215, the special figure special electric control process of step S6216, and the step S6217 The ordinary power transmission control process, the demonstration display process in step S6219, the payout state reception process in step S6220, and the payout output process in step S6221 will be individually described later.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S6208, or after the processing in steps S6209 to S6223 is executed, the process proceeds to step S6224. In step S6224, the data saved in the main side RAM 204 in step S6202 is returned to the register of the main side MPU 202. In step S6225, the return address stored in the register of the main side MPU 202 in step S6201 is referred to. Grasp the address of normal processing that will return after the current timer interrupt processing is completed. As a result, after the timer interrupt process is completed, it is possible to return to the process that was being executed before the timer interrupt process was started. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Power failure information storage processing>
Next, the power failure information storage process executed in step S6203 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the power failure information storage process, first, in step S6301, information of “10”, which is the number of times of power failure signal repetition, is set in a repeat counter provided in the main RAM 204, and in step S6302, the main RAM 204 is set. The information of the power failure detection counter provided in is initialized.

  In a succeeding step S6303, a process of reading the information of the power failure signal received in the input port of the main side MPU 202 is executed. In this case, when a power failure signal (LOW level power failure signal) corresponding to the fact that the power shutdown has not occurred is received, information of “0” is stored as non-power failure information in the input port. When a power failure signal (HI level power failure signal) corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received, information “1” is stored as power interruption occurrence information in the input port. In step S6303, a process of reading the power failure signal information into the register of the main MPU 202 is executed.

  In subsequent step S6304, it is determined whether or not the information of the power failure signal read in step S6303 corresponds to the occurrence of a power failure (occurrence of power failure). In the case where it corresponds to the occurrence of a power failure, in step S6305, the update process is executed so as to add 1 to the numerical information of the power failure detection counter, and then the process proceeds to step S6306. The process proceeds to step S6306 without executing the process of step S6304.

  In step S6306, update processing is executed so as to subtract 1 from the numerical information of the repetition counter. Thereafter, in step S6307, it is determined whether the numerical information of the repetition counter is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the processing in steps S6303 to S6306 has been executed for the number of repetitions set in step S6301. If a negative determination is made in step S6307, the process returns to step S6303, and the processes in steps S6303 to S6306 are repeated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S6307, the process proceeds to step S6308.

  In step S6308, it is determined whether the current numerical information of the power failure detection counter is equal to or greater than the trigger reference number corresponding to the occurrence of the power failure. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current numerical value information of the power failure detection counter is “8” or more as a result of executing the processing of step S6303 to step S6306 for the number of repetitions. If it is less than the trigger reference number, the power failure information storage process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the number is the trigger reference number or more, the power failure processing (power failure processing) in steps S6309 to S6312 is executed. Specifically, first, in step S6309, “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 204, and in the subsequent step S6310, checksum calculation processing is executed. The checksum calculated here is stored in the main RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S6311, all the output port information of the main RAM 204 is set to “0”, and access to the main RAM 204 is prohibited in step S6312. Then, the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed.

  Since the power failure information storage process is executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process, there is no need to execute the timer interrupt process in the middle of the power recovery. As a result, it is not necessary to store the address of the process executed when the power failure occurs in the main RAM 204 as stack information, and the processing load of the process when the power failure occurs can be reduced.

  Here, the effect of confirming the occurrence of a power failure as described above will be described. FIG. 78 is a timing chart for explaining the function and effect.

  When a commercial power failure or a power-off operation of the pachinko machine 10 is performed at the timing t1, the power failure signal becomes an HI level signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption. Thereafter, the power failure information storage process is started at the timing t2, so that the repetition count information is set in the repetition counter and the information of the power failure detection counter is initialized.

  Thereafter, the first step S6303 to step S6306 processing (hereinafter also referred to as power failure confirmation processing) is executed at the timing of t3, so that the numerical information of the repeated counter is decremented by 1 and the numerical information of the power failure detection counter is One is added. Further, the next power failure confirmation process is executed at the timing of t4. However, at this timing, the power failure signal is in a state corresponding to the fact that the power cut-off has not occurred even though the power cut-off has occurred due to the occurrence of electrical noise. Therefore, although the numerical information of the repetitive counter is decremented by 1 at the timing, the numerical information of the power failure detection counter is not updated.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the power failure confirmation process is executed for the number of times set in the counter repeatedly regardless of whether or not the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption. Therefore, even after confirming that the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption, the power failure confirmation process is continued even if it is confirmed that the power interruption has not occurred.

  After that, at the timing from t5 to t10, it is confirmed that the influence of electrical noise disappears and the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption. Therefore, at each timing, 1 is subtracted from the numerical information of the repetitive counter, and 1 is added to the numerical information of the power failure detection counter. Further, at the timing of t11, the influence of electrical noise occurs again, and the power failure signal is information corresponding to the fact that the power supply is not cut off, so only 1 is subtracted from the numerical information of the repetitive counter. . In addition, at the timing of t12, it is confirmed that the influence of electrical noise disappears, the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption, and the numerical information of the repetitive counter is decremented by 1, and the power failure detection counter Numeric information is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, by confirming that the numerical information of the repetition counter is “0” at the timing of t <b> 13, the main MPU 202 grasps that the power failure confirmation processing for the number of repetitions has been completed. Therefore, the power failure process is started at the timing t13.

  As described above, the power failure processing is not executed by confirming the reception of the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption once, but the power failure processing is executed when the reception of the power failure signal is confirmed a plurality of times. By doing in this way, it can suppress that the process at the time of a power failure will be performed when the power failure signal suddenly changes to the thing corresponding to generation | occurrence | production of a power interruption interruption | blocking by the influence of electrical noise etc.

  In addition, if the power supply is completely shut down without power failure processing when the power is cut off, the power failure flag is not set to "1", and the checksum is calculated and saved In a situation where it is not performed, the processing in the main MPU 202 is terminated. Then, the main RAM 204 is initialized at the next power recovery, and there is a concern that the prize ball will be invalidated and that the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode may be lost. . Under such circumstances, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10, the power failure confirmation processing is executed a plurality of times within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing, and the processing at the time of power failure is started within the range of the processing times. It is preferable.

  In addition, due to the influence of electrical noise, etc., in the situation where the power is cut off, the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption suddenly changes to the one corresponding to the state where the power interruption has not occurred. There is concern. In this case, if the condition for executing the power failure process is set to continuously check the reception of the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power shutdown, the power shutdown has occurred. Nevertheless, due to the influence of the electrical noise, the main MPU 202 does not recognize that the power supply has been cut off, and there is a concern that the power supply is completely cut off without executing the power failure process. On the other hand, if the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed more than the trigger reference number (repetition count> trigger reference number) within the range where the power failure confirmation processing is performed for the predetermined number of repetitions, the power failure processing is executed. In this way, by removing the continuity of confirmation from the conditions for executing the process at the time of power failure, even when there is an influence of electrical noise as described above, the process at the time of power failure can be executed satisfactorily.

  Further, in order to execute the process at the time of power failure, it is necessary to confirm the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption three times or more. In a configuration in which the power failure signal is confirmed a plurality of times within the range of one processing time, the confirmation may be performed a plurality of times in a situation where the influence of the occurrence of one electrical noise continues. Concerned. On the other hand, since it is necessary to confirm the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption as described above three times or more, the power failure signal output corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is continued during the time of power failure. The period required for executing the process becomes somewhat long. Therefore, the possibility of the power failure process being executed due to the occurrence of electrical noise is reduced.

  Incidentally, there is a minimum processing time required to execute the process of one step in the main-side MPU 202, and it is necessary to execute the processes of a plurality of steps to complete one power failure confirmation process. That is, a predetermined time is required from the start of one power failure confirmation process to the start of the next power failure confirmation process. For example, if the time required to execute the process of one step is 1.2 μsec, it takes 4.8 μsec to execute one power failure confirmation process. And when the said power failure confirmation process is performed 10 times, it will take about 50 microseconds to start the process at the time of a power failure. On the other hand, the time from when the power is shut off until the main MPU 202 can no longer execute processing (for example, the time until the reset signal output to the main MPU 202 is started) is set to about 10 msec. Then, even if the power failure confirmation process is executed a plurality of times as described above, the power failure process can be completed sufficiently.

  In addition, if the number of repetitions that is the confirmation reference number is 3 or more and the trigger reference number is less than the repeat number and 2 or more, the specific values of the repetition number and the trigger reference number are arbitrary. .

<Winning detection process>
Next, the winning detection process executed in step S6211 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described.

  In the winning detection process, a process of confirming the detection results in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b is executed. In this confirmation, the input port of the main MPU 202 is confirmed. Prior to the description of the winning detection process, an electrical configuration for inputting the detection results of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b to the input port 92a of the main MPU 202 will be described with reference to FIG. To do.

  The input port 92a is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that eight types of signals can be handled simultaneously. An area for storing “0” or “1” information according to the voltage of each signal is provided in a one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. That is, the area includes 0th bit D0 to 7th bit D7.

  Further, more than eight types of signals are input to the input port 92a. In order to limit the number of simultaneously input targets to eight types, the signal group to be input to the input port 92a depends on the driver IC. It is switched through switching control. In the winning detection process, a signal group to be input to the input port 92a is set to each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b.

  In such a situation, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the big winning opening detection sensor 32e, and the first bit D1 is information corresponding to the winning signal from the upper working opening detection sensor 33a. Is stored, the second bit D2 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the lower working port detection sensor 34c, and the third bit D3 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the first winning port detection sensor 31a. The fourth bit D4 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the second winning mouth detection sensor 31b, and the fifth bit D5 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the third winning mouth detection sensor 31c. The 6 bits D6 store information corresponding to the winning signal from the first gate detection sensor 35a, and the seventh bit D7 stores information corresponding to the winning signal from the second gate detection sensor 35b. There are stored.

  In this case, each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b outputs a HI level signal indicating that a winning ball is not being detected as a winning signal when it has not detected the passing of a gaming ball, and passes the gaming ball. If it is detected, a LOW level signal indicating that it is being detected is output as a winning signal. However, the main control board 201 is provided with an inverting circuit, and the signal state is inverted before the detection signals are input to the input port 92a. When the LOW level signal is received through the inverting circuit, the input port 92a stores “0” information (data 0 or no information) for the corresponding bit, and receives the HI level signal through the inverting circuit. If it is, information “1” (data 1 or presence information) is stored for the corresponding bit.

  That is, in a situation where the passing of the game ball is not detected by the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, information of “0” corresponding to the information indicating non-detection is stored for the corresponding bit, and the passing of the game ball is detected. In a detected state, information “1” corresponding to information indicating that the bit is being detected is stored for the corresponding bit.

  Each of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b outputs a LOW level signal as a winning signal while detecting the passing of a game ball, and also outputs an HI level signal as a winning signal while detecting the passing of a gaming ball. May be configured to output. In this case, the inverting circuit may be omitted.

  In the winning detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80A, first, in step S6401, information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 is stored in the register of the main MPU 202. A process of shifting to the first winning determination area WA1 is executed. The first winning determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 80 (b-1), and stores all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. It is possible data capacity. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the first winning determination area WA1 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence, for example, the 0th bit D0. Is always stored in a predetermined bit in the first winning determination area WA1.

  In subsequent step S6402, a wait process for winning detection is executed. In this wait process, the main MPU 202 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time elapses. In this pachinko machine 10, 10 μsec is set as the wait time, but it does not disturb the execution of the periodic timer interrupt process, and the effects described below are sufficiently exerted by setting the wait process. However, the specific wait time is arbitrary, but it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

  Incidentally, as already explained, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the process of one step. Therefore, even if the process of step S6402 is not set, a forcible wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between steps S6401 and S6403. In this regard, in step S6402, not only the minimum time required for executing the process but also an additional wait time is set between the process of step S6401 and the process of step S6403.

  In the subsequent step S6403, a process of shifting the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 to the second winning determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 202 is executed. Incidentally, since the information update at the input port 92a is performed at an interval shorter than the time from the completion of step S6401 to the start of step S6403, the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 in step S6403. The information transferred from can be different from that in step S6401.

  Similar to the first winning determination area WA1, the second winning determination area WA2 is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 80 (b-2), and is stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. The data capacity is sufficient to store all of the stored information. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the second winning determination area WA2 are determined in a one-to-one correspondence, and the storage source bits are further determined. And the storage destination bit are the same as in the first winning determination area WA1.

  Thereafter, in step S6404, a winning determination process is executed, and then the main winning detection process is terminated. Here, the winning determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the winning determination process, first, in step S6501, 8 is set in a winning determination counter provided in the main RAM 204. In the subsequent step S6502, each bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current winning determination counter in the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is grasped. Each piece of information grasped in this case is information read from the same bit in the input port 92a.

  In subsequent step S6503, AND processing of each information grasped in step S6502 is executed, and the AND processing result is stored in a register. In step S6504, the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are stored. Among them, the AND processing result is stored in the corresponding bit on the side different from the side on which the information on the result of the AND processing is stored in the winning detection processing in the processing time of the previous timer interrupt processing. The first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in FIGS. 80 (b-3) and 80 (b-4), and each of the first winning determination areas WA1. The data capacity is capable of storing all the information of the AND processing result of each bit and each bit of the second winning determination area WA2. In this case, the order of bits in the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 subjected to AND processing and the order of each bit in the first post-calculation area WA3 and the second post-calculation area WA4 are unambiguous. Is stipulated.

  Thereafter, in step S6505, the information on the result of the AND process in the winning determination process in the previous timer interrupt process is stored in the first post-computation area WA3 and the second post-computation area WA4. Then, the bit information corresponding to the numerical information of the current winning determination counter is read. In step S6506, an inversion process for inverting the read information between “0” and “1” is executed.

  Thereafter, in step S6507, AND processing is performed on the AND processing result information in step S6503 and the inversion processing result information in step S6506. In subsequent step S6508, the AND processing result is used as winning detection start information. It is determined whether or not the corresponding value is “1”.

  If it is determined in step S6508 that the AND processing result is “1”, whether or not the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the upper operation port 33 in step S6509. Determine whether. If it corresponds to the upper working port 33, “1” is set to the upper working port winning flag provided in the main side RAM 204 in step S 6510, and provided in the main side RAM 204 in step S 6511. 1 is added to the numerical information of the three prize ball counters. The three prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 202 to specify the number of times to output a three prize ball command instructing execution of the three prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6509, it is determined in step S6512 whether the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the lower operation port 34 or not. If it corresponds to the lower working port 34, “1” is set to the lower working port winning flag provided in the main side RAM 204 in step S6513, and provided in the main side RAM 204 in step S6514. 1 is added to the numerical information of the four prize ball counters. Note that the 4-prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 202 to specify the number of times to output a 4-prize ball command instructing the execution of four prize balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6512, it is determined in step S6515 whether or not the current numerical value information of the winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the through gate 35. If it corresponds to the through gate 35, “1” is set to the through flag provided in the main RAM 204 in step S6516. The through flag is a flag for the main MPU 202 to specify that the process corresponding to winning through the through gate 35 is to be executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6515, other corresponding processing is executed in step S6517. In other handling processing, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the current winning determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the variable winning device 32. When the variable winning device 32 is supported, “1” is set to the large winning flag provided in the main RAM 204 and 1 is added to the numerical information of the 15 winning ball counters provided in the main RAM 204. .

  The big winning flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 202 that processing corresponding to winning in the variable winning device 32 and processing other than execution of the winning ball should be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 202 to specify the number of times to output 15 prize ball commands instructing execution of 15 prize balls.

  Further, when it is determined that the numerical information of the current winning determination counter is not information indicating the bit corresponding to the variable winning device 32 in the other corresponding processing, the numerical value of the ten winning ball counters provided in the main RAM 204 Add 1 to the information. The 10-award ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 202 to specify the number of times to output a 10-award ball command instructing execution of 10 award balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6508, or after any one of steps S6511, S6514, S6516, and S6517 is executed, the process proceeds to step S6518. In step S6518, the winning determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S6519, it is determined whether or not the winning determination counter is “0”.

  If it is not “0”, the processing of steps S6502 to S6517 is executed for the bits corresponding to the numerical information of the winning determination counter updated in step S6518. When the processes in steps S6502 to S6517 are executed for the numerical information set in step S6501, an affirmative determination is made in step S6519, and the award determination process is terminated by making an affirmative determination. .

  Next, by executing the winning detection process (FIG. 80), whether or not there is a winning in the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34 and the through gate 35 in the game area. The manner of detection will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the timing for monitoring detection results (hereinafter also referred to as winning information) in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82A is a timing chart for explaining the timing for monitoring each winning information.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (A), in the configuration in which the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) is activated at a cycle of T1 (specifically, 4 msec), the process for monitoring the winning information is 2 in each process of the timer interrupt process. Times (step S6401, step S6403). The process of monitoring each set of winning information is executed so that the timing is changed, but the process of monitoring the winning information on the preceding side (step S6401) is time T2 with respect to the timing at which the timer interrupt process is started. It is executed at the timing when.

  In this case, the timing at which the winning detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is executed before the process whose time is likely to fluctuate, such as fraud detection process, launch control process, special figure special electric control process, and ordinary figure ordinary electric control process. In addition, the processing that is executed prior to the winning detection processing in the timer interrupt processing is processing in which the processing time is relatively difficult to fluctuate. Therefore, the period until the process for monitoring the winning information on the preceding side is started in the timer interrupt process for each processing time is the same, substantially the same or similar at T2. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of winning information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the winning information on the preceding side is periodically executed.

  Among the processes for monitoring each set of winning information, between the process for monitoring the winning information on the front side (step S6401) and the process for monitoring the winning information on the rear side (step S6403), The wait process (step S6402) is executed, but in this wait process, no process is executed and only a wait is made until a certain wait time T3 elapses. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of winning information included in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the winning information on the rear side is periodically executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (B), the contents of the calculation executed when the winning determination is performed will be described. FIG. 82 (B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the calculation executed when winning determination is performed. Actually, various operations are performed in units of 1 bit, but in the following description, the contents of the operations will be described in units of 1 byte. However, a configuration in which an operation in units of 1 byte as described below is actually performed may be employed.

  In the case of FIG. 82 (B), first, in the process of monitoring the first-side winning information in the n-th timer interrupt process, “00100000” is displayed in the first winning determination area WA1, as shown in FIG. 82 (B1). It is set. In this case, among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, the winning information of the third winning mouth detection sensor 31c is information indicating that a game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as winning information), The sensor winning information is information indicating that no game ball is detected (hereinafter also referred to as “no winning information”).

  In the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the n-th timer interrupt process, “10100000” is set in the second winning determination area WA2, as shown in FIG. 82 (B2). In this case, among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, each of the second gate detection sensor 35b and the third winning opening detection sensor 31c is winning information, and the other sensors are winning information.

  When the information of the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “00100000” as shown in FIG. 82 (B3), and the information is This is set in the first post-computation area WA3 as a monitoring result of the winning information in the timer interruption processing of the n-th processing time. If the winning information monitoring result is set in the first post-computation area WA3 in the (n-1) th timer interrupt processing, the winning information monitoring result in the nth timer interrupt processing is the second post-computation area. Set to WA4. Also, the winning determination process is executed using the monitoring result of the winning information at the (n-1) th time and the monitoring result of the winning information at the nth time, but the contents of the calculation of this process are omitted here.

  Next, in the process of monitoring the winning information on the preceding side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, “10100110” is set in the first winning determination area WA1, as shown in FIG. 82 (B4). In this case, among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, each of the second gate detection sensor 35b, the third winning opening detection sensor 31c, the lower working opening detection sensor 34c, and the upper working opening detection sensor 33a becomes winning information. The other sensors have no winning information.

  In the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, as shown in FIG. 82 (B5), “101000110” is set in the second winning determination area WA2. In this case, among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, each of the second gate detection sensor 35b, the third winning opening detection sensor 31c, and the upper working opening detection sensor 33a is winning information, and the other sensors are winning. There is no information.

  When the information of the first winning determination area WA1 and the second winning determination area WA2 is set as described above, the AND processing result is “1010001” as shown in FIG. 82 (B6), and the information is This is set in the second post-computation area WA4 as a result of monitoring the winning information in the timer interrupt processing of the (n + 1) th processing time.

  Thereafter, in the winning determination process (FIG. 81) in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process, first, the monitoring result of the winning information in the nth timer interrupt process is read out from the first post-calculation area WA3 and the read out monitoring. Inversion processing is performed on the resulting information. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (B7), “11011111” is obtained. Then, the result of monitoring the winning information in the (n + 1) th timer interrupt process is ANDed with respect to the information on the result of the inversion process. This results in “10000010” as shown in FIG. 82 (B8). In this case, in the winning determination process, it is determined that the winning of the game ball is detected by the second gate detection sensor 35b, and it is determined that the winning of the game ball is detected by the upper working port detection sensor 33a.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 82 (B4), the lower working port detection sensor 34c becomes the winning presence information in the process of monitoring the winning information on the front side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process. This is caused by noise. In this case, even if it is confirmed that there is a change from information with no winning information to information with winning information, it is not immediately determined that winning has occurred, but when winning information is confirmed multiple times, it is determined that winning has occurred. It is. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 82 (B5), in the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in the (n + 1) th timer interruption process, the lower operating port detection sensor 34c is no-winning information, and electrical noise is generated. Are not treated as winning game balls.

  The speed of the game ball is relatively fast by performing the confirmation of the winning information as described above a plurality of times within the range of one processing time instead of performing the timer interruption processing for a plurality of processing times. Even if the detection positions of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b are passed, it can be accurately detected. For example, in a configuration in which a ball passage is formed so that a game ball passes through the detection positions of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b at a maximum speed of about 10 msec, each timer interrupt process periodically started at a cycle of 4 msec If the process of monitoring the winning information is executed once in each processing time, there is a possibility that the passage is missed. On the other hand, the occurrence of such an oversight can be reduced by confirming the winning information a plurality of times within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing.

  Further, the process of monitoring the first-side winning information and the process of monitoring the second-side winning information are periodically executed as already described. As a result, the occurrence of an event in which the period during which the winning information is not monitored is locally extended is suppressed, and the possibility of missing a game ball from this point is also reduced. Furthermore, since the occurrence of an event in which the period during which the winning information is not monitored is locally increased is suppressed, for example, the n-th timer is detected as in the current detection by the second gate detection sensor 35b. Even if the detection of the passage of the game ball is started during the interruption process, it can be grasped without missing the passage.

  However, in the configuration in which the same winning signal is confirmed a plurality of times within the range of one processing time, the confirmation is performed a plurality of times in a situation where the influence due to the occurrence of one electrical noise continues. There is a concern that On the other hand, as described above, a wait process for winning detection between the process of monitoring the winning information on the front side and the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in one timer interrupt process (step S6402). Further, the wait time is set so that the influence of electrical noise does not extend over the process of monitoring a set of winning information. Therefore, the winning of the game ball is not erroneously detected due to the influence of electrical noise.

  The wait process is a process for waiting in the main MPU 202 without performing other processes. As a result, the wait time is prevented from fluctuating, and an interval when the winning signals output from the same winning detection sensors 31a to 35b are checked twice in one processing time of the timer interrupt processing. Is made constant. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the time required from the start of detection of the game ball by the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b until it is determined that the winning has occurred varies greatly depending on the progress of the game.

  Further, the third prize opening detection sensor 31c receives a winning information in each of a process for monitoring a set of winning information in the n-th timer interruption process and a process for monitoring a set of winning information in the n + 1 timer interruption process. However, this indicates a state in which a game ball in which the occurrence of a winning is already detected is continuously detected. In this case, since the occurrence of the winning is specified on the condition that the monitoring result of the winning information in the n-th timer interrupt processing is “0”, the winning of one game ball is treated as a plurality of winnings. I will not. Even in such a configuration, when a winning occurs, it is determined that a winning occurs when the timer interrupt process is executed twice, so the time required to determine that a winning has occurred is shortened. Is planned.

  In each timer interrupt process, a common logical operation is performed on a plurality of winning information acquired in the corresponding processing times to calculate a winning information monitoring result, and the calculation is performed for two consecutive processing times. It is determined whether or not a winning has occurred from the result. As a result, by executing the same logical operation in each processing time of the timer interrupt process, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above.

  Here, the determination of the presence or absence of the occurrence of winning is performed by storing winning information over a plurality of monitoring times as a history and performing a logical operation using the winning information of the stored history. On the other hand, regarding the determination of whether or not a power failure has occurred, the determination is performed by counting the number of times that the power failure has been detected using a power failure detection counter. In this case, the period from the start of the process of step S6401 regarding the determination of whether or not a prize has occurred until the process of step S6508 is executed is the step from the start of the process of step S6301 regarding the determination of whether or not a power outage has occurred. It is the same, substantially the same as or similar to the period until the processing of S6308 is executed. This is because the number of times the content of the signal is monitored at the time of determination is greater in the determination of whether or not a power failure has occurred than in the determination of whether or not a prize has occurred. Because the time is set.

  If a processing configuration that uses a forced wait time is applied to determine whether or not a power failure has occurred, the number of times that the signal can be monitored decreases, and the accuracy of grasping the occurrence of a power failure decreases. End up. On the other hand, in order to store a history of winning information when trying to apply a processing configuration that uses a large number of repeated checks rather than a forced wait time to determine whether or not a winning has occurred The required storage capacity will increase drastically. Therefore, each determination can be made appropriately by using the wait time for determining whether or not a prize has occurred and using the number of repetitions for determining whether or not a power failure has occurred.

<Timer update processing>
Next, the timer update process executed in step S6212 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described.

  The timer update process supports multiple types of subtraction, in which the elapsed time is measured through subtraction of numerical information from the timer counter provided in the main RAM 204 to grasp the elapsed time to grasp the execution timing of the process. The processes for subtracting the timer counters TC1 to TC10 are integrated.

  FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the timer area TA set in the main RAM 204. As shown in FIG. 83, 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 are used as subtraction-compatible timer counters TC1 to TC10. A plurality of types are provided, and a plurality of types of 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 are provided. The 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 include a special-purpose special electric timer counter TC1, which will be described later, a general-purpose ordinary electric timer counter TC2, which will be described later, a radio wave notification timer counter TC3, which will be described later, and a launch start timer counter TC4. include. The 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 include a monitoring timer counter TC5 described later, a disconnection notification timer counter TC6 described later, a short-circuit notification timer counter TC7 described later, and a disconnection confirmation timer counter TC8 described later. And are included.

  In each of the timer counters TC1 to TC10, address information for specifying the physical block allocated in the main RAM 204 by the main MPU 202 is set. Of the address information to be serial numbers, a series of address information is assigned to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, and a different series of address information is 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. Assigned to a group.

  Specifically, serial addresses from the leading edge address (P) to the address (Q-1) of the timer address are assigned to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, and from the address (Q). The serial addresses up to the address (R-1) are assigned to the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. That is, the address on the front side is assigned to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 group, the last address in the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 group, and the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 group The first address is a sequential number.

  Also, since each address information is individually assigned to an area for 1 byte, one address information is assigned to each of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. Thus, two pieces of address information are assigned to each of the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. In this case, when the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 are specified in the main MPU 202, the address information on the front side of the two address information assigned to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 is used. .

  In the timer update process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 84, first, in step S6601, the head addresses of the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 are set in the timer address in the register of the main MPU 202. This head address is set on the program.

  In subsequent step S6602, in order to specify the number of 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 to be subject to update processing in the main MPU 202, the number of 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 is set for the repetition counter. To do. In the subsequent step S6603, a process of reading the numerical information stored in the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 corresponding to the current timer address to the register of the main MPU 202 is executed. In step S6603 immediately after the processing of steps S6601 and S6602, the numerical information stored in the 16-bit timer counter TC1 corresponding to the head address is read.

  In the following step S6604, it is determined whether or not the numerical information read in step S6603 is “0”. If it is not “0”, 1 is subtracted from the numerical information in step S 6605, and the numerical information obtained as a result of the subtraction is overwritten in the read 16-bit timer counter in step S 6606. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S6607.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6604, the processing proceeds to step S6607 without executing the processing in steps S6604 and S6605. That is, when the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 to be updated are already “0”, the process of subtracting 1 is not executed.

  In step S6607, the timer address is incremented by 2 to set the next 16-bit timer counter to be updated. That is, as already described, since the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 have a 2-byte information amount and two pieces of address information are set, the address information is required to update the next 16-bit timer counter. 2 needs to be added. In a succeeding step S6608, 1 is subtracted from the repeat counter.

  Here, after the head address, the address of the target 16-bit timer counter is recognized by adding 2 to the timer address, so the head address of the addresses of the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 is recognized. Other than the above, it is not necessary to store them separately for timer update processing. Thereby, the storage capacity required in the main ROM 203 can be reduced. Further, all addresses except the head address are obtained by adding 2 to the current timer address. This simplifies the processing related to address recognition.

  Thereafter, in step S6609, it is determined whether or not the repetition counter as a result of subtracting 1 in step S6608 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the update process has been completed for all the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. If the repeat counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S6609, and the processing of steps S6603 to S6606 is executed for the 16-bit timer counter corresponding to the timer address obtained by adding 2 in step S6607. To do. If the repeat counter is “0”, it means that the update has been completed for all the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, and thus the process proceeds to step S6610.

  In step S6610, the main MPU 202 specifies the number of 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 to be updated, and sets the number of 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 for the repeat counter. .

  Here, the process of step S6610 is executed when the object of the update process is switched from the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 to the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. At this time, the 8-bit timer counter The start address of TC5 to TC10 is not set. This is because the timer address is set to the start address of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 in the process of step S6607 when the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 whose update order is the last are the update targets. Because. As a result, it is not necessary to individually store the top addresses of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 for the timer update process, so that the storage capacity required in the main ROM 203 can be reduced.

  In subsequent step S6611, a process of reading the numerical information stored in the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 corresponding to the current timer address to the register of the main MPU 202 is executed. In step S6611 immediately after the processing of step S6610 is executed, the numerical information stored in the 8-bit timer counter TC5 corresponding to the head address is read.

  In subsequent step S6612, a process of subtracting 1 from the numerical information read out in step S6611 is executed, and then in step S6613, the contents of the carry flag are added to the numerical information of the subtraction result. In step S6614, the calculated numerical value information is overwritten on the read-out 8-bit timer counter.

  That is, when updating the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, unlike the case of updating the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, it is determined whether or not the numerical information as in step S6604 is “0”. The process of subtracting 1 from the numerical value information is executed without being performed. Therefore, when the process of subtracting 1 is executed when the numerical information is “0”, the 8-bit numerical information becomes “FF” in hexadecimal. On the other hand, when the numerical information becomes “FF” after the processing of step S6612, “1” is set in the carry flag, and the numerical information of “1” is changed to the above “FF” in step S6613. Is added to. Then, the numerical information returns to “0”.

  Here, in the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, the processing load of the process of holding the numerical information of “0” to “0” even after subtracting 1 by using the carry flag is as follows. It is smaller than the processing load in the case of branching the process that proceeds by determining whether or not it is “0”. Therefore, in the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, the processing load is reduced by using the carry flag as described above. On the other hand, in the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, the number of bits handled for subtraction and addition of numerical information increases. Then, as described above, the processing load of the process of holding the numerical information of “0” at “0” after subtracting 1 by using the carry flag is “0” as in step S6604. It becomes large compared with the processing load in the case of branching the processing that proceeds by determining whether or not. Therefore, it is preferable to execute a determination process such as step S6604 for the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. That is, it is possible to appropriately handle the case where the numerical information to be updated is “0” in correspondence with each of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 and the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. It becomes.

  After execution of the process of step S6614, the timer address is incremented by 1 in step S6615, thereby setting the next 8-bit timer counter as an update target, and in step S6616, the repeat counter is decremented by 1.

  Here, with the above processing configuration, it is not necessary to store all of the addresses of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 individually for the timer update process. Thereby, the storage capacity required in the main ROM 203 can be reduced. In addition, after the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 are updated, each address is grasped by adding 1 to the current timer address. This simplifies the processing related to address recognition.

  Thereafter, in step S6617, it is determined whether or not the repetition counter as a result of subtracting 1 in step S6616 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not the update process has been completed for all the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10. If the repeat counter is 1 or more, a negative determination is made in step S6617, and the process of steps S6611 to S6616 is executed for the 8-bit timer counter corresponding to the timer address obtained by subtracting 1 in step S6616. To do. If the repeat counter is “0”, it means that the update has been completed for all of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, and thus this timer update process ends.

  As described above, the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 and the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 that are used to measure the passage of time by subtracting the numerical information are updated by the timer update process. (FIG. 84). As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the case where the updating process of each of the timer counters TC1 to TC10 is executed individually in each process to be used by the timer counters TC1 to TC10.

  For the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, the same update process (steps S6604 to S6606) can be used regardless of the counter by changing the timer address. Similarly, an 8-bit timer is used. For the counters TC5 to TC10, the same update process (steps S6612 to S6614) can be used regardless of the counter by changing the timer address. Therefore, the program capacity can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to collect and read out processing programs in comparison with a case where update processing of each timer counter TC1 to TC10 is executed individually in each process that is a usage target of the timer counters TC1 to TC10. Become.

  Further, for example, in a configuration in which the numerical information of each timer counter TC1 to TC10 is updated by an addition formula, whether or not each timer counter TC1 to TC10 is measuring a period is indicated by the numerical information of the timer counter TC1 to TC10. It is necessary to individually grasp the information by referring to information different from the above. On the other hand, in the timer update process, only the timer counters TC1 to TC10 for which the period is measured by subtracting the numerical information are to be updated, and the numerical information is less than “0”. The update process is executed so as not to be maintained. Thereby, in the configuration in which the updating of the numerical information of the timer counters TC1 to TC10 is performed collectively, the process in a situation where the timer counters TC1 to TC10 do not measure the period is simplified.

  In addition, updating of a timer counter (specifically, a payout permission counter, which will be described later) in which a period is measured by updating numerical information using an addition formula is performed separately from the timer update process. As a result, it is possible to use the addition type timer counter while preventing the processing configuration of the timer update process from becoming complicated.

  Also, the timer update process does not include a process whose processing time is likely to vary relatively from the start timing in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76), so the processing time of other processes included in the timer interrupt process varies. Even in this case, it is possible to reduce the influence of the fluctuation on the update timing of the timer counters TC1 to TC10. As a result, the timer counters TC1 to TC10 can be updated periodically.

<Injustice detection processing>
Next, the fraud detection process executed in step S6213 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described.

  In the fraud detection process, whether or not a plurality of types of detection target frauds that are determined in advance has occurred is monitored, and if it is determined that fraud has occurred, a process for dealing with the fraud is executed. As an illegal act of such a plurality of types of detection targets, an act of illegally generating a winning game ball using a magnet, or an erroneous detection of a winning game ball by the large winning opening detection sensor 32e of the variable winning device 32. And an act of illegally generating a winning game ball using radio waves.

  In the fraud detection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 85, first, in step S6701, it is determined whether or not the magnet detection sensor 352 is ON. Specifically, the magnet detection sensor 352 outputs a LOW level magnet detection signal corresponding to non-detection when the generation of magnetism by the magnet is not detected, and also detects the generation of magnetism by the magnet. In this case, a magnet detection signal of HI level corresponding to the detection is output. Note that the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. The magnet detection signal is input to the input port 92 a of the main MPU 202 when the driver IC sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 202. In step S6701, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether or not the magnet detection sensor 352 is detecting the occurrence of magnetism.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6701, the magnet detection counter provided in the main RAM 204 is cleared to “0” in step S6702. The magnet detection counter is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 202 the number of times that the magnet detection sensor 352 has confirmed that the generation of magnetism is being detected.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6701, a process for adding 1 to the magnet detection counter is executed in step S6703, and whether the numerical information after the addition is “2” in step S6704. Determine whether or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the main MPU 202 has confirmed that the magnet detection sensor 352 is detecting the occurrence of magnetism a plurality of times.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6704, in step S6705, a magnet detected state is set by setting "1" to the magnet detected flag in the main RAM 204. In subsequent step S6706, a magnet detection command is set as an output target. The magnet detection command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 202 has identified the occurrence of an illegal act using a magnet. The command set as an output target in the main MPU 202 is transmitted to the output destination control apparatus without executing any special processing in the processing on the program of the main MPU 202.

  In the sound lamp control device 82, the notification and effect control processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87 is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec), and processing corresponding to reception of the magnet detection command is executed in this processing. To do.

  That is, it is determined in step S6901 whether or not a magnet detection command has been received as a notification system command. If a magnet detection command has been received, notification processing corresponding to the magnet detection command is performed in step S6902. Execute. Specifically, a data table for making notification corresponding to the identification of fraud using a magnet through the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and the read data According to the table, the notification for magnet correspondence is performed by the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64.

  Note that the notification control has priority over control for effects described later, control for launch permission described later, and control of notification for the first stage described later. Also, control of notification for illegal winning, control of notification for second stage described later, control of notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a to 35b for winning described later, control of notification for occurrence of short circuit described later, And when the control of the notification for the occurrence of disconnection on the payout side, which will be described later, overlaps with the timing, the control of each notification with the overlapping timing is executed sequentially. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In a succeeding step S6903, a notification-type command corresponding to reception of the magnet detection command is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 reads out a data table from the ROM of the display control device 212 so that a notification corresponding to the identification of fraud using the magnet is performed through the symbol display device 41, and the magnet according to the read data table. The symbol display device 41 is made to provide a corresponding notification.

  Returning to the description of the fraud detection process (FIG. 85), after executing the process of step S6706, the process proceeds to step S6707. In step S6707, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order for the gaming hall management computer to recognize that the occurrence of an illegal act using a magnet has been identified. The output setting for the external terminal board is executed in the external information setting process (step S6222) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76). The same applies to the processing relating to the following external output.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6704 after execution of step S6702, or after execution of step S6707, the process proceeds to step S6708. In step S6708, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated in the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 by judging whether or not the big prize flag in the main RAM 204 is set to “1”. . If a winning at the big winning opening 32a has occurred, it is determined in step S6709 whether or not the special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 204 is "4". The contents of the special figure special electricity counter will be described in detail later. When the counter is “4”, it means that the special winning opening 32a is open.

  When the special figure special electric counter is not “4”, that is, when the big prize opening 32a is closed, the game ball is detected by the big prize opening detection sensor 32e even though the big prize opening 32a is closed. It means that it was detected. In this case, the process proceeds to step S6710, and the illegal winning state is set by setting “1” to the illegal winning flag in the main RAM 204. In a succeeding step S6711, an illegal winning command is set as an output target. The illegal winning command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82 which is a sub-side control device to recognize that an illegal act that erroneously detects the winning in the big winning opening detection sensor 32e has occurred.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the audio lamp control device 82 determines whether or not an illegal winning command is received as a notification-type command in step S6901, and if an illegal winning command is received, step S6902 The notification process corresponding to the illegal winning command is executed. Specifically, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the illegal winning is performed through the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and the illegal winning prize is read according to the read data table. The notification is performed by the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64.

  Note that the notification control has priority over control for effects described later, control for launch permission described later, and control of notification for the first stage described later. In addition, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for second stage described later, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a to 35b for winning described later, control for notification for occurrence of short circuit described later, And when the control of the notification for the occurrence of disconnection on the payout side, which will be described later, overlaps with the timing, the control of each notification with the overlapping timing is executed sequentially. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In a succeeding step S6903, a notification-type command corresponding to reception of the illegal winning command is transmitted to the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the specification of the illegal winning is performed through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 212, and for the illegal winning correspondence according to the read data table. Notification is performed by the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the fraud detection process (FIG. 85), after executing the process of step S6711, the process proceeds to step S6712. In step S6712, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order for the gaming hall management computer to recognize that the occurrence of an illegal act to be illegally won is specified. In step S6709, a negative determination is made until the time required for detection of the game ball elapses from the closing timing in consideration of the case where a game ball win occurs just before the large opening 32a that is normally opened is closed. It is good also as a structure which does not.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6708, an affirmative determination is made in step S6709, or after execution of step S6712, the radio wave detection process is executed in step S6713, and then the fraud detection process is terminated.

  Here, the radio wave detection process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the radio wave detection process, first, in step S6801, it is determined whether or not the radio wave detection is in the first stage state. In this embodiment, the generation of radio waves is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 353, but only the notification is made without stopping the game only by detecting the generation of radio waves, and the operation port is further detected by detecting the generation of radio waves. The game is stopped when winning to 33, 34 occurs. In this case, the state where only notification is performed is the first stage state of radio wave detection, and the state where the game is stopped is the second stage state of radio wave detection. Incidentally, the state where “1” is set in the first radio wave detection flag of the main RAM 204 is the first stage state of radio wave detection, and “1” is set in the second radio wave detection flag of the main RAM 204. The state is the second stage state of radio wave detection.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6801, it is determined in step S6802 whether the radio wave detection sensor 353 is ON. Specifically, the radio wave detection sensor 353 outputs a LOW level radio wave detection signal corresponding to non-detection when no radio wave is detected, and also supports HI during detection when radio wave is detected. A level radio wave detection signal is output. Note that the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. The radio wave detection signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 202 when the signal is set as an input target to the main MPU 202 by the driver IC. In step S6802, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether the radio wave detection sensor 353 is detecting radio waves.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6802, in step S6803, the first radio wave detection flag of the main RAM 204 is set to “1” to set the first stage state of radio wave detection. In addition, it is good also as a structure set to the 1st step state of an electromagnetic wave detection, when the state which the electromagnetic wave detection sensor 353 is turned on is confirmed in multiple times.

  In the subsequent step S6804, the first stage command is set as an output target. The first stage command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 202 has identified the first stage of radio wave detection.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the sound lamp control device 82 determines whether or not the first stage command has been received in step S6904. If the first stage command has been received, in step S6905. The notification duration is set. In this case, 30 seconds is set as the notification continuation period, and the passage of the notification continuation period is measured using a timer counter or the like provided in the sound lamp control device 82. Then, the sound lamp control device 82 continues the notification corresponding to the reception of the first stage command until the notification duration period elapses. By the way, the notification continuation period is arbitrary as long as it is longer than the notification cycle set in step S6805, but it continues for a time that allows the manager of the game hall to sufficiently confirm the notification for the first stage. It is preferable to set so as to.

  In a succeeding step S6906, a sound emission pattern for the first stage is set. Specifically, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the first stage state of radio wave detection to be performed through the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and the reading is performed. In accordance with the data table, the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 perform notification for the first stage.

  Note that the notification control has priority over control for effects described later and control for launch permission described later. However, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal winning, control for notification for second stage, which will be described later, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a-35b for winning, which will be described later, In the relationship between the notification control for occurrence of a short circuit and the control for notification of occurrence of disconnection on the payout side, which will be described later, the notification for the first stage is not prioritized. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In the subsequent step S6907, a command for the first stage corresponding to the reception of the first stage command is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 reads a data table for making notification corresponding to the first stage state of the radio wave detection through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 212, and performs the first according to the read data table. The symbol display device 41 performs stage notification.

  Returning to the description of the radio wave detection process (FIG. 86), after executing the process of step S6804, the process proceeds to step S6805. In step S6805, numerical information corresponding to the time of the notification cycle (specifically 2000 msec) is set in the radio wave notification timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC3) provided in the main RAM 204. In the present embodiment, in the situation where the first stage state of the radio wave detection is continued, the first stage command is periodically transmitted so that the corresponding notification is continued. The radio wave notification timer counter is used by the main MPU 202 to specify the timing for periodically transmitting the first stage command. The time of the notification cycle is arbitrary and may be 1000 msec.

  Thereafter, in step S 6806, after executing the external output start processing for radio wave detection in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that it is in the first stage of radio wave detection, the process proceeds to step S 6807.

  In step S6807, numerical information corresponding to the monitoring time (eg, 1000 msec) is set in the monitoring timer counter (8-bit timer counter TC5) provided in the main RAM 204. When a radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 353 as described above, the first stage state of the radio wave detection is first set, and the second stage state of the radio wave detection is performed when a winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 occurs. However, in the setting to the second stage state, the winning of the operating ports 33 and 34 occurs during the detection of the radio wave or until the predetermined period elapses after the radio wave detection ends. It is done on condition that. The monitoring time set in step S6807 corresponds to the predetermined period.

  If it is determined in step S6801 that the radio wave detection first stage state has already been set, it is determined in step S6808 whether or not the radio wave detection sensor 353 is in an ON state. . If it continues, it is determined in step S6809 whether or not the radio wave notification timer counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process advances to step S6807. On the other hand, if it is “0”, the process advances to step S6804. Thereby, when the first stage state of the radio wave detection continues, the first stage command can be transmitted periodically.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6808, in step S6810, the first radio wave detection flag in the main RAM 204 is cleared to “0”, thereby releasing the first stage state of radio wave detection. In step S6811, an external output canceling process for radio wave detection is executed to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the first stage state of radio wave detection has been cancelled.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6802, if the process of step S6807 is executed, or if the process of step S6811 is executed, the process proceeds to step S6812. In step S6812, it is determined whether or not a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 by determining whether or not “1” is set in the operating winning flag of the main RAM 204. . In step S6813, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the monitoring timer counter is numerical information larger than “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6812 or step S6813, the radio wave detection process is terminated as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in both step S6812 and step S6813, that is, when winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 occurs during the detection of radio waves or until the monitoring time elapses after the detection of radio waves ends. Advances to the processing of step S6814 to step S6816.

  In step S6814, the second radio wave detection flag in the main RAM 204 is set to “1”, thereby setting the second stage state of radio wave detection. In a succeeding step S6815, the second stage command is set as an output target. The second stage command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the main MPU 202 has determined that the radio wave detection is in the second stage state.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the sound lamp control device 82 determines whether or not the second stage command has been received in step S6908. If the second stage command has been received, in step S6909. The sound emission pattern for the second stage is set. Specifically, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the second stage state of radio wave detection to be performed through the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and the reading is performed. In accordance with the data table, the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 perform notification for the second stage.

  Incidentally, the notification in this case is performed in a clearer or more flashy manner than the notification in the first stage state of the radio wave detection. In addition, the notification control is prioritized over the production control described later, the launch permission control described later, and the first-stage notification control. In addition, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal winning, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to the detection sensors 31a to 35b described later, control for notification for occurrence of short circuit described later, and later described When the control of the notification for occurrence of disconnection on the payout side overlaps with the timing, the control of each notification with the overlapping timing is sequentially executed. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In a succeeding step S6910, a command for the second stage corresponding to the reception of the second stage command is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 reads out a data table for making notification corresponding to the second stage state of the radio wave detection through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 212, and performs the second according to the read data table. The symbol display device 41 performs stage notification.

  Returning to the description of the radio wave detection process (FIG. 86), after executing the process of step S6815, the process proceeds to step S6816. In step S6816, an abnormal external output start process is executed in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that it is in the second stage of radio wave detection. Thereafter, the radio wave detection process is terminated.

<Game stop determination process>
Next, the game stop determination process executed in step S6207 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the game stop determination process, it is determined in step S7001 whether or not the magnet has been detected, in step S7002, it is determined whether or not it is an illegal winning state, and in step S7003, the second stage of radio wave detection. It is determined whether or not it is in a state. And when negative determination is carried out in all of step S7001-step S7003, this game stop determination process is complete | finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S7001 to S7003, the process proceeds to step S7004. In step S7004, a process of setting all output states at the output port of the main MPU 202 to “0” is executed. Thus, for example, even when the big prize opening 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the output of the drive signal to the variable prize driving unit 32c is stopped, so that the big prize opening 32a is switched to the closed state. It is done. Even when the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the open state, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory driving unit 34b is stopped, so that the electric accessory 34a is switched to the closed state. . Further, even when the HI level launch permission signal is output from the main MPU 202 to the power source and launch control device 98, it is switched to the LOW level launch permission signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. Is done.

  In the subsequent step S7005, the game stop state is set by setting “1” to the game stop flag provided in the main RAM 204. In subsequent step S7006, other release processing is executed. For example, by outputting a game stop command to the payout side MPU 362, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 96 is stopped. In addition, the display of the variation of the pattern in the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 is stopped. Thereafter, the game stop determination process ends.

  By setting the game stop state in the game stop determination process as described above, an affirmative determination is made in step S6208 in the subsequent timer interrupt process (FIG. 76). If an affirmative determination is made in step S6208, processing in steps S6209 to S6223 is skipped. The processes in steps S6209 to S6223 are processes for substantially advancing the game, and the progress of the game can be stopped by skipping such a process.

  However, even in the game stop state, the power failure information storage process in step S6203 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) is not skipped. Thereby, even if a power failure occurs during the game stop state, it is possible to normally execute the power failure process. Assuming a configuration in which processing during a power failure is not normally executed while the game is stopped, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off when the game is stopped, the power failure flag is set and the checksum is calculated correctly. If this is not done, the main RAM 204 is initialized when the main process is started. If it does so, a game stop state will be cancelled | released through the simple power interruption of the pachinko machine 10. In such a case, for example, if the act of shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 10 is performed after illegally generating a payout of the game ball, it becomes difficult to detect the fraud and the pachinko machine 10 is normally thereafter It becomes possible to repeat such cheating due to the operation. On the other hand, even if the game is stopped, the power failure process is normally executed. Therefore, even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off after performing the above fraudulent action, the game is stopped after the power is restored. It will return to a state and it will become possible to prevent generation | occurrence | production of the above inconveniences.

  As described above, the game stop state is not canceled even if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, but the main process (by manually operating the RAM erase switch provided in the power and launch control device 98 and shutting off the power) The game stop flag is cleared to “0” and released through the process of step S6108 in FIG. At this time, the state of performing external output regarding fraud detection is also released. In this case, since the power supply and launch control device 98 is provided on the rearmost surface of the pachinko machine 10, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to manually operate the RAM erase switch. Incidentally, in order to make this operability more difficult, a RAM erase switch may be provided at a position covered from the back side by the back pack 91 or other members.

  Incidentally, even in the game stop state, the process of updating various lottery counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is continued without being skipped. Thereby, even if it is in a game stop state, the update of the counters C1-C4 for various lotteries, CINI, and CS can be continued. In this configuration, even if the RAM erase switch is operated and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the various counters C1 to C4, CINI and CS for lottery are not initialized, and the game stop state is released. In this case, it is more effective when applied to a configuration in which the initialization of the main RAM 204 is not essential.

  As described above, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of fraudulent acts subject to game suspension are set, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76), in the process of identifying the occurrence of each fraud, the presence or absence of such fraudulent acts is identified. In particular, the specific game stop process is executed at a timing before the process for substantially advancing the game in the timer interrupt process. This makes it possible to consolidate the game stop processing into one process compared to the case of immediately executing the game stop processing when the occurrence of each fraud is identified, and simplification of the processing. Figured.

  Further, even when the occurrence of the illegal act is specified, the game stop process is not immediately executed. When the occurrence of the illegal action is specified, the notification is immediately executed. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can detect an illegal act at an early stage. In addition, because the abnormal external output is also performed immediately when the occurrence of fraud is specified, for example, if the external output is performed as management data stored in the management computer of the game hall, The administrator of the game hall can grasp the time at the moment when the occurrence of the illegal act is specified.

  Here, an act of generating a radio wave is included as an illegal act subject to the game stop, but the radio wave may be generated even in a situation where the illegal act is not performed. Therefore, in the radio wave detection process, a measure is taken to prevent a player who is playing a game from suffering disadvantages by executing the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Such measures will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  89 (a) shows the status of radio wave detection in the radio wave detection sensor 353, FIG. 89 (b) shows the monitoring time setting status, FIG. 89 (c) shows the command output status from the main MPU 202, FIG. 89 (d) shows the winning status of game balls to the operation ports 33, 34, and FIG. 89 (e) shows the setting status of the game stop state.

  First, detection of radio waves in the radio wave detection sensor 353 is started at a timing t1. At this timing, notification corresponding to the start of detection of radio waves by the output of the first stage command is started, but the game stop state is not set. At the timing t1, the monitoring time is set and measurement of the monitoring time is started. By the way, this set of monitoring times is repeatedly executed while radio wave detection continues.

  Thereafter, when the radio wave detection sensor 353 continues to detect radio waves, the first stage command is output again when the notification period elapses from the timing t1 at the timing t2. The However, since the notification for the first stage of the radio wave detection is continued at this timing, the notification is continued as it is only by resetting the notification continuation time of the notification.

  Thereafter, the radio wave detection sensor 353 does not detect radio waves at the timing t3. However, even in this situation, the measurement of the monitoring time continues. In particular, as described above, the set monitoring time is repeatedly executed while radio wave detection continues, so the timing at which the radio wave detection sensor 353 switches from a state in which radio waves are detected to a state in which no radio wave is detected. The monitoring state is maintained for the monitoring time. That is, the time during which the monitoring state is substantially continued is the sum of the time during which the radio wave detection sensor 353 detects the radio wave and the monitoring time. Thereafter, the measurement of the monitoring time ends at the timing of t4.

  In the above situation, since the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 has not occurred in the period during which the monitoring time is measured, that is, the period in the monitoring state, the notification for the first stage is performed. Although it is being executed, the game stop state is not set. Such a situation occurs when the radio wave detection sensor 353 detects radio waves due to noise or the like in the pachinko machine 10 or the game hall, even though the player is normally playing a game. obtain. In this case, since the game is not stopped, it is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game from being disadvantaged while alerting the manager of the game hall.

  On the other hand, a case where an illegal act using radio waves is performed will be described. First, detection of radio waves in the radio wave detection sensor 353 is started at timing t5. At this timing, the output of the first stage command and the measurement of the monitoring time are started as already described, but the game stop state is not set.

  Thereafter, during the period in which the monitoring time is being measured, that is, at the timing of t6 during the monitoring state, a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs. In this case, first, a second stage command is output at the timing of t6, and notification for the second stage of radio wave detection is started. In addition, with respect to the processing time of the timer interruption process at the timing of t6, the game stop state is set at the timing of t7 when the next processing time is started, and the progress of the game becomes impossible. At this time, the measurement of the monitoring time is ended.

  Even if the radio wave detection sensor 353 detects the radio wave as described above, the upper operating port 33 or the measurement time of the monitoring time that is started in association with the detection is not immediately set to the game stop state. By setting the game stop state in response to the winning of the lower operating port 34, an illegal radio wave is output without causing any disadvantage to the legitimate player as described above. If an act of erroneously detecting a winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 is performed, it is possible to stop the progress of the game thereafter.

  In particular, fraudulent acts utilizing radio waves are performed for the purpose of causing false detection of winnings in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. It is easy to determine that a winning has occurred in the operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. On the other hand, in a situation where a game is being played regularly, there is a low possibility that detection of radio waves and winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 will occur at the same time. Under such circumstances, by detecting the radio wave and setting the game stop state on condition that a winning is made to the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34, the radio wave is transmitted so that the fraudulent person can cheat. If it occurs, it can be dealt with through the setting to the game stop state, and the possibility that the game stop state will be set when radio waves are generated in the state where the game is being played is reduced. The

  In addition, the monitoring state set when the radio wave detection sensor 353 detects the radio wave is not limited to the period in which the radio wave detection sensor 353 detects the radio wave, but the monitoring time has elapsed after the elapse of that period. Continue until Thereby, even if a predetermined time lag has occurred before it is determined that a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 has occurred in the main MPU 202 after stopping the output of unauthorized radio waves, It becomes possible to deal with such fraud.

  Further, in the configuration in which the game stop state is not set only by detecting a radio wave as described above, when a radio wave is detected, a notification is made. As a result, when radio waves are detected, it is possible to prompt the game hall administrator to deal with it by first giving a notification. In addition, by first executing a mild procedure of performing notification and then executing a severe procedure of stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to take steps to deal with the generation of radio waves in a step-by-step manner. It is possible to appropriately deal with the occurrence, and to reduce the influence on the regular player by the configuration for taking such a countermeasure.

  In order to make it difficult to set the game stop state through the detection of radio waves in the pachinko machine 10 of the player who is playing a game, for example, the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 in the monitoring state. When the winning is continuously generated over the reference number set as a plurality of times, or the winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 during the monitoring state is set as a period longer than at least the monitoring period. The game stop state may be set when the reference number set as a plurality of times is generated during the predetermined period.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the setting to a game stop state is performed when the period which has detected the radio wave continuously or intermittently exceeds a predetermined reference period.

<Launch control process>
Next, the firing control process executed in step S6214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described.

  In the launch control process, a game ball is fired to the power supply and launch control device 98 on the condition that the HI level condition fulfillment signal is received from the transmission circuit 376 that fulfills the condition in the power source and launch control device 98. This is a process for permitting.

  In the launch control process, first, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not the condition has been satisfied. The condition-satisfied received state is a state in which the main MPU 202 has already identified that the HI level condition-satisfying signal has been received, and the condition-satisfied received flag in the main RAM 204 is “1”. Is set. If the condition has not been received yet, it is determined in step S7102 whether the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level.

  Incidentally, the condition satisfaction signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 202 when the signal is set as an input target to the main MPU 202 by the driver IC. In step S7102, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether or not the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7102, the firing control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, in step S7103, the condition satisfaction received flag is set in the main RAM 204 by setting "1" in the condition satisfaction received flag.

  In a succeeding step S7104, a delay time lottery process is executed. In the delay time lottery process, when reception of the HI level condition establishment signal is started in the main MPU 202, the timing for starting transmission of the HI level launch permission signal is determined by lottery. is there.

  Specifically, the main RAM 204 is provided with a delay lottery counter that is updated so that 1 is added each time the timer interrupt process is started. In step S7104, first, the current numerical information of the counter is provided. Is read. The read numerical information is collated with a delay lottery table provided in the main ROM 203, and the numerical information of the delay time corresponding to the numerical information is read.

  By the way, in this embodiment, the delay time is 0 sec, 0.6 sec which is a firing cycle when game balls are continuously fired, a time twice as long as the launch cycle, and 3 times the launch cycle. A plurality of types of delay times are set, such as double the time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one type having a delay time longer than 0 sec is set. In step S7104, a lottery for determining whether to set the delay time may be executed. Good.

  The delay time may be set longer than the above time. However, when the big prize opening 32a is opened at a high frequency time, the player who knows that the opening has been started has started the operation of the firing handle 54 at that timing, but the big prize opening 32a has been opened. In order to prevent the large winning opening 32a from being closed without generating a prize, it is preferable that the delay time is set to be shorter than the high frequency time. More preferably, the delay time is set so that a high-frequency number of winnings can occur even when the operation of the firing handle 54 is started at the timing when the opening of the big winning opening 32a is started by the high-frequency time. It should be set. Further, the delay time may not be set during the opening / closing execution mode or when the special winning opening 32a is opened.

  In the subsequent step S7105, numerical information corresponding to the result of the lottery process in step S7104 is set in a firing start timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC4) provided in the main RAM 204. Then, this launch control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S7101 that the condition has been satisfied, it is determined in step S7106 whether the condition satisfaction signal is at the HI level. If the condition establishment signal is at the HI level, it is determined in step S7107 whether or not the emission is permitted. The firing permitted state means a state in which a HI level firing permission signal has already been output, and is a state in which “1” is set in the firing permitted flag in the main RAM 204. If it is in the firing permitted state, an affirmative determination is made in step S7107, and the present firing control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is not in the firing permitted state, a negative determination is made in step S7107, and the process proceeds to step S7108. In step S7108, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the firing start timer counter in the main RAM 204 is “0”. If it is “0”, the main firing control process is terminated as it is. If it is not “0”, the processing of step S7109 to step S7111 is executed.

  In step S7109, the firing permitted flag is set to “1” in the main side RAM 204 to set the firing permitted state. In subsequent step S7110, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the HI level. As a result, the power supply and launch control device 98 is allowed to launch a game ball. Thereafter, in step S7111, the launch permission command is set as an output target, and then the launch control process is terminated.

  The launch permission command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82 as the sub-side control device to recognize that the main-side MPU 202 has newly permitted the launch of the game ball.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the sound lamp control device 82 determines whether or not the launch permission command is received in step S6911. If the launch permission command is received, the launching command is launched in step S6912. Set the sound emission pattern for permission. Specifically, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the launch permission to be performed through the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and the launch permission is set according to the read data table. Corresponding notification is performed by the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

  Note that the control of the notification has priority over control for effects described later. However, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal prizes, control for notification for the first stage relating to radio wave detection, control for notification for the second stage, and the detection sensors 31a to 35b for prizes described later. In relation to the control of notification for occurrence of disconnection, the control of notification for occurrence of short circuit described later, and the control of notification for occurrence of disconnection on the payout side described later, notification corresponding to launch permission is not prioritized. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In a succeeding step S6913, a command for permission of firing corresponding to reception of the permission command of firing is transmitted to the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, a data table for allowing notification corresponding to the launch permission to be performed through the symbol display device 41 is read from the ROM of the display control device 212, and the notification corresponding to the launch permission is performed according to the read data table. This is performed by the display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the firing control process (FIG. 90), if a negative determination is made in step S7106, the condition is satisfied by clearing the received flag indicating that the condition is satisfied in the main RAM 204 in step S7112. Is released, and in step S7113, the emission permitted state is canceled by clearing the emission permitted flag in the main side RAM 204 to “0”. In subsequent step S7114, the output state of the firing permission signal is set to the LOW level. Then, this launch control process is terminated.

  As described above, the main MPU 202 can determine whether or not the launch solenoid 53a of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is being driven by executing the launch control process in the main MPU 202. Through this grasping, in the present embodiment, the sound lamp control device 82 which is the sub-side control device can be notified that the launching of the game ball is permitted at the timing when the launching of the game ball is permitted. By executing such notification, for example, when the player adjusts the timing of game ball firing by measuring the timing at which a winning is likely to occur, the pachinko machine 10 itself can notify that fact. It becomes possible, and in a game hall or the like where such an action is desired to be suppressed, the action can be stopped through the notification.

  Incidentally, the notification configuration as described above has an opening / closing door that opens and closes the entrance, and has an advantageous opening in the internal space that is opened to the gaming area through the entrance, and winning of the gaming ball to the advantageous entrance This is more effective when applied to a configuration in which a bonus such as a big hit state is given to a player. For example, when a predetermined opening / closing condition is satisfied, in the case where the opening / closing door is configured to be opened at a predetermined timing or a plurality of times at a predetermined cycle, a game ball is launched aiming at the timing when the opening / closing door is opened. Action is assumed. In this case, if such a hit is made, the game hall may receive an unforeseen disadvantage. Under such circumstances, the occurrence of the disadvantage can be suppressed by performing notification corresponding to the above-described launch permission.

  In addition, when reception of the HI level condition establishment signal is started, a delay time lottery is performed in step S7104, and after the delay time corresponding to the lottery result has elapsed, the launch permission signal is switched to the HI level. is there. Also from this point, the above-mentioned aiming can be suppressed. That is, even if the player operates the firing handle 54 at a predetermined timing to aim at a target, the timing at which the game ball is actually launched fluctuates irregularly. It is suppressed.

<Input status monitoring process>
Next, the input state monitoring process executed in step S6215 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described.

  In the input state monitoring process, based on the signal received from the winning IC 351, the main MPU 202 determines whether or not a disconnection or a short circuit has occurred in each winning detection sensor 31a-35b itself or in the middle of the electrical path. Execute the process for grasping.

  Here, the function of the winning IC 351 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91A is a block diagram for explaining a configuration related to the electrical connection between the big winning opening detection sensor 32e and the winning IC 351 among the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the mode of the signal input to IC 351 for winning. Of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, the sensors other than the big winning opening detection sensor 32e are the same as those in FIGS. 91 (a) and 91 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 91A, a voltage of 12 V is applied to the special winning opening detection sensor 32e through the electric path EL1 for input. The electrical path EL1 is connected to the power-on power supply unit 373 via the main control board 201. Further, the special winning opening detection sensor 32e is connected to the winning IC 351 through the output electric path EL2, and a voltage corresponding to the detection result in the special winning opening detection sensor 32e is applied to the winning IC 351. In this case, a plurality of resistors R1 and R2 are connected to the electrical path EL2 for output, and the voltage applied to the winning IC 351 by these resistors R1 and R2 is set to a predetermined value or less and supplied. The function of reducing the current to a predetermined value or less is fulfilled.

  An electrical signal as shown in FIG. 91 (b) is input to the winning IC 351 in accordance with whether or not a game ball has passed through the detection unit of the special winning opening detection sensor 32e. In FIG. 91 (b), a signal after shaping into a simple waveform is shown for easy understanding. In this case, a low level electric signal is input to the winning IC 351 when the game ball does not pass through the detection unit of the big prize opening detection sensor 32e, and a high level electric signal when the game ball passes through the detection unit. Is input to the winning IC 351. When such a LOW level or HI level signal is input, the winning IC 351 outputs a corresponding signal to the main MPU 202 as a winning signal.

  On the other hand, when a disconnection occurs in each of the electrical paths EL1, EL2 or inside the winning prize detection sensor 32e, the voltage input from the winning prize detection sensor 32e to the winning IC 351 is at the LOW level. Vmin (that is, 0 V), which is a lower voltage. In addition, when a short circuit occurs between the electric paths EL1 and EL2 or inside the sensor, Vmax, which is a voltage higher than the case where the voltage input to the winning IC 351 from the big winning opening detection sensor 32e is at the HI level. It becomes.

  The winning IC 351 outputs a disconnection signal and a short-circuit signal to the main MPU 202 separately from the winning signal regarding the winning prize detection sensor 32e, and the voltage applied from the winning prize detection sensor 32e becomes Vmin. In this case, the disconnection signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level, and when the voltage applied from the special winning opening detection sensor 32e becomes Vmax, the short circuit signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. The main side MPU 202 recognizes that the disconnection or the short circuit has occurred in the special winning opening detection sensor 32e by confirming the switching to the HI level, and executes a process corresponding thereto.

  In the input state monitoring process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 92, first, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not a disconnection has occurred. The disconnection occurrence state means a state in which the main side MPU 202 has already identified that the HI level disconnection signal has already been received, and is a state in which “1” is set in the disconnection occurrence flag in the main side RAM 204. is there. If it is not a disconnection occurrence state, it is determined in step S7202 whether any disconnection signal is at the HI level.

  Incidentally, the disconnection signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 202 when the signal is set as an input target to the main MPU 202 by the driver IC. In step S7202, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether the disconnection signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7202, the process proceeds directly to step S7211. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7202, the disconnection occurrence state is set by setting "1" in the disconnection occurrence flag of the main RAM 204 in step S7203. In addition, it is good also as a structure set to a disconnection generation | occurrence | production state, when confirming that a disconnection signal is HI level in multiple times.

  In subsequent step S7204, the disconnection generation command is set as an output target. The disconnection occurrence command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82 which is the sub-side control device to recognize that the main-side MPU 202 has identified the occurrence of disconnection in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b. In this case, the main MPU 202 can identify the target winning detection sensors 31a to 35b whose disconnection signal is at the HI level, and the disconnection occurrence command includes the sensor of the target sensor. Contains type information. Incidentally, when disconnection occurs in the plurality of winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, types of information about all of the plurality of winning detection sensors 31a to 35b are included.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the sound lamp control device 82 determines whether or not a disconnection occurrence command is received as a notification system command in step S6901, and if a disconnection occurrence command is received, step S6902 Then, a notification process corresponding to the disconnection occurrence command is executed. Specifically, a data table for causing notification corresponding to the occurrence of disconnection to be performed through the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and the data table for disconnection generation is read according to the read data table. The notification is performed by the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64. Such a data table corresponds to 30 sec, but the time is arbitrary. In addition, the notification for occurrence of disconnection is performed in the same manner regardless of the type of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b that are the targets of occurrence of disconnection, but may be configured in a manner according to the type. .

  Note that the control of the notification has priority over the control for effects described later, the control for launching permission, and the control of notification for the first stage related to radio wave detection. In addition, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal prizes, control for notification for the second stage related to radio wave detection, control for notification for short circuit generation described later, and for generation of disconnection on the payout side described later When the notification control overlaps with the timing, the notification control with the timing overlap is sequentially executed. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In a succeeding step S6903, a disconnection command corresponding to reception of the disconnection occurrence command is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 grasps the fact that the disconnection has occurred from the command and the types of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b that are the targets of the disconnection, and notifies the occurrence of the disconnection corresponding to the type through the symbol display device 41. A data table to be executed is read from the ROM of the display control device 212, and the symbol display device 41 is notified of the occurrence of disconnection according to the read data table.

  Returning to the description of the input state monitoring process (FIG. 92), after executing the process of step S7204, the process proceeds to step S7205. In step S7205, numerical information corresponding to the notification cycle time (eg, 1000 msec) is set in the disconnection notification timer counter (8-bit timer counter TC6) provided in the main RAM 204. In this embodiment, in a situation where the disconnection occurrence state continues, the disconnection occurrence command is periodically transmitted so that the corresponding notification is continued, and the disconnection notification timer counter Is used by the main MPU 202 to specify the timing for periodically transmitting the disconnection occurrence command. Thereafter, in step S7206, an external output start process for disconnection detection is executed in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the disconnection has occurred, and then the process proceeds to step S7211.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7201 that the disconnection occurrence state has already been set, it is determined in step S7207 whether any disconnection signal is at the HI level. If it is at the HI level, it is determined in step S7208 whether or not the disconnection notification timer counter is "0". If it is not “0”, the process advances to step S7211. On the other hand, if it is “0”, the process advances to step S7204. Thereby, when the disconnection occurrence state continues, the disconnection occurrence command can be transmitted periodically.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7207, the disconnection occurrence state is canceled by clearing the disconnection occurrence flag in the main RAM 204 in step S7209. In step S7210, an external output canceling process for disconnection detection is executed to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the disconnection occurrence state has been cancelled. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7211.

  In step S7211, it is determined whether or not a short circuit has occurred. The short circuit occurrence state means a state in which the main side MPU 202 has already identified that the HI level short circuit signal has already been received, and is a state in which “1” is set in the short circuit occurrence flag in the main side RAM 204. is there. If it is not a short-circuit occurrence state, it is determined in step S7212 whether any one of the short-circuit signals is at the HI level.

  Incidentally, the short circuit signal is input to the input port 92a of the main MPU 202 when the driver IC sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 202. In step S7212, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether or not the short circuit signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7212, the process directly proceeds to step S7221. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7212, a short-circuit occurrence state is set by setting “1” in the short-circuit occurrence flag of the main RAM 204 in step S7213. In addition, it is good also as a structure set to a short circuit occurrence state, when confirming that a short circuit signal is HI level in multiple times.

  In the subsequent step S7214, the short-circuit occurrence command is set as an output target. The short-circuit occurrence command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the main-side MPU 202 has identified the occurrence of a short-circuit in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b. In this case, the main MPU 202 can identify the target winning detection sensors 31a to 35b whose short-circuit signal is at the HI level, and the short-circuit occurrence command includes the sensor of the target. Contains type information. Incidentally, when a short circuit occurs in the plurality of winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, information of types of all of the plurality of winning detection sensors 31a to 35b is included.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the audio lamp control device 82 determines whether or not a short-circuit occurrence command is received as a notification-type command in step S6901, and if a short-circuit occurrence command is received, step S6902 Then, a notification process corresponding to the short-circuit occurrence command is executed. Specifically, a data table for causing notification corresponding to the occurrence of the short circuit to be performed through the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and the data table for generating the short circuit is read according to the read data table. The notification is performed by the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64. Such a data table corresponds to 30 sec, but the time is arbitrary. Moreover, although the notification for the occurrence of the short circuit is performed in the same manner regardless of the type of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b that are the targets of the occurrence of the short circuit, the notification may be performed in a mode according to the type. .

  Note that the control of the notification has priority over the control for effects described later, the control for launching permission, and the control of notification for the first stage related to radio wave detection. In addition, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal winning, control for notification for second stage related to radio wave detection, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a to 35b for winning, and later In the case where the timing and the notification control for occurrence of disconnection on the payout side overlap, the control of each notification in which the timing overlaps is sequentially executed. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In the subsequent step S6903, a short-circuit command corresponding to reception of the short-circuit occurrence command is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 grasps the fact that a short circuit has occurred from the command and the types of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b that are the targets of the short circuit, and notifies the occurrence of a short circuit corresponding to the types through the symbol display device 41. A data table to be performed is read from the ROM of the display control device 212, and the symbol display device 41 is notified of the occurrence of a short circuit according to the read data table.

  Returning to the description of the input state monitoring process (FIG. 92), after executing the process of step S7214, the process proceeds to step S7215. In step S7215, numerical information corresponding to a notification cycle time (eg, 1000 msec) is set in a short-circuit notification timer counter (8-bit timer counter TC7) provided in the main RAM 204. In the present embodiment, in order to continue the notification corresponding to the situation where the short-circuit occurrence state continues, the short-circuit occurrence command is periodically transmitted. Is used by the main MPU 202 to specify the timing for periodically transmitting the short-circuit occurrence command. Thereafter, in step S7216, an external output start process for short circuit detection is executed in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that a short circuit has occurred, and then the process proceeds to step S7221.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7211 that the short-circuit occurrence state has already been set, it is determined in step S7217 whether any one of the short-circuit signals is at the HI level. If it is at the HI level, it is determined in step S7218 whether or not the short-circuit notification timer counter is “0”. If it is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S7221. On the other hand, if it is “0”, the process advances to step S7214. Thereby, when the short circuit occurrence state continues, the short circuit occurrence command can be transmitted periodically.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7217, the short-circuit occurrence state is canceled by clearing the short-circuit occurrence flag of the main RAM 204 in step S7219. In step S7220, an external output canceling process for detecting a short circuit is executed to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the short-circuit occurrence state has been cancelled. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S7221.

  In step S7221, other processing is executed. In other processes, it is ascertained whether or not the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are being opened. If the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are being opened, a notification to that effect is given by the display lamp unit 63, the speaker unit 64, and the symbol display device 41. A command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 which is a sub-side control device so that the command is executed by at least one of After executing the process of step S7221, the input state monitoring process ends.

  As described above, when the input state monitoring process is executed, when a disconnection or a short circuit occurs in the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b, a notification thereof is executed. This prevents a state in which a disconnection or a short circuit has occurred from being left unattended.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure by which the process of step S7201-step S7220 is separately performed with respect to each winning detection sensor 31a-35b. Further, the winning IC 351 is not provided, and the processing in steps S7201 to S7220 may not be executed.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S6216 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 is generated, a process for acquiring the holding information is executed and when the holding information is stored, the holding is performed. A determination is made as to whether or not the information is correct, and further, a process for performing an effect for game times is executed using the determination as to whether or not the information is correct. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Now, in the special figure special electric control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 93, first, in step S7301, the holding information acquisition process is executed. Here, the hold information acquisition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the upper operation opening winning flag. If “1” is not set, the process proceeds to step S7407 without executing the processes in steps S7402 to S7406. If “1” is set in the upper operation opening winning flag, the process advances to step S7402.

  In step S7402, the upper operation opening winning flag is cleared. In the following step S7403, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read, and the start reserved memory number N reserved and stored in the reserved area RE is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “4 ]) Or less. If the start pending storage number N is equal to or greater than the upper limit value, the process directly proceeds to step S7407. If the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the process advances to step S7404 to increment the start pending storage number N by one.

  In the subsequent step S7405, the respective values (each numerical information) of the current jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first reserved area among the free reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, In step S7404, the number is stored in the reserved area corresponding to the number of reserved memories added by one.

  In subsequent step S7406, in order to make the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub-side, recognize that the winning to the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34 has occurred, Execute the setting process at the time of acquisition, which is a necessary process. The contents of this process are the same as step S2906 in the eighth embodiment.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7401, a negative determination is made in step S7403, or after the processing of step S7406 is executed, whether or not “1” is set in the lower operation opening prize flag in step S7407. Determine whether. If “1” is not set, the main winning process is terminated. If “1” is set, the process from step S7403 to step S7406 is executed after clearing the lower operation opening winning flag in step S7408. In this case, a negative determination is made in the process of step S7407 after the processes of steps S7403 to S7406, thereby terminating the main winning process.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 93), after executing the hold information acquisition process in step S7301, the process proceeds to step S7302. In step S7302, a process of reading information on a special figure special electricity counter provided in the main RAM 204 is executed. In a succeeding step S7303, processing for reading the special figure special power address table from the main ROM 203 is executed. In step S7304, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter from the special figure special electric address table is executed.

  Here, processing contents of steps S7302 to S7304 will be described.

  As already described, the special figure special electric control process includes a process related to a game-playing effect and a process related to an opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as a process related to the effect for game times, a special figure change start process that is a process for starting the effect for game times and a process for changing the effect for the game times are processed. A middle process and a special figure finalizing process which is a process for ending the effect for game times are set. In addition, as a process related to the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process which is a process for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and a special electricity opening process which is a process for controlling the open state of the special winning opening 32a The special electricity closing process, which is a process for controlling the closed state of the special winning opening 32a, and the special electricity termination, which is a process for controlling the ending of the opening / closing execution mode and the transition of the gaming state at the end of the opening / closing execution mode Processing is set.

  In such a processing configuration, the special figure special power counter is a counter for the main side MPU 202 to grasp which of the above-mentioned plural types of processing should be executed. Corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, the start address in the program for executing the above-mentioned plural types of processing is set.

  The special figure special power address table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 95. The special figure special power counter can set numerical information of “0” to “6”. Start address information ("SA0" to "SA6") is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical value information of the counter. In this case, the start address SA0 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation start process, and the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure variation process, and the start address SA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the special figure determining process, the start address SA3 is the program start address for executing the special electricity start process, and the start address SA4 is executing the special electricity release process The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power closing process, and the start address SA6 is the start address of the program for executing the special electric power end process. .

  The special figure special electric power counter is the special figure special electric power control in the next processing time when the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied when the processing corresponding to the numerical information currently stored is completed. Corresponding to the processing executed in the processing, 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared (initialized). Therefore, in the special figure special power control process at each processing time, a process corresponding to the numerical information set in the special figure special electric power counter may be executed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible for the main MPU 202 to grasp which process is to be executed as the special figure special power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. For example, an effect for game times starts when no other game times effect is executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode. In the process related to the effect, before starting the effect for the game turn, whether or not the flag indicating that the effect for the game turn is being executed is set, and the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. It is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that is set. In addition, during the execution of the game-turn effect, a flag indicating that the flag indicating that the game-turn effect is being executed is set and a confirmation display is set. It is necessary to check whether or not

  In addition, the opening / closing execution mode is started when the effect for the game round is finished and the other opening / closing execution modes are not executed. In the process, before starting the opening / closing execution mode, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the effect for playing the game has ended is set, and a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not it is being performed. Further, when the opening is being performed, it is necessary to confirm whether or not a flag indicating that the opening is being performed is set. In addition, after the opening, it is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed is set, and whether or not a flag indicating that the special winning opening 32a is being opened is set. It is necessary to confirm whether or not. Furthermore, when the ending is in progress, it is necessary to check whether or not a flag indicating that the ending is in progress is set.

  On the other hand, if a special figure special electricity counter is used, it is not necessary to prepare various flags, and information for checking the execution timing of each process is also collected. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  Below, using the special figure special electricity counter and special figure special electricity address table, special figure fluctuation start processing, special figure fluctuation processing, special figure confirmation processing, special electricity start processing, special electricity opening processing, special electricity closing processing, and A processing configuration for executing the special electricity ending process will be described, and a processing configuration of each processing will be specifically described.

  After executing the process of step S7304, a zero flag setting process is executed in step S7305. In the zero flag setting process, the numerical information of the special figure special power timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC1) is read, and when the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, it is provided in the register of the main MPU 202. The process of setting “1” to the zero flag is executed. The special figure special power timer counter is a counter that is used for the main MPU 202 to specify the update timing of the special figure special electric counter according to the passage of time.

  In the subsequent step S7306, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S7304 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is SA0, the process jumps to the special figure change start process in step S7307. If the acquired start address is SA1, the process jumps to the special figure change process in step S7308. If the acquired start address is SA2, the process jumps to the special figure determining process in step S7309, and if the acquired start address is SA3, the process jumps to the special electricity start process in step S7310. If it is SA4, the process jumps to the special power open process in step S7311. If the acquired start address is SA5, the process jumps to the special power close process in step S7312. If the acquired start address is SA6. The process jumps to the special electricity ending process in step S7313. When the processes in steps S7307 to S7313 are executed, the special figure special power control process is terminated.

  Hereinafter, the process of step S7307-step S7313 is demonstrated separately.

  First, the special figure variation start process of step S7307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S7501, it is determined whether the hold number N is 1 or more. If the number of holds N is “0”, the special figure variation start process is terminated as it is. If the hold number N is 1 or more, data setting processing is executed in step S7502.

  In the data setting process, first, the hold number N is decremented by 1, and the data (that is, hold information) stored in the first hold area RE1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each of the hold areas RE1 to RE4 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second reservation. Data in each area is shifted, such as area RE2 → first reservation area RE1, third reservation area RE3 → second reservation area RE2, and fourth reservation area RE4 → third reservation area RE3. At this time, a shift command for causing the voice lamp control device 82 to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted may be set as an output target and transmitted.

  In a succeeding step S7503, the validity determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table provided in the main ROM 203, the information for the success / failure determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 It is determined whether or not the numerical information matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information related to the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the low probability mode determination table provided in the main ROM 203. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot value information.

  In the subsequent step S7504, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S7503 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the type determination process is executed in step S7505. In the type determination process, information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table provided in the main ROM 203, it is specified which jackpot result corresponds to the numerical information relating to the above-obtained jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, which jackpot result corresponds to the low winning jackpot result, the low winning / high winning jackpot result, or the most advantageous jackpot result is specified.

  In the subsequent step S7506, stop result setting processing for jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the information of the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game round related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the main ROM 203 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 204. In the jackpot result stop result table, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is set differently for each type of jackpot result.

  In the subsequent step S7507, a flag setting process corresponding to the type determination result is executed. Specifically, the main RAM 204 is provided with a flag corresponding to each type of jackpot result. In step S7507, among the flags corresponding to each type of jackpot result, the type determination result of step S7505 is handled. “1” is set for the flag.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7504 that the result is not a jackpot winning result, a stop result setting process for a losing result is executed in step S7508. Specifically, the information of the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 in the game round related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in the main ROM 203 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 204. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  After executing one of the processes in step S7507 and step S7508, in step S7509, a process for grasping the display duration (display duration) is executed. In such processing, numerical value information of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 41 in the current game round. Specifically, it is determined that the reach display is generated when the game times related to the start of the current variation is the most advantageous big hit result or the low probability big hit result. If the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is not the result of any jackpot, but is numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that reach display occurs, display duration information corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is acquired with reference to the reach generation display duration table stored in the main ROM 203. . On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the display duration time corresponding to the numerical information of the current variation type counter CS is referred to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the main ROM 203. Get information. Incidentally, the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach non-occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration that can be acquired with reference to the reach occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display duration information when no reach occurs is set so that the display duration is shorter as the number N of holds is larger. In the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach mode is selected so that a shorter display duration is selected compared to the case where the number of the hold information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation display duration table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display duration may not be changed according to the number of holds N and the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above-described configuration may be applied to the display continuation time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, a display duration table may be individually set for each of the case of outreach and the case of a non-reach outbreak result. In this case, the display duration time is allocated according to each game result.

  In subsequent step S7510, the information on the display continuation time acquired in step S7509 is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. The update of the numerical information set in the timer counter is executed by the timer update process (FIG. 84) already described. By the way, as the effects for the game times, the variation display of the symbols on the main display unit 43 and the variation display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are performed, but when these variation displays are ended, In a state in which the stop result is displayed (in the symbol display device 41, a state in which a predetermined symbol combination is waited on the active line), the symbol is finally displayed (final stop display) over a fixed time (final stop time). In this case, the display continuation time acquired in step S7509 is a time obtained by subtracting the fixed time from the total time for one game. In this respect, the display continuation time can be rephrased as a time before confirmation (time before final stop).

  In a succeeding step S7511, the change command and the type command are set as output targets. The change command includes display duration information. Here, the display duration obtained by referring to the display non-occurrence display duration table as described above is different from the display duration obtained by referring to the display occurrence time table for reach occurrence. Even if the information on the presence / absence of reach has not been included in the command, the audio lamp control device 82 as the sub-side control device can specify the presence / absence of reach from the display duration information. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information that directly indicates whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes information on the low probability big hit result, information on the low winning high hit big hit result, and information on the most advantageous big hit result as game result information. The change command and the type command set as the output targets in step S7511 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 which is a sub-side control device.

  In the sound lamp control device 82, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, it is determined in step S6914 whether or not the variation command and the type command are received as the production commands, and the variation command and the type command are received. If YES in step S6915, a process for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the change command and the type command is executed in step S6915. Specifically, a data table for causing the presentation corresponding to the current game time to be performed through the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and the game is played according to the read data table. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 perform a rendition effect. Such a data table corresponds to the display duration of the current game time.

  In the subsequent step S6916, an effect command corresponding to the current variation command and type command is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 grasps the type of the effect for the current game round from the command, and displays a data table for the display effect corresponding to the type through the symbol display device 41. The design is read from the ROM, and the game display effect is performed by the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the read data table.

  Returning to the description of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 96), after the process of step S7511 is executed, the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 is started in step S7512. In a succeeding step S7513, a process waiting update process is executed. In the update process, the same processes as in steps S3106 to S3109 in the eighth embodiment are executed.

  Thereafter, in step S7514, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by one. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”. Therefore, when the process of step S7514 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “1”. " Thereafter, the special figure variation start process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure changing process of step S7308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S7601, it is determined whether or not the display continuation time in the current game round effect has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 202. To do. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 93), in step S7305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “1” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the display duration time in the current game round effect is It means that it has passed. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, the process proceeds to step S7602.

  In step S7602, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the main display unit 43 or not. If it is not the update timing, the special figure changing process is terminated as it is. If it is the update timing, update content read processing is executed in step S7603. Such update contents are stored in the main ROM 203 as an update data table. In step S7603, the update contents corresponding to the update timing are read from the data table.

  In the subsequent step S7604, the update content read in step S7603 is set for updating the main display unit 43. Incidentally, the process for actually updating the display content of the main display unit 43 is executed in the display control process of step S6218 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76). Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, a confirmation command (final stop display command) is set as an output target in step S7605. The confirmation command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that it is the timing to start the confirmation display for the current game round effect.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the sound lamp control device 82 determines whether or not a confirmation command is received as a production command in step S6914. If the confirmation command is received, the process proceeds to step S6915. Then, a process for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the confirmation command is executed. Specifically, a data table for performing an effect corresponding to the confirmation display through the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and for the confirmation display according to the read data table. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 perform this effect. Such a data table corresponds to a fixed time.

  In a succeeding step S6916, an effect command corresponding to the confirmation command is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 reads a data table from the command so that the confirmation display is performed through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 212, and in the present game round effect according to the read data table. Display the stop result.

  Returning to the description of the special figure changing process (FIG. 97), after executing the process of step S7605, the process proceeds to step S7606. In step S7606, a stop result reading process is executed. In the reading process, information on the pattern mode to be stopped and displayed set in the main RAM 204 in step S7506 or step S7508 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 96) at the start of the current game round is read. In subsequent step S7607, the read pattern information is set for updating the main display unit 43.

  In a succeeding step S7608, information on a fixed time (for example, 0.5 sec) stored in the main ROM 203 in advance is read, and the information on the fixed time is set in a special figure special electricity timer counter. In a succeeding step S7609, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by one. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation processing is executed is “1”. Therefore, when the process of step S7609 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “2”. " Thereafter, the special figure changing process is terminated.

  Next, the special figure finalizing process in step S7309 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S7701, it is determined whether or not the fixed time in the current game effect has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 202. . That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 93), in step S7305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “2” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the fixed time in the current game play effect has elapsed Means that If a negative determination is made in step S7701, the special figure finalizing process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7701, the process proceeds to step S7702. In step S7702, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in any of the flags corresponding to the jackpot result in the main RAM 204, so that the result of the hit determination that triggered the current game round is the jackpot result. It is determined whether or not (i.e., a result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7702, the opening command is set as an output target in step S7703. The opening command is a command for recognizing that it is time to start the effect for the opening / closing execution mode with respect to the sound lamp control device 82 which is the sub-side control device. Incidentally, the opening command also includes information on the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the sound lamp control device 82 determines whether or not an opening command is received as an effect command in step S6914. If the opening command is received, the process proceeds to step S6915. Then, a process for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the opening command is executed. Specifically, a data table for causing an effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode to be performed through the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and opening / closing is executed according to the read data table. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 perform a mode effect. Incidentally, the data table selected here differs according to the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  In a succeeding step S6916, an effect command corresponding to the opening command is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 reads a data table for performing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode from the command through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 212, and executes the current opening / closing execution according to the read data table. An effect for the mode is executed by the symbol display device 41. Incidentally, the data table selected here differs according to the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  Returning to the description of the special figure determination process (FIG. 98), after executing the process of step S7703, the process proceeds to step S7704. In step S7704, information on the opening time (for example, 4 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 203 is read, and the information on the opening time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. In a succeeding step S7705, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”. Therefore, when the process of step S7705 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is “3”. " Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7702, that is, if the result of the success / failure determination that triggered the current game is a losing result (that is, a result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode) The process proceeds to step S7706. In step S7706, the numerical value information of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the special figure finalizing process is terminated.

  Next, the special electricity start process of step S7310 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S7801, it is determined whether or not the opening time in the current opening / closing execution mode has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 202. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 93), in step S7305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the opening time in this opening / closing execution mode has elapsed. Means. If a negative determination is made in step S7801, the special electricity start process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7801, "15" is set in the round counter provided in the main RAM 204 in step S7802, and the winning counter provided in the main RAM 204 is set in step S7803. Set “9”. The round counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining round games in the open / close execution mode by the main MPU 202, and the winning counter indicates whether or not the upper limit number of game balls has been won in one round game. This is a counter for specifying in the main MPU 202.

  In a succeeding step S7804, a reading process of the first opening continuation time is executed. Specifically, by checking the flag of the main side RAM 204, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a low winning high-precision winning result, and the low winning high-precision winning result is determined. If not, information on the open duration corresponding to the long-time mode is read from the main ROM 203. On the other hand, in the case of a low winning high probability winning result, information on the opening duration corresponding to the short time mode is read from the main ROM 203. Then, in step S7805, the read release duration information is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter.

  In a succeeding step S7806, an opening setting process for opening the special winning opening 32a is executed. In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register related to the big winning opening 32 a in the main MPU 202. As a result, in the port output process of step S6209 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 76), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32c is started so as to switch the special winning opening 32a to the open state.

  In a succeeding step S7807, the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power start process is executed is “3”, when the process of step S7807 is executed, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4”. Become. Thereafter, the special electricity start process is terminated.

  Next, the special power open process in step S7311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S7901, it is determined whether or not the open duration time in the current round game has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 202. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 93), in step S7305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “4” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the open duration in the current round game has passed. Means.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S7901, the process proceeds to step S7902. In step S7902, 1 is subtracted from the round counter. In a succeeding step S7903, information on the closing time (for example, 1 sec) stored in the main ROM 203 in advance is read, and the information on the closing time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. In step S7904, a closing setting process for closing the special winning opening 32a is executed. In the closing setting process, “0” is set in the register related to the big winning opening 32a in the main MPU 202. As a result, in the port output process of step S6209 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 76), the output of the drive signal to the variable winning drive unit 32c is stopped so as to switch the special winning opening 32a to the closed state.

  In a succeeding step S7905, the special figure special electric power counter is incremented by one. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is “4”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter when the process of step S 7905 is executed is “5”. Become. Thereafter, the special electric power release opening process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7901, it is determined in step S7906 whether or not “1” is set in the big winning flag of the main RAM 204. If it is not set, the special electric power release opening process is terminated. If it has been set, the big prize flag is cleared to “0” in step S 7907 and the prize counter is decremented by 1 in step S 7908. Thereafter, in step S7909, it is determined whether or not the winning counter is “0”. If the winning counter is “0”, the processing in steps S7902 to S7905 is executed and then the special electric power release opening process is terminated. If it is not “0”, the special electric power release opening process is terminated.

  Next, the special electric power closing process in step S7312 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S8001, it is determined whether or not the round counter is “0”. If the round counter is not “0”, whether or not the closing time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 202 in step S8002 Determine whether or not. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 93), in step S7305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “5” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the closing time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S8002, the special electric power closing process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8002, "9" is set to the winning counter in step S8003. In a succeeding step S8004, a reading process of the opening continuation time is executed. Specifically, by executing the same processing as the processing in step S7804 of the special electricity start processing (FIG. 99), information on the opening duration corresponding to the long-time mode or information on the opening duration corresponding to the short-time mode. Is read. In step S8005, the read release duration information is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter.

  In a succeeding step S8006, an opening setting process is executed. The processing contents of the opening setting process are the same as the opening setting process of step S7806 in the special electricity start process (FIG. 99). In subsequent step S8007, 1 is subtracted from the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special electric power closing process is executed is “5”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “4” when the process of step S8007 is executed. It becomes. Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8001 that the round counter is “0”, the process proceeds to step S8008. In step S8008, the ending command is set as an output target. The ending command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the control device on the sub side, to recognize that it is the timing for starting the effect for ending. Incidentally, the ending command also includes information on the type of jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the audio lamp control device 82 determines whether or not an ending command is received as an effect command in step S6914. If the ending command is received, the process proceeds to step S6915. Then, a process for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the ending command is executed. Specifically, a data table for causing the presentation corresponding to the ending to be performed through the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and the ending effect is performed according to the read data table. Is performed by the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64. Incidentally, the data table selected here corresponds to the ending time.

  In a succeeding step S6916, an effect command corresponding to the ending command is transmitted to the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, a data table for causing the ending effect to be performed through the symbol display device 41 from the command is read from the ROM of the display control device 212, and the ending effect is displayed according to the read data table. It is executed by the display device 41. Incidentally, the data table selected here corresponds to the ending time.

  Returning to the description of the special electricity closing process (FIG. 101), after executing the process of step S8008, the process proceeds to step S8009. In step S8009, information on the ending time (for example, 6 sec) stored in advance in the main ROM 203 is read, and the information on the ending time is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. In subsequent step S8010, 1 is added to the special figure special electricity counter. In this case, since the numerical information of the special figure special power counter when the special figure closing process is executed is “5”, the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is “6” when the process of step S8010 is executed. " Thereafter, the special electric power closing process is terminated.

  Next, the special electricity ending process in step S7313 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S8101, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed by checking whether or not “1” is set in the zero flag provided in the register of the main MPU 202. That is, in the special figure special power control process (FIG. 93), in step S7305, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special electric timer counter is “0”, and if it is “0”, the zero flag is set. In order to set “1”, the situation in which the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “6” and the zero flag is set to “1” means that the ending time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S8101, the special electricity ending process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S8101, game state transition processing is executed in step S8102. In the game state transition process, the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode that has been completed this time is confirmed by referring to the flag of the main RAM 204, and the lottery mode corresponding to the confirmed type of jackpot result And set to support mode. Note that the flag indicating information corresponding to the type of jackpot result in the processing is cleared to “0”. In a succeeding step S8103, the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, the special electricity ending process is terminated.

  As described above, the special figure special power control process is executed using the special figure special electric counter, the special figure special electric address table, and the special figure special electric timer counter. When the main MPU 202 identifies the situation in a series of game flows, it is only necessary to refer to a special figure special power counter, and it is necessary to check a plurality of flags at each processing timing as in the past. There is no. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Further, in each process of step S7307 to step S7313, when the situation corresponding to the process ends, a process of updating the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter to the one corresponding to the subsequent situation is executed. Thereby, it is not necessary to separately provide a dedicated process for causing the transition to the next situation after the completion of the one situation, and the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In addition, “0”, which is the initial value of the special figure special electricity counter, corresponds to the first situation in a series of gaming situations composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode. This makes it possible to achieve the first situation in the series of gaming situations without specially setting the numerical information of the special figure special power counter after the initialization of the main RAM 204 or the like.

  In addition, when updating the special figure special power counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

  In addition, the process for obtaining the hold information that can occur in any of the above-described series of game situations is set separately from the processes in steps S7307 to S7313, see the special figure special electricity counter. Are not included in each process executed. Thereby, it is not necessary to follow the situation in which the setting of the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter occurs at the same time, and the processing configuration using the numerical information is simplified.

  Of the processes in steps S7307 to S7313, in a process in which a period is measured in order to determine an end condition of a corresponding situation, a period measurement unit called a special figure special electricity timer counter is used. Measurement is performed. Thereby, the storage capacity of the main RAM 204 can be reduced. In addition, since the situation corresponding to each process using the special figure special electric timer counter does not occur at the same time, even if the special figure special electric timer counter is used in common, the timer counter is simultaneously referred to in a plurality of situations. In other words, the processing configuration for using the special figure special electric timer counter is not complicated.

  Further, the process of updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is executed by a timer update process (FIG. 84) set as a process different from steps S7307 to S7313. As a result, the processing configuration can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the processing for updating the special figure special electricity timer counter is individually set for each processing in steps S7307 to S7313.

  Also, whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0” is confirmed collectively in step S7305 in the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 93). In each process from step S7308 to step S7313, The passage of each time is determined by checking the zero flag of the main MPU 202. Thereby, in each process of step S7308 to step S7313, compared with the case where the numerical information is read from the special figure special electricity timer counter of the main side RAM 204 and it is determined whether or not the numerical information is “0”. The processing configuration can be simplified.

  Here, the special power special figure counter is also referred to in order to confirm which state is in a series of games composed of the effects for game times and the opening / closing execution mode in processes other than the special figure special electric control processing. The As such other processing, there has already been the fraud detection processing (FIG. 85). In the fraud detection processing, in step S6709, it is confirmed whether or not the special figure special electricity counter is “4”. It is confirmed whether or not the big prize opening 32a is open. In addition to this, there is a demonstration display process executed in step S6219 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76).

<Demo display processing>
The demonstration display process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S8201, it is determined whether or not the special figure special electricity counter is "0". The case where the special figure special electricity counter is “0” means that the game round effect has not been executed and is not in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, in the configuration in which it is confirmed by the presence / absence of a flag that there is a game-playing effect as in the prior art, and the presence / absence of the flag is confirmed by the presence / absence of the flag, It is necessary to read the flag information from the main RAM 204 and check the information, and then read the other flag information from the main RAM 204 and check the information. Then, it is necessary to perform address designation to the main RAM 204 at least twice, and to perform data setting processing for the register when data is transferred to the main RAM 204 at least twice. On the other hand, by using the special figure special electricity counter, the address designation to the main RAM 204 is only required once, and further, the data setting process to the register when data is transferred is only once. . Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  If it is determined in step S8201 that the special figure special power counter is not "0", the demonstration display process is terminated, and if it is determined that the special figure special electric power counter is "0", The process proceeds to S8202. In step S8202, it is determined whether or not a demo display state is set.

  The demo display state means a state in which a demo display (that is, a standby display) has already been performed on the symbol display device 41, and “1” is set in the demo display flag of the main MPU 202. is there. In addition, the demo display is a predetermined demo waiting time (for example, after the ending of the previous opening / closing execution mode is ended after displaying the stop result of the previous game times and ending the final opening / closing execution mode) 0.1 sec), an image of the start waiting effect is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 perform an effect corresponding thereto. .

  By the way, in the demo display in the symbol display device 41, an image in which the symbol displayed on the active line performs a predetermined operation is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured such that a maker name, a model name, or a moving image with a predetermined character is displayed after or instead of displaying an image in which an operation is being performed.

  If it is determined in step S8202 that the display is in the demo display state, the present demo display process is terminated, and if it is determined that the display is not in the demo display state, the process proceeds to step S8203. In step S8203, it is determined whether or not a demonstration display wait state is set. The demonstration display waiting state means a state in which the measurement of the demonstration waiting time has already started, and is a state in which “1” is set in the demonstration waiting flag of the main MPU 202.

  If it is not in the demo display waiting state, the process proceeds to step S8204, where the demo wait time information stored in advance in the main ROM 203 is read, and the demo wait time information is set in the special figure special electricity timer counter. In the subsequent step S8205, the demonstration waiting flag of the main MPU 202 is set to “1”, thereby setting a demonstration display waiting state. Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8203 that the display is waiting for the demonstration display, it is determined in step S8206 whether or not the special figure special electricity timer counter is "0". When the special figure special electric timer counter is not “0”, the demonstration display process is terminated. In this case, the demo wait flag is cleared to “0” to cancel the demo display wait state.

  If the special figure special electricity timer counter is “0”, the demonstration display state is set by setting “1” to the demonstration display flag of the main MPU 202 in step S8207. At this time, the demo wait flag is cleared to “0” to cancel the demo display wait state. Further, the demonstration display state is canceled when the demonstration display flag is cleared to “0” when an effect for game times is newly started.

  In the subsequent step S8208, a demonstration start command is set as an output target. Thereafter, the demonstration display process is terminated.

  The demonstration start command is a command for recognizing that it is the timing to start the demonstration display for the audio lamp control device 82 which is the sub-side control device. In the sound lamp control device 82, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, it is determined in step S6914 whether or not a demonstration start command is received as a production command, and if a demonstration start command is received, step S6914 is performed. In S6915, a process for setting a production-type sound emission pattern corresponding to the demonstration start command is executed. Specifically, a data table for performing an effect corresponding to the demonstration display through the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and for demonstration display according to the read data table. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 perform this effect.

  In the subsequent step S6916, an effect-type command corresponding to the demonstration start command is transmitted to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 reads a data table for performing a demonstration display effect from the command through the symbol display device 41 from the ROM of the display control device 212, and performs a demonstration display effect according to the read data table. Is executed by the symbol display device 41.

<General-purpose power control processing>
Next, the ordinary power control process executed in step S6217 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described.

  In the ordinary map / electric power control process, when a winning to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring the retained information on the ordinary map side is executed and the retained information on the ordinary map side is stored. In addition, a release determination is performed on the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for a normal diagram is executed using the release determination as a trigger. Moreover, the process which opens and closes the electrically-driven accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 based on the result of opening determination is performed.

  In the ordinary power transmission control process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 104, first, in FIG. In the acquisition process, on the condition that “1” is set in the through flag of the main side RAM 204, the numerical value information of the electric accessory release counter C4 (that is, the hold information on the normal side) is used as the electric charge hold area 94c. Execute the process stored in. However, the hold information on the normal map side is acquired within the upper limit value of the hold.

  In a succeeding step S8302, a process of reading information of a general power counter provided in the main RAM 204 is executed. In a succeeding step S8303, a process of reading the ordinary power / general telephone address table from the main ROM 203 is executed. In step S8304, a process of acquiring a start address corresponding to the information of the general-purpose / general power counter from the general-purpose / electric power address table is executed.

  Here, processing contents of steps S8302 to S8304 will be described.

  As already described, the ordinary map / electric power control process includes a process related to the effect for the ordinary figure and a process related to the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a. In this case, as a process related to the effect for the normal map, a normal map change start process, a normal map change process, and a normal map determining process are set. In addition, as a process related to the opening / closing of the electric accessory 34a, a process during opening of the ordinary power and a process during closing of the ordinary power are set.

  In such a processing configuration, the general-purpose ordinary power counter is a counter for the main MPU 202 to grasp which of the above-mentioned types of processing should be executed. Is set with a start address in a program for executing the above-described plural types of processing in correspondence with the numerical information of the ordinary power counter.

  It is possible to set numerical information of "0" to "4" for the general-purpose power counter, and the general-purpose power-address table starts with one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information of the general-purpose power counter. Address information ("NSA0" to "NSA4") is set. In this case, the start address NSA0 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change start process, the start address NSA1 is the start address of the program for executing the normal change change process, and the start address NSA2 Is the start address of the program for executing the processing during normalization, the start address NSA3 is the start address of the program for executing the processing during open power, and the start address NSA4 is closed This is the start address of the program for executing the process.

  When the processing corresponding to the currently stored numerical information is finished, the general-purpose public power counter is triggered by the fact that the condition for updating the numerical information is satisfied. 1 addition, 1 subtraction, or “0” is cleared corresponding to the process executed in the electric control process. Therefore, in the ordinary power / general power control processing at each processing time, it is only necessary to execute processing according to the numerical information set in the common power / electric power counter.

  According to the above configuration, as in the case of special figure special power control, the main MPU 202 can determine which process is to be executed as general-purpose special power control without checking the presence or absence of various flags. It becomes possible to grasp. Therefore, the process can be simplified.

  The following is the process for starting the normal map change, the process for changing the normal map, the process for confirming the normal map, the process for opening the power grid, and the process for closing the power grid using the general map / general counter and the general map / general address table. A processing configuration for execution will be described.

  After executing the processing in step S8304, in step S8305, the zero flag setting processing on the normal side is executed. In the setting process of the zero flag on the ordinary map side, the numerical information of the ordinary figure electric power timer counter (16-bit timer counter TC2) is read, and when the numerical information of the ordinary figure electric power timer counter is “0”, the main side A process of setting “1” to the zero flag on the normal side provided in the register of the MPU 202 is executed. The general-purpose normal power timer counter is a counter that is used by the main MPU 202 to specify the update timing of the general-purpose normal power counter according to the passage of time.

  In the subsequent step S8306, a process of jumping (shifting) to the process indicated by the start address acquired in step S8304 is executed. Specifically, if the acquired start address is NSA0, the process jumps to the common figure change start process in step S8307, and if the acquired start address is NSA1, the process jumps to the normal figure change process in step S8308. If the acquired start address is NSA2, the process jumps to the processing for determining the normal map in step S8309. If the acquired start address is NSA3, the process jumps to the process for releasing the general power in step S8310 to acquire the acquired start. If the address is NSA4, the process jumps to the processing during power transmission closing in step S8311.

  In the normal change start process of step S8307, on the condition that the hold information on the general map side is stored, the open information of the electric accessory 34a is determined using the hold information on the general map side, The processing for starting the display of the variation of the picture on the display unit 44 is executed. In this case, when information on the display continuation time in which the display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is displayed in a variable manner is set in the general-purpose ordinary power timer counter, and the display of the change of the pattern on the display unit for accessory 44 is started. The normal power counter is updated from “0” to “1”.

  In the process of changing the normal map in step S8308, a process for updating the display on the accessory display unit 44 is executed. In this case, on the condition that the display continuation time has elapsed, the fixed time information is set in the normal-use ordinary power timer counter, and the ordinary-number ordinary power counter is updated from “1” to “2”.

  In the process for confirming the opening of the map in step S8309, a process for displaying the result of the current release determination on the display part 44 for an accessory over the determined time on the general map side is executed, and the result of the release determination is the winning result. In the case of, the process for setting the number of times of opening in the case of opening the electric combination 34a when the electric combination 34a is opened using the process for setting the electric combination 34a in the open state and the current winning result as a trigger is executed. In this case, on the condition that confirmation of the fixed time on the normal figure side has been confirmed and the result of the release determination is a winning result, the information on the current opening duration in the electric accessory 34a is displayed as In addition, the electric accessory 34a is opened, and the ordinary power counter is updated from “2” to “3”. On the other hand, if the result of the release determination is not the winning result after confirming the elapse of the fixed time on the normal map side, the setting for setting the electric accessory 34a to the open state is not performed and A process of clearing “0” is executed.

  In the normal power open process of step S8310, a process for maintaining the open state of the electric accessory 34a and closing the electric accessory 34a when the closing timing is reached is executed. In this case, on the condition that the elapse of the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is confirmed, the information on the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a is set in the normal power timer counter and the electric accessory 34a is closed. In addition, the normal power counter is updated from “3” to “4”.

  In the process of closing the electric utility in step S8311, when it is necessary to maintain the closed state of the electric accessory 34a and to make the electric accessory 34a open again, the process for making the electric accessory 34a open. Execute. In this case, on the condition that it has been confirmed that the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a has elapsed and that it is necessary to reopen the electric accessory 34a, information on the current opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is generally available. In addition to being set in the figure ordinary power timer counter, the electric accessory 34a is opened, and the ordinary figure ordinary electricity counter is updated from “4” to “3”. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the electric appliance 34a has been closed for a while, but it is not necessary to open the electric appliance 34a again, the setting for making the electric appliance 34a open is not performed. The process of clearing the figure ordinary power counter to “0” is executed.

  If any one of steps S8307 to S8311 is executed, the ordinary power transmission control process is terminated.

  As described above, the general map power control process is executed using the general map general power counter, the general map general power address table, and the general map general power timer counter, so that When the main MPU 202 specifies the situation in a series of game flows composed of opening and closing of the object 34a, it is only necessary to refer to a general power counter, and a plurality of flags are set as in the past. There is no need to check each processing timing. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  In addition, when updating the ordinary power counter, any one of 1 subtraction, 1 addition, and “0” clear may be performed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified. In addition, as with the zero flag in the case of the special figure special electric control process, the zero flag on the normal figure side is used, so that the processing configuration can be simplified.

<Payout status reception processing>
Next, the payout state reception process executed in step S6220 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as already described, the power from the power interruption and power supply unit 374 of the launch control device 98 is supplied to the main RAM 204, but not supplied to the payout RAM 364. With this configuration, the capacity of the power supply unit 374 for power interruption can be reduced, and accordingly, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  However, in this configuration, when the power supply from the external power source to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, all the information stored in the payout side RAM 364 is erased (destroyed). In this case, if all the information on the number of unpaid prize balls is stored in the payout-side RAM 364 as in a conventional pachinko machine, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 can be performed in a situation where there are unpaid prize balls. When stopped, all the unpaid prize balls are erased without being paid out. If it does so, it will cause a great disadvantage to a player.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the unpaid prize ball information is basically stored in the main RAM 204, and the main MPU 202 receives the HI level payout permission signal from the payout MPU 362. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout MPU 362. Then, in the payout side MPU 362, the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout side RAM 364 is the sum of the maximum number of prize balls (15 prize balls) for one win and the permission reference number described later. The timing for switching the payout permission signal between the HI level and the LOW level is set so that In addition, this permission reference number is the minimum number of winning balls for one winning or less. Thereby, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped in a situation where a large number of unpaid prize balls remain, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls to be erased as much as possible. That is, the payout permission signal is information output from the payout MPU 362 to the main MPU 202 in order to specify the output timing of the prize ball command in the main MPU 202.

  In the payout state reception process, based on information received from the payout MPU 362 including the payout permission signal, a setting for determining whether or not it is possible to output a prize ball command to the payout MPU 362. I do. Further, a process for confirming whether or not a disconnection has occurred in a signal path for transmitting a command from the main MPU 202 to the payout MPU 362 is executed.

  In the payout state reception process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 105, first, in step S8401, it is determined whether or not the payout permission signal is at the HI level. The payout permission signal is a signal received from the payout side MPU 362 through the third signal path SL3 (see FIG. 74) as described above. In the state where the payout side MPU 362 prohibits the output of the prize ball command, the LOW level. When the payout permission signal is output and the output of the prize ball command is permitted, the HI level payout permission signal is output. The payout permission signal is input to the input port 92 a of the main MPU 202 when the driver IC sets the signal as an input target to the main MPU 202. In step S8401, the input port 92a is monitored to determine whether or not the payout permission signal is at the HI level.

  If a negative determination is made in step S8401, the payout permission counter provided in the main RAM 204 is cleared to “0” in step S8402. The payout permission counter is a counter for the main MPU 202 to specify the number of times that the payout permission signal is continuously confirmed to be at the HI level. In other words, the payout permission counter is a counter for measuring a period during which the payout permission signal is confirmed to be in the HI level. In this regard, the payout permission counter has a function as a timer counter, and its update mode is a mode of adding from the initial value “0”. In a subsequent step S8403, a disconnection confirmation state release process is executed. The disconnection confirmation state will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S8407.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S8401, disconnection confirmation processing is executed in step S8404. The disconnection confirmation process will be described later. In a succeeding step S8405, it is determined whether or not the payout permission counter is 5 or more. If the payout permission counter is less than 5, the payout permission counter is incremented by 1 in step S8406, and then the process proceeds to step S8407. If the payout permission counter is 5 or more, the process proceeds to step S8407.

  In step S8407, it is determined whether an abnormal start command is received from the payout MPU 362 through the second signal path SL2 (see FIG. 74). As described above, the abnormality start command is transmitted from the payout side MPU 362 when a predetermined abnormality occurs regarding the payout of the game ball. If an abnormal start command has been received, an abnormal start process is executed in step S8408. Specifically, by setting “1” to the payout abnormality flag provided in the main RAM 204, the payout abnormality state is set.

  In addition, as a process for starting abnormality, a configuration in which a payout abnormality command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 which is a sub-side control device may be configured. In this case, the voice lamp control device 82 is triggered by reception of the payout abnormality command. The payout abnormality notification may be executed by the error lamp unit or the speaker unit 64. Further, such a payout abnormality notification may be executed by the symbol display device 41.

  If a negative determination is made in step S8407 or after the processing of step S8408 is executed, whether or not an abnormal termination command is received from the payout MPU 362 through the second signal path SL2 (see FIG. 74) in step S8409. Determine whether. As described above, the abnormal end command is transmitted from the payout side MPU 362 when a predetermined abnormality regarding the payout of the game ball is released. If an abnormal termination command has been received, processing for abnormal termination is executed in step S8410. Specifically, the payout abnormality state is canceled by clearing the payout abnormality flag in the main RAM 204 to “0”.

  Note that, in the configuration in which the payout abnormality command is transmitted as described above as the abnormal start process, the payout abnormality cancel command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 as the abnormal end process. The voice lamp control device 82 may be configured to end the payout abnormality notification that has already been executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S8409 or after the processing of step S8410 is executed, a winning ball completion command is received from the payout side MPU 362 through the second signal path SL2 (see FIG. 74) in step S8411. Determine whether or not. As described above, the winning ball completion command is transmitted from the payout MPU 362 when the winning ball is completed, and includes information on the number of completed winning balls.

  When the winning ball completion command is not received, the payout state receiving process is terminated as it is, and when the winning ball completion command is received, after executing the winning ball number external output process in step S8412, The payout state reception process is terminated. In the external output process of the number of prize balls, a process for external output for causing the management computer of the game hall to recognize information on the number of prize balls completed this time is executed.

  The prize ball completion command may not be transmitted from the payout MPU 362. Further, in this configuration, the payout side MPU 362 is also electrically connected to the external terminal board, and the payout side without the prize ball being completed or the external output of the information on the number of prize balls completed is not via the main MPU 202. It is good also as a structure performed by MPU362.

<Discharge output processing>
Next, the payout output process executed in step S6221 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) will be described. The payout output process is a process for outputting a prize ball command to the payout MPU 362.

  In the payout output process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 106, first, in step S8501, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is being opened. If the front door frame 14 is open, the payout output process is terminated, and if the front door frame 14 is closed, the process proceeds to step S8502.

  In step S8502, it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the payout permission counter in the main RAM 204 is “5” as the permission reference number. Here, as described above, the payout permission counter is incremented by 1 in one processing time of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) when the state of receiving the HI level payout permission signal continues. Since the timer interrupt process is started at a cycle of 4 msec, it can be said that it is determined in step S8502 whether or not the reception of the HI level payout permission signal is continued for 20 msec or more which is the permission reference period.

  If the numerical information of the payout permission counter is not 5 or more, the payout output process is terminated as it is. If the numerical information of the payout permission counter is 5 or more, the process proceeds to step S8503. In step S8503, it is determined whether or not the payout is abnormal. If it is in the payout abnormal state, the payout output process is terminated as it is, and if it is not in the payout abnormal state, the process proceeds to step S8504.

  In step S8504, it is determined whether any prize ball counter is 1 or more. If all the prize ball counters are “0”, the payout output process is terminated as it is, and if any prize ball counter is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S8505.

  In step S8505, the payout permission counter is cleared to “0”. Thereafter, a prize ball command output setting process is executed in step S8506. In the prize ball command output setting process, when the 15 prize ball counter is 1 or more, the 15 prize ball commands instructing the payout of 15 game balls are set as output targets. When the 15 prize ball counter is “0” and the 10 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 10 prize ball command instructing the payout of 10 game balls is set as an output target. When both the 15 prize ball counter and the 10 prize ball counter are “0” and the 4 prize ball counter is 1 or more, a 4 prize ball command for instructing to pay out 4 game balls is issued. Set the output target. If all of the 15 award ball counter, the 10 award ball counter, and the 4 award ball counter are “0” and the 3 award ball counter is 1 or more, the payout of 3 game balls is instructed. Three prize ball commands are set as output targets.

  Note that the process of step S8505 may be executed after the process of step S8506. In addition, the priority when the prize ball command is set as the output target is not limited to the above pattern, and may be the reverse of the above pattern, for example, or may be configured as the output target according to the winning order. Good.

  As described above, even if the main MPU 202 confirms the HI level payout permission signal, the main MPU 202 does not immediately specify that the output of the prize ball command is permitted, but continues for the permitted reference number set as a plurality of times. When the confirmation is made, it is identified that the output of the prize ball command is permitted (identified as being in the output permitted state). As a result, when a payout permission signal at the HI level is received due to electrical noise or the like, the possibility that a prize ball command is output is reduced.

  In addition, when the numerical information of the payout permission counter reaches the permission reference number, only one prize ball command is output, so that the information on the number of prize balls stored in the payout RAM 364 is reduced. It becomes possible to suppress.

  In addition, when the process of step S8501 is executed, no prize ball command is output when the front door frame 14 is in the open state. In the pachinko machine 10, when the front door frame 14 is in an open state, the payout of game balls is stopped. In this case, by preventing the prize ball command from being output when the front door frame 14 is in the open state, it is possible to prevent the prize ball command from being newly output in a situation where the payout of the game ball is stopped. It becomes possible.

  After executing the process of step S8506, in step S8507, “1” is set to the immediately after output flag provided in the main RAM 204. The immediately after output flag is a flag for confirming that the main-side MPU 202 is immediately after outputting a prize ball command.

  In the subsequent step S8508, information on the waiting time for disconnection confirmation (switching correspondence period) is read from the main ROM 203, and the information on the read waiting time is read from the timer counter (8-bit timer for confirmation of disconnection) provided in the main RAM 204. Set to timer counter TC8). Specifically, “3” is set in the disconnection confirmation timer counter. The disconnection confirmation timer counter determines whether or not the time until the payout permission signal is switched from the HI level to the LOW level after setting the prize ball command as an output target exceeds the waiting time for disconnection confirmation. It is a counter for specifying by. Since the disconnection confirmation timer counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) is performed, the waiting time for disconnection confirmation is 12 msec. Thereafter, the payout output process ends.

<Discharge control processing>
Next, payout control processing executed periodically (for example, 2 msec) by the payout side MPU 362 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S8601, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received. Here, the prize ball command includes information indicating that it is a prize ball command (hereinafter also referred to as type information), information indicating the number of prize balls (hereinafter also referred to as number information), and parity check (hereinafter referred to as check). The data amount is a plurality of bytes (for example, 3 bytes) so as to include information necessary for performing the data. In step S8601, it is determined whether or not a prize ball command has been received by confirming information indicating that it is a prize ball command among the received command information.

  If a prize ball command has been received, error checking processing is executed in step S8602. In the error confirmation process, a parity check is performed. When transmitting a prize ball command, the main MPU 202 calculates numerical information corresponding to the total number of “1” included in the type information and the number of “1” included in the number information, The calculated numerical information is transmitted as the check information. In the parity check, the total number of “1” included in the type information and the number of “1” included in the number information is calculated, and whether the calculation result matches the numerical information of the check information. Determine whether or not. If they do not match, the winning ball command is treated as having an error because there is a high possibility that it has been rewritten due to electrical noise during transmission.

  In step S8603, it is determined whether or not it is determined that an error has occurred in the error check process in step S8602. If it is determined that no error has occurred, in step S8604, the number of prize balls instructed to be paid out by the current prize ball command is confirmed from the number information and stored in the register of the payout side MPU 362. Execute. Further, in the confirmation process, it is confirmed whether or not the number of prize balls corresponds to any of the information on the number of prize balls stored in advance in the payout-side ROM 363.

  In a succeeding step S8605, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal. If the number of prize balls is not abnormal, prize ball number addition processing is executed in step S8606. In the award ball number addition process, the award ball number information confirmed in step S8604 is added to the award ball number counter provided in the payout side RAM 364. In step S8607, the output state of the payout permission signal is set to the LOW level.

  That is, when the payout side MPU 362 receives one prize ball command, the payout permission signal output state is switched from the HI level to the LOW level. Here, as already described, the main MPU 202 transmits one prize ball command when the HI level payout permission signal is continuously confirmed over five processing times of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 76), At that time, the payout permission counter is cleared to “0”. In this case, after the prize ball command is set as an output target in the main side MPU 202, the payout side MPU 362 sets the output state of the payout permission signal to the LOW level in response to the reception of the prize ball command. The time from when the payout permission signal is confirmed by the main MPU 202 until the payout permission counter is cleared to “0”, the numerical information of the payout permission counter changes from “0” to the output permission reference number “5”. The processing speed and the data transmission speed are set so that the time is shorter than the time until. Accordingly, in response to the payout side MPU 362 setting the output state of the payout permission signal to the HI level, only one prize ball command is transmitted from the main side MPU 202. As a result, the number of prize balls stored in the payout-side RAM 364 to which no memory holding power is supplied during power interruption can be suppressed, and the number of prize balls that are erased without being paid out when power interruption occurs. Can be suppressed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S8601, an affirmative determination is made in step S8603, an affirmative determination is made in step S8605, or after the processing of step S8607 is executed, in step S8608, Execute the setting process. In the ball lending setting process, when a game ball lending instruction is received from the ball lending device Y, a setting for paying out the game ball according to the lending instruction is performed.

  In the subsequent step S8609, when the prize ball number counter of the payout side RAM 364 is 1 or more or the required lending number is 1 or more, a process for driving the payout motor 96a of the payout device 96 so as to pay out the game ball. Execute. However, when the front door frame 14 is open or when the lower plate 72 is full, even if the award ball counter is 1 or more or the required lending number is 1 or more, the game ball is paid out. Regulate not to be.

  Thereafter, in step S8610, it is determined whether or not one game ball has been paid out by confirming the detection result of the payout detection sensor 96b. If an affirmative determination is made in step S8610, 1 is subtracted from the prize ball number counter or the required lending number in step S8611. In this case, the required number of loans is preferentially subtracted by 1, but the reverse may be possible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S8610, or after the processing in step S8611 is executed, it is determined in step S8612 whether or not payout relating to a prize ball is being executed. If the payout relating to the prize ball is being executed, it is determined in step S8613 whether or not the numerical information of the prize ball number counter is equal to or less than 2 which is the permitted reference number. If the numerical information of the winning ball counter is 2 or less, the output state of the payout permission signal is set to HI level in step S8614. In this way, by setting the output state of the payout permission signal to the HI level before the numerical information of the prize ball number counter becomes “0”, the main side RAM 204 stores and holds the number of prize balls to be paid out. If there is, the payout related to the prize ball can be executed continuously.

  When a negative determination is made in step S8612, a negative determination is made in step S8613, or after the processing of step S8614 is executed, other processing is executed in step S8615. In other processes, it is specified whether or not the lower plate 72 is full. When the full plate is full, an abnormal start command is transmitted to the main MPU 202, and when the full state is released. An abnormal termination command is transmitted to the main MPU 202. In addition, it is specified whether or not the tank 95 is in a ball-free state, and an abnormal start command is transmitted to the main MPU 202 when the ball is in a ball-free state, and an error is detected when the ball-free state is released. An end command is transmitted to the main MPU 202. Thereafter, the payout control process is terminated.

<Disconnection confirmation process>
Next, the disconnection confirmation process executed in step S8404 of the payout state reception process (FIG. 105) will be described.

  In the disconnection confirmation process, whether or not a disconnection has occurred in the first signal path SL1 provided for transmitting a command from the main MPU 202 to the payout MPU 362 by serial communication is confirmed from the input state of the payout permission signal. Execute the process.

  Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108, first, in step S8701, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the immediately after output flag of the main RAM 204. If “1” is not set in the flag immediately after output, the disconnection confirmation process is terminated as it is, and if “1” is set in the flag immediately after output, the process proceeds to step S8702.

  In step S8702, it is determined whether the numerical information of the disconnection confirmation timer counter in the main RAM 204 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether or not a waiting time for disconnection confirmation has elapsed since the prize ball command was set as an output target. If it is not “0”, the disconnection confirmation process is terminated as it is, and if it is “0”, the process proceeds to step S8703.

  In step S8703, the payout permission counter of the main RAM 204 is cleared to “0”. In a succeeding step S8704, it is determined whether or not the payout-side disconnection notification has been completed. The payout-side disconnection-notified state means a state in which a disconnection has already occurred in the first signal path SL1, and is used as a payout-side disconnection-notified flag in the register of the main MPU 202. “1” is set. If it is in the payout-side disconnection notification state, the disconnection confirmation process is terminated as it is, and if it is not in the payout-side disconnection notification state, the process proceeds to step S8705.

  In step S8705, the payout-side disconnection notification command is set as an output target. The payout-side disconnection notification command is a command for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the main-side MPU 202 has identified the occurrence of the disconnection in the first signal path SL1.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 87, the audio lamp control device 82 determines whether or not a payout-side disconnection notification command is received as a notification-type command in step S6901, and if the command is received, In step S6902, notification processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, a data table for making notification corresponding to occurrence of disconnection on the payout side through the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64 is read from the ROM of the sound lamp control device 82, and payout is performed according to the read data table. The notification for occurrence of disconnection on the side is performed by the error lamp unit and the speaker unit 64.

  Note that the control of the notification has priority over control for production, control for permission of launch, and control of notification for the first stage related to radio wave detection. Also, control for notification for magnet detection, control for notification for illegal winning, control for notification for second stage related to radio wave detection, control for notification for occurrence of disconnection related to detection sensors 31a to 35b for winning, and short circuit When the generation notification control overlaps with the timing, the notification control with the overlapping timing is sequentially executed. However, a configuration in which a predetermined priority is set may be employed. The same applies to notifications in the symbol display device 41 below.

  In a succeeding step S6903, a notification-type command corresponding to reception of the payout-side disconnection notification command is transmitted to the display control device 212. In the display control device 212, a data table is read from the ROM of the display control device 212 so that notification corresponding to the occurrence of disconnection in the first signal path SL1 is performed through the symbol display device 41, and the read data table Accordingly, the symbol display device 41 performs notification corresponding to the occurrence of disconnection.

  Returning to the description of the disconnection confirmation processing (FIG. 108), after the processing of step S8705 is executed, the processing proceeds to step S8706. In step S8706, a payout-side disconnection notification external output start process is executed in order to make the gaming hall management computer recognize that the occurrence of disconnection in the first signal path SL1 has been identified. In the subsequent step S8707, by setting “1” to the payout side disconnection notification flag in the register of the main side MPU 202, the payout side disconnection notification state is set. Then, this disconnection confirmation process is complete | finished.

  In the payout-side disconnection notification completed state, in step S8401 of the payout state reception process (FIG. 105), the reception of the LOW level payout permission signal is confirmed and a negative determination is made. In step S8403, the release process is executed. It is canceled by doing. In this case, the external output for notification of disconnection on the payout side is canceled, and the disconnection notification on the payout side is also canceled by transmitting a cancel command to the audio lamp control device 82.

  Next, how the prize ball is paid out and how the first signal path SL1 is checked for disconnection will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  109A shows the output state of the payout permission signal, FIG. 109B shows the output state of the prize ball command, and FIG. 109C shows the required number of prize balls stored in the main RAM 204 (each 109 (d) shows the execution status of the payout of prize balls, and FIG. 109 (e) shows the setting status of the disconnection notification state on the payout side.

  First, the case where the payout of the winning ball is normally performed will be described.

  In the situation where the payout of the prize ball is executed, the numerical information of the prize ball number counter of the payout side RAM 364 becomes equal to or less than the permission reference number at the timing t1, so that the output state of the payout permission signal changes from the LOW level to the HI level. Can be switched. In this case, since information on the required number of prize balls is stored in the main side RAM 204, one prize ball command is transmitted to the payout side MPU 362 at the timing t2, which is the timing when the output permission reference period T1 has elapsed. . At this time, the required number of prize balls is updated. In addition, since the timing at which the payout side MPU 362 receives the prize ball command is the timing before the payout of the permitted reference number of game balls is completed, the payout of game balls is continued without interruption.

  The payout MPU 362 that has received the prize ball command switches the output state of the payout permission signal from the HI level to the LOW level at the timing of t3. This timing is the timing before the output permission reference period T1 has elapsed since the main MPU 202 set the prize ball command as an output target. Thereby, it is suppressed that a plurality of prize ball commands are transmitted continuously.

  Thereafter, the numerical information of the prize ball number counter in the payout side RAM 364 again becomes equal to or less than the permission reference number at the timing t4, whereby the output state of the payout permission signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. Then, one prize ball command is transmitted to the payout MPU 362 at the timing t5 when the output permission reference period T1 has passed, and the output state of the payout permission signal from the HI level at the timing t6. Switch to LOW level.

  Thereafter, the numerical information of the winning ball number counter in the payout side RAM 364 again becomes equal to or less than the permission reference number at the timing of t7, whereby the output state of the payout permission signal is switched from the LOW level to the HI level. However, since the required number of prize balls in the main RAM 204 is already “0”, no prize ball command is transmitted. Therefore, the payout of the prize ball is finished at the timing of t8.

  Next, a case where the payout of the winning ball is not normally executed due to the occurrence of disconnection in the first signal path SL1 will be described.

  The required number of winning balls is set in the main RAM 204 when a new winning is generated at the timing t9 when the payout permission signal is already at the HI level. Accordingly, the main MPU 202 outputs a prize ball command to the payout MPU 362 at the timing of t10.

  However, since the disconnection occurs in the first signal path SL1, the prize ball command is not received by the payout side MPU 362, and the prize ball is not paid out. In addition, since the payout side MPU 362 has not received a prize ball command, the payout permission signal is not switched to the LOW level, and the HI level output state is maintained.

  On the other hand, at the timing t11 when the waiting time T2 for disconnection confirmation has elapsed after setting the prize ball command as an output target, the disconnection notification state on the payout side is set, and a notification to that effect is given. Be started. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can be notified that the disconnection has occurred in the first signal path SL1, and it can be dealt with.

  Also, the waiting time T2 for disconnection confirmation is set to a time shorter than the output permission reference period T1, and in the state where the disconnection notification has been made on the payout side, the payout permission is executed every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76) is executed. The counter is cleared to “0”. As a result, when a disconnection occurs in the first signal path SL1, the output of a new prize ball command is prohibited before the next prize ball command is outputted after the one prize ball command is outputted. The number of prize balls that are invalidated without paying out can be suppressed.

  Further, whether or not a disconnection has occurred in the first signal path SL1 is determined from the HI level of the payout permission signal transmitted from the payout side MPU 362 to the main side MPU 202 in order to set the permission for transmitting the prize ball command. This is done through confirmation that switching to the LOW level does not occur. As a result, the disconnection confirmation can be performed using the configuration related to the permission setting for sending the prize ball command. For example, it is not necessary to apply a hardware configuration or a software configuration for disconnection confirmation in the payout side MPU 362. The above-described excellent effects can be achieved while simplifying.

  In the output permission reference period T1, as described above, in the situation where the payout side MPU 362 does not actually permit the output of the prize ball command, the payout permission signal is set to the HI level once due to the influence of electrical noise. It is set to prevent the prize ball command from being output when it becomes. That is, by using a configuration for suppressing the influence of such electrical noise, it is possible to prevent the output of a new prize ball command when a disconnection occurs. By the way, this effect can also be obtained from the configuration (the process of step S8703) performed so that the period measured by the payout permission counter does not become the output permission reference period T1 when the disconnection is confirmed. Can do.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the first signal path SL1 transmits a command in the parallel system, it is possible to confirm disconnection in the payout side MPU 362 by not receiving predetermined information from a part of the signal path of the parallel system. Although it is possible, in this pachinko machine 10, since the first signal path SL1 is configured to transmit a command in a serial manner, such a countermeasure cannot be adopted. Therefore, it is effective to apply the processing configuration related to the disconnection confirmation as described above in a configuration in which a command is transmitted in such a serial system.

  In the waiting time T2 for disconnection confirmation, after the winning ball command is set as an output target in the main MPU 202, the payout permission MPU 362 sets the output state of the payout permission signal to LOW level when the winning ball command is received. Further, the processing speed and the data transmission speed are set so that the time is longer than the time until the payout permission counter is cleared to “0” after the payout permission signal at the LOW level is confirmed by the main MPU 202. Is set. Therefore, in a situation where no disconnection occurs in the first signal path SL1, the prohibition of the output setting of the prize ball command and the disconnection notification on the payout side are not executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Even in the present embodiment, as in the eighth to tenth embodiments, a plurality of pieces of hold information may be obtained before the hold command setting process is executed. Therefore, in the setting process at the time of acquisition, similarly to the above-described eighth embodiment, when new hold information is acquired in a situation where there is hold information already waiting for processing related to the hold notice. In addition, the newly acquired hold information is excluded from the execution target of the process related to the hold notice by using the process waiting flag, so that a plurality of hold information can be obtained in the process related to one hold notice. There is no need to handle it. Therefore, it is suppressed that the time required to complete the process related to the hold notice is prolonged.

  Incidentally, in order to achieve the effect, only the newly acquired hold information may be set as the execution target of the process related to the hold notice as in the tenth embodiment. Further, as in the fourteenth embodiment, each hold information is a target for execution of the process related to the hold notice within the range until the game is started. In the process related to one hold notice, It is good also as a structure which makes only one hold information execution object.

  In addition, a configuration in which one piece of hold information can be obtained when the timer interrupt process is executed twice as in the present embodiment may be applied to the eighth to seventeenth embodiments. For example, when applied to the eleventh embodiment, the hold information related to the upper operating port 33 can be acquired when the timer interrupt process is executed twice, and the hold information related to the lower operating port 34 is set to the timer. It can be acquired when the interrupt process is executed twice. Further, in relation to the normal process, since the timer interrupt process is executed twice for one normal process, the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is displayed each time the normal process is executed. While being able to be acquired, the hold information related to the lower working port 34 can be acquired. Accordingly, a plurality of pieces of hold information related to the upper working opening 33 can be acquired before the processing related to the upper holding notice is executed, and the holding information related to the lower working opening 34 is executed until the process related to the lower holding notice is executed. A plurality of can be acquired. Therefore, as in the eleventh embodiment, the upper processing waiting flag and the lower processing waiting flag are used to process both the holding information related to the upper operating port 33 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 34. In the situation where there is pending hold information waiting, the time required for the process related to one upper hold notice by excluding the newly acquired hold information from the execution target related to the hold notice, It is possible to suppress the time required for the processing related to one lower hold notice from being prolonged. In order to suppress the prolonged time, the configuration as in the tenth embodiment or the configuration as in the fourteenth embodiment may be applied.

  In addition, even when applied to the twelfth embodiment, a plurality of pieces of hold information related to the upper operation port 33 can be acquired before the process related to the upper hold notice is executed, and the lower hold notice can be obtained. A plurality of pieces of hold information related to the lower operation port 34 can be acquired before the process is executed. Therefore, as in the eleventh embodiment, the upper processing waiting flag and the lower processing waiting flag are used to process both the holding information related to the upper operating port 33 and the holding information related to the lower operating port 34. In the situation where there is pending hold information waiting, the time required for the process related to one upper hold notice by excluding the newly acquired hold information from the execution target related to the hold notice, It is possible to suppress the time required for the processing related to one lower hold notice from being prolonged. In order to suppress the prolonged time, the configuration as in the tenth embodiment or the configuration as in the fourteenth embodiment may be applied.

  Incidentally, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the above effects, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  If it is confirmed once that the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption, the power failure process is not performed, but the power failure process is performed when the power failure signal is confirmed a plurality of times. Thereby, when the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of the power interruption due to the influence of electrical noise, the possibility that the power failure process is executed is reduced. In this case, the power failure signal is monitored in the power failure information storage process (FIG. 77) in step S6203 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76). Monitor multiple times. As a result, the effects as described above can be achieved while suppressing a reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the timing at which the timer interrupt process is executed. In addition, the above effects can be achieved while suppressing a decrease in the degree of freedom in setting the time from when it is first confirmed that the power failure signal corresponds to the occurrence of power interruption, until the start of power failure processing. Can do.

  In addition, due to the influence of electrical noise, etc., in the situation where the power is cut off, the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption suddenly changes to the one corresponding to the state where the power interruption has not occurred. There is concern. In this case, if the condition for executing the power failure process is set to continuously check the reception of the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power shutdown, the power shutdown has occurred. Nevertheless, due to the influence of the electrical noise, the main MPU 202 does not recognize that the power supply has been cut off, and there is a concern that the power supply is completely cut off without executing the power failure process. On the other hand, if the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed more than the trigger reference number (repetition count> trigger reference number) within the range where the power failure confirmation processing is performed for the predetermined number of repetitions, the power failure processing is executed. In this way, by removing the continuity of confirmation from the conditions for executing the process at the time of power failure, even when there is an influence of electrical noise as described above, the process at the time of power failure can be executed satisfactorily.

  A single confirmation that the winning signal output from the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b corresponds to the detection of the game ball is not made, and it is determined that a winning has occurred a plurality of times. Determined to occur. Thereby, when the winning signal becomes a signal corresponding to the passing of the game ball due to the influence of electrical noise, the possibility that the winning is determined to be generated is reduced. In this case, the winning signal is monitored in the winning detection process (FIG. 80) in step S6211 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 76). In the winning detection process, the same winning detection is performed in one processing time. The winning signal output from the sensors 31a to 35b is monitored a plurality of times. As a result, the effects as described above can be achieved while suppressing a reduction in the degree of freedom in designing the timing at which the timer interrupt process is executed. In addition, while suppressing the decrease in the degree of freedom in setting the time from when it is first confirmed that the winning signal corresponds to the detection of the game ball until it is determined that the winning is generated, the above-described effects are achieved. Can play.

  However, in the configuration in which the same winning signal is confirmed a plurality of times within the range of one processing time, the confirmation is performed a plurality of times in a situation where the influence due to the occurrence of one electrical noise continues. There is a concern that On the other hand, as described above, a wait process for winning detection between the process of monitoring the winning information on the front side and the process of monitoring the winning information on the rear side in one timer interrupt process (step S6402). Further, the wait time is set so that the influence of electrical noise does not extend over the process of monitoring a set of winning information. Therefore, the winning of the game ball is not erroneously detected due to the influence of electrical noise.

  With regard to the determination of whether or not a winning has occurred, it is determined that a winning has occurred when the winning signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball is continuously confirmed a plurality of times, whereas the determination of whether or not a power failure has occurred is 10 times. If the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed 8 times or more, which is the trigger reference frequency, within the range of the number of repetitions of, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. In this way, depending on the type of event to be detected, as a condition for determining the occurrence of an event, distinguish between the case where the continuity of signal confirmation corresponding to the occurrence of the event is essential and the case where it is not essential Thus, as already described, it is possible to appropriately specify the occurrence of the event according to the type of event to be detected.

  In other words, by making continuity of the power failure signal indispensable, it is possible to more carefully suppress the possibility that the power failure process will not be executed even though the power is actually shut down. By making the continuity of the winning signal essential, it is possible to more carefully suppress the possibility that a winning will be determined even though no winning has actually occurred.

  Further, the continuous reference number required to determine that a winning has occurred is set to a number smaller than the trigger reference number required to determine that a power outage has occurred. As a result, regarding the confirmation of the occurrence of a power failure, the accuracy of confirmation can be improved by setting a large number of trigger reference times in correspondence with the fact that the continuity of confirmation of a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is not essential. . On the other hand, regarding the confirmation of the occurrence of winning, by setting the continuous reference number to be smaller than the trigger reference number corresponding to making the confirmation of the winning signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball essential, Suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a winning signal that is not detected due to the influence of electrical noise is checked on a one-off basis due to the influence of electrical noise even though a winning has actually occurred. Is possible.

  In the configuration in which the prize ball command output from the main side MPU 202 is transmitted to the payout side MPU 362 through the first signal path SL1, it is determined whether or not a disconnection has occurred in the first signal path SL1. Is performed through confirmation that the switching from the HI level to the LOW level of the payout permission signal transmitted from the payout MPU 362 to the main MPU 202 does not occur. As a result, the disconnection confirmation can be performed using the configuration related to the permission setting for sending the prize ball command. For example, it is not necessary to apply a hardware configuration or a software configuration for disconnection confirmation in the payout side MPU 362. The disconnection of the first signal path SL1 can be confirmed while simplifying.

  In the configuration in which the radio wave detection sensor 353 is provided so that fraud using the radio wave can be suppressed, even if the radio wave detection sensor 353 detects the radio wave, the game stop state is not set immediately, but such detection is performed. The game stop state is set in response to the occurrence of a winning in the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34 during the measurement of the monitoring time that starts with the above. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game stop state from being set when the radio wave detection sensor 353 detects radio waves due to noise or the like despite the regular game.

  The update of the numerical information of each timer counter TC1 to TC10 used for measuring the passage of time by subtracting the numerical information is individually executed in each process to be used by the timer counters TC1 to TC10. Instead, it is executed by a timer update process (FIG. 84) set as a process different from these processes. Thereby, compared with the case where the update process of each timer counter TC1-TC10 is separately performed in each process used as those utilization object, simplification of a process structure is achieved.

  In the special figure special power control process, by specifying the content of the process to be executed by referring to the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter, a series of games composed of effects for game times and opening / closing execution modes When the main MPU 202 specifies which situation is in the situation, it is sufficient to refer to the special figure special electricity counter, and there is no need to check a plurality of flags at each processing timing as in the prior art. Therefore, the processing configuration can be simplified.

  Even if a game ball is fired through the firing handle 54, the main MPU 202 does not permit the game ball to be fired immediately, but the delay time lottery process in step S67104 of the launch control process (FIG. 90). And launching is permitted after a delay time corresponding to the result of the lottery process has elapsed. As a result, even if the start timing of the game ball is intentionally manipulated through the operation timing of the launch handle 54, the timing at which the launch solenoid 53a is in a driving state with respect to the timing at which the launch operation is actually performed is irregular. Therefore, this intentional operation can be invalidated.

  When the firing solenoid 53a is in a driving state, a corresponding notification is performed, so that when a deliberate operation as described above is performed, the manager of the game hall can recognize it, It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the irregular timing of the firing solenoid 53a is not due to a failure.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the description of the eighteenth embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows.

  In the determination of the occurrence of a power failure, the continuity is not essential for the confirmation of the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption, but the continuity may be required. In this case, the power failure process may be executed when the power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of the power interruption is confirmed twice continuously within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76). Further, a configuration may be employed in which a predetermined time is secured in order to suppress the influence of electrical noise between the execution of the confirmation process on the front side and the execution of the confirmation process on the rear side. Further, in order to secure the predetermined time, the main MPU 202 may be configured to execute a wait process that enters a process waiting state.

  -When determining the occurrence of a power outage, when checking the power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption over the number of repetitions, the confirmation for the number of repetitions is performed over a plurality of timer interrupt processes. Also good. In addition, when determining whether or not an event to be detected has occurred, the continuity is not essential for the confirmation of the signal corresponding to the occurrence of the event. Nevertheless, when focusing on the fact that the possibility of determining that the event has not occurred due to the influence of electrical noise is reduced, the signal corresponding to the occurrence of the event in one processing of the timer interrupt process It is not essential that the confirmation is performed a plurality of times, and the signal corresponding to the occurrence of the event may be confirmed only once in one processing time of the timer interrupt processing.

  In determining whether a winning has occurred, the continuity is indispensable for confirming the winning signal corresponding to the detection of the game ball, but the continuity may not be required. In this case, similarly to the processing related to the determination of the occurrence of a power failure in the first embodiment, two winning signals corresponding to the detection of the game ball are detected within a predetermined number of repetitions set as three or more times. It may be configured to determine whether or not a winning has occurred by determining whether or not a predetermined number of times that is set to a number that is equal to or greater than the number of repetitions and less than the number of repetitions is confirmed.

  When the detection result of the winning detection sensors 31a to 35b is acquired within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76), the preceding shift process (that is, the first confirmation process) in step S6401; In order to require a predetermined time between the rear shift process (that is, the second confirmation process) in step S6403, instead of the configuration for executing the wait process for winning detection (step S6402), A configuration in which other processing is included may be employed.

  For example, a configuration may be included in which processing for performing control different from control using the result of the shift processing is included between the front shift processing and the rear shift processing. More specifically, the first shift process is executed at a timing before step S6208, such as the first timing of the timer interrupt process, and the rear shift process is executed at a timing after step S6208. It is good also as a structure. However, in order to prevent the time between the shift process on the front side and the shift process on the rear side from fluctuating greatly depending on the progress of the game, a process and a process in which the processing time tends to fluctuate in the timer interrupt process. In the case where a process that does not easily change in time is included, it is preferable that a process that does not easily change is not included between the shift process on the front side and the shift process on the rear side.

  When determining the occurrence of a winning, no weight process (step S6402) is set between the preceding shift process and the rear shift process, and these shift processes are continued in the order of the processes. It is good also as a structure. In addition, wait processing is set in processing that does not require continuity of signal confirmation corresponding to occurrence of the target event when specifying that the target event has occurred, such as processing related to determination of occurrence of power failure It is good also as a structure. In this case, although the target event has not occurred, the possibility that the target event is identified as being generated due to the influence of electrical noise is reduced.

  In determining whether a winning has occurred, the same winning detection sensor 31a to 35b is configured to determine that a winning has occurred when a winning signal corresponding to the detection of a game ball is confirmed twice consecutively. There is no limitation, and it may be configured to determine that a winning has occurred when it is confirmed three times in succession, and the corresponding winning signal is confirmed during detection of the game ball over four or more consecutive reference times. In some cases, it may be determined that a winning has occurred. In this case, the continuous reference number may be the same as or more than the trigger reference number related to the determination of the occurrence of a power failure.

  -When determining the occurrence of a prize, the result of computing the confirmation result of the prize signal that was performed a plurality of times is stored for each processing of the timer interrupt process, and a prize is generated from the result of the computation of a plurality of consecutive processing times However, the configuration may be changed. For example, each confirmation result related to the same winning signal is individually stored within a predetermined number of confirmation times, and in the individually stored confirmation results, one confirmation result corresponding to non-detection and during detection A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that a winning has occurred when there is a range in which the confirmation results corresponding to the corresponding continuous reference number are continuous. This configuration is effective when the continuous reference count is not divisible by the number of confirmations of the same winning signal within the range of one timer interrupt processing.

  -For the same winning signal, first confirm the corresponding winning signal during non-detection, and then check the corresponding winning signal during detection over the continuous reference number, then the winning related to the winning signal is generated It is determined that a winning has occurred by confirming the winning signal corresponding to the detection during the continuous reference number of times, and then checking the corresponding winning signal during the non-detection It is good also as a structure. In this case, it may be configured that it is determined that a winning has occurred when the winning signal corresponding to the non-detection is confirmed a plurality of times.

  When calculating the result of confirming the winning signal that has been performed a plurality of times for each processing of the timer interrupt processing, the operation is not limited to a configuration in which the operation is performed by logical product. In the case of “1”, “1”, or “1”, “1”, “0”, if it is determined that a winning has occurred, an operation other than the logical product may be performed.

  The processing configuration relating to the determination of the occurrence of a winning in the eighteenth embodiment may be applied to specify the occurrence of an event different from the occurrence of a winning. For example, the present invention may be applied to specify the open / closed state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, and may be used to specify the occurrence of fraud through detection results of the magnet detection sensor 352 and the radio wave detection sensor 353. May be.

  In addition, the processing configuration relating to the determination of the occurrence of a power failure in the eighteenth embodiment may be applied to specify the occurrence of an event different from the occurrence of a power failure. For example, the present invention may be applied to specify the open / closed state of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, and may be used to specify the occurrence of fraud through detection results of the magnet detection sensor 352 and the radio wave detection sensor 353. May be.

  In the disconnection confirmation process (FIG. 108) of the first signal path SL1, the numerical information of the disconnection confirmation timer counter is “0” in the situation where the winning ball command is output and the flag immediately after output is set to “1”. The addition of the payout permission counter may be blocked regardless of whether or not the payout permission counter is initialized, or the initialization of the payout permission counter may be repeated. For example, in a situation where “1” is set in the immediately after output flag, the process of step S8406 may be prevented from being executed. Even in this case, the possibility of a new prize ball command being transmitted when a disconnection occurs in the first signal path SL1 is reduced.

  In addition, even when it is determined that the switching correspondence period has passed through the disconnection confirmation timer counter, the payout permission counter is not initialized, and instead, the flag immediately after output is set to “1” Then, even if the numerical information of the payout permission counter becomes the numerical information corresponding to the permission reference period (specifically “5”), the configuration may be such that the output setting of the prize ball command is not performed.

  -It is good also as a structure which does not have the timer counter for disconnection confirmation, and measures the switch corresponding | compatible period after outputting a prize ball command using a payout permission counter. Specifically, the payout permission counter is initialized when a prize ball command is output, and when the payout permission signal is at the HI level, 1 is added each time the timer interrupt process is executed once. When the numerical value information of the payout permission counter becomes the numerical information corresponding to the switching corresponding period (specifically “3”) without the payout permission signal being switched to the LOW level from the initialized state, the first It is good also as a structure which determines with the disconnection having generate | occur | produced in the signal path | route SL1. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the main side RAM 204 necessary for confirming the disconnection.

  -Immediately after outputting the prize ball command in the main MPU 202, the type of the prize ball command to be output is stored, and if the disconnection of the first signal path SL1 is not confirmed after that, While the stored information is erased, if the disconnection of the first signal path SL1 is confirmed thereafter, the stored type of award ball command may be output again after the disconnection is resolved. In this case, when disconnection of the first signal path SL1 occurs, the possibility that the payout of the game ball is invalidated is reduced.

  As a specific configuration, in a situation in which “1” is set in the flag immediately after output after the prize ball command is output, the type of the prize ball command that is output is stored in the main RAM 204, and the flag immediately after output is set. When cleared, the stored prize ball command is first set as an output target.

  The processing related to the disconnection confirmation of the first signal path SL1 in the eighteenth embodiment is applied to a configuration in which the first signal path SL1 transmits a command in parallel instead of serial. May be. Even in this case, the disconnection of the first signal path SL1 can be confirmed using the configuration for transmitting the payout permission signal.

  Further, the processing related to the disconnection confirmation of the first signal path SL1 may be applied to a configuration in which power is supplied from the power supply unit 374 for power interruption to the payout side RAM 364. Even in this case, a configuration using a payout permission signal to prevent a plurality of winning ball commands from being continuously transmitted from the main MPU 202 can be considered, and disconnection confirmation can be performed through confirmation of the payout permission signal. .

  The payout permission signal is not limited to a configuration in which switching to a signal corresponding to non-permission is performed every time one prize ball command is output, and a plurality of predetermined prize ball commands are output. A configuration may be adopted in which switching to a signal corresponding to non-permission is performed every time. Even in this case, the disconnection can be confirmed through the confirmation of the payout permission signal.

  -In the situation where a signal corresponding to permission is output from one of the two control devices, a signal including predetermined information is transmitted from the other, and when one of the control devices receives the signal, a specific process is performed. Is configured to switch the signal corresponding to the permission to the signal corresponding to the non-permission, for confirming the disconnection of the signal path different from the signal path for transmitting the prize ball command from the main MPU 202 to the payout MPU 362. You may apply.

  For example, the present invention may be applied for disconnection confirmation in a signal path for transmitting a command for presentation from the main MPU 202 to the sound lamp control device 82. Further, the present invention may be applied to confirmation of disconnection in a signal path for transmitting an effect command from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the game stop state is set when a radio wave is detected or when a winning to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34 occurs during monitoring time measurement. The configuration is not limited, and the game stop state may be set when a winning to the general winning opening 31 or a winning to the variable winning device 32 occurs.

  In addition, the game stop may be set when a radio wave is detected in a situation where a game ball is being paid out. When the game ball is paid out through the payout device 96, the radio wave is illegally output, so that the game ball is actually not paid out even though the game ball is paid out. An improper act that causes the detection sensor 96b to erroneously detect is assumed. On the other hand, the game stop state is set when radio waves are detected in a situation where game balls are being paid out as described above, so that despite the above fraudulent acts, It is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being controlled as usual. By the way, in order to achieve the effect, it may be configured to be set to the game stop state when the situation where the game ball is paid out occurs first, and then the radio wave is detected, The configuration may be such that the game stop state is set when the situation in which the radio wave is detected occurs first and then the payout of the game ball is started. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which suppresses the influence of the electromagnetic wave to the payout detection sensor 96b by providing the sheet | seat for electromagnetic shielding in the housing of the payout apparatus 96. FIG.

  In addition to the above, the game stop state may be set when a transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs during the time when the radio wave is detected or the monitoring time is measured.

  In place of the configuration in which the setting to the game stop state is performed when a radio wave or vibration is detected and a winning to the operating ports 33 and 34 occurs or when a game ball passes through the passing portions 141 and 144, It is good also as a structure in which only the alerting | reporting corresponding to it is performed. In the said structure, it is good also as a structure by which the alert | report of the 1st step | paragraph at the time of detecting an electromagnetic wave or a vibration is not performed.

  In particular, by applying this configuration for radio wave detection, the game stop state should be set for situations where a game is normally played when radio waves that are likely to be generated in a game hall environment are detected. Is prevented. Moreover, in the said structure, it is good also as a structure by which the alerting | reporting is performed in the aspect which is not conspicuous for a player compared with other abnormality alerting | reporting. For example, a notification light emitting unit that irradiates light toward the side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided at the upper corner portion or the side portion of the pachinko machine 10, and the notification light emitting unit is caused to emit light when the radio wave detection is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to make the notification inconspicuous for the player and make it easy for the manager of the game hall to recognize the notification. Further, instead of or in addition to the notification configuration, an external output may be performed. Incidentally, the notification configuration may be applied to the first-stage notification in the eighteenth embodiment.

  Also, instead of setting to the game stop state, a setting for prohibiting or invalidating a game such as prohibition of launch, a setting for prohibiting the provision of game media such as paying out a game ball, a lottery such as a big hit lottery, etc. A configuration in which at least one of a setting for prohibiting the processing and a setting for invalidating the jackpot result may be performed.

  A timer update process (FIG. 84) in which updates of a large number of timer counters TC1 to TC10 are aggregated may be executed as the first process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 76). In this case, since the timer update process is executed at the first timing of the timer interrupt process that is periodically started, the update intervals of the timer counters TC1 to TC10 can be further fixed.

  Further, the timer update process may be executed before the process of step S6208 in the timer interrupt process. In this case, it is possible to continue updating the timer counters TC1 to TC10 even in a situation where the game is stopped.

  The timer counters TC1 to TC10 to be updated by the timer update process may be an addition formula instead of a subtraction formula. However, in this configuration, in order to prevent the numerical information of the timer counters TC1 to TC10 from continuing to be added in a situation where the measurement using the timer counters TC1 to TC10 is not performed, The upper limit value of the numerical information may be set individually for TC10. Alternatively, an area of a flag under measurement is prepared for each timer counter TC1 to TC10, and numerical information is added only to the timer counters TC1 to TC10 in which “1” is set in the flag under measurement. Also good.

  In the timer update process, numerical information may be updated for both the subtraction timer counter and the addition timer counter. Even in this case, a configuration in which numerical information is not continuously added as described above may be applied to the addition type timer counter.

  The timer counter to be updated by the timer update process is not limited to the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4 and the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10, but a timer counter having a bit number smaller than 8 bits, A timer counter having a number of bits included in the range of 8 bits to 16 bits or a timer counter having a number of bits larger than 16 bits may be used.

  In the timer update process, the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 may be updated before the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4. In this case, each address is set so that the address of the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 is smaller than the address of the 16-bit timer counters TC1 to TC4, and the 8-bit timer counters TC5 to TC10 are set. The head address may be read out, but the remaining addresses may be derived each time by calculation using a timer address.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the demonstration display process (step S6219) is set separately from the special figure special power control process (step S6216), but the present invention is not limited to this. The display process may be included in the special figure special electric control process. In this case, since the demonstration display is executed in a situation where the effect for game rotation is not executed and the opening / closing execution mode is not executed, the demonstration display process is included in the special figure variation start process in step S7307. In addition, it may be configured such that the processing from step S8202 to step S8208 of the demonstration display processing is executed in a situation where the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “0” and the hold information is not acquired.

  ・ Numerical information of special figure special electricity counter is set to be in ascending order according to the progression order for each division of a series of game situations composed of game play effects and opening / closing execution mode The interval of the numerical information of each process related to the status of each category may be configured not to be “1”. In this case, the interval of the numerical information may be the same numerical value of “2” or more, and the numerical value may be irregular every processing. However, in order to simplify the process related to the updating of the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, a configuration in which the interval of the numerical information is the same numerical value is preferable. The same applies to the numerical information of the ordinary-use ordinary power counter.

  ・ Numerical information of special figure special electricity counter is set to be descending in accordance with the progression order for each division of a series of game situations composed of game play effects and opening / closing execution mode It is good. In this case, the interval of the numerical information of each process related to the status of each division may be “1”, or may be a numerical value of “2” or more.

  In addition, the numerical information may be set irregularly with respect to the progress order of each situation instead of regular ascending order or descending order. In this case, in each process of step S7307 to step S7313, it is necessary to add or subtract a numerical value corresponding to the situation of the transition destination to the special figure special electricity counter.

  In the configuration in which the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is set to the low frequency support mode regardless of the game result that triggered the transition in the opening / closing execution mode or the game state immediately before it, It may be configured to determine whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect by determining whether or not the numerical information of the special figure special power counter is “3” or more in the ordinary power control process (step S6217). Even in the opening / closing execution mode, during the ending period, in the configuration where the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode according to the game result that triggered the transition and the previous game state, When it is confirmed that the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is “3” or more and “5” or less in the control process, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode and is confirmed to be “6”. In this case, the support mode may be set to the high frequency support mode. In these cases, it is possible to control the electric accessory 34a using the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, and determine whether it is included in three or more kinds of situations by using the numerical information of 1. It can be grasped by referring to or by referring to the numerical information of 2, and the processing load at the time of the determination can be reduced.

  -Special conditions when additional conditions such as a game ball winning in a predetermined winning part such as the operating ports 33, 34 are established in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed and an opening / closing execution mode is being opened. It is good also as a structure by which an effect is performed. In this case, by confirming that the special figure special electricity counter is not less than “1” and not more than “3”, the situation is either during execution of the effect for game rotation or opening of the opening / closing execution mode. I can understand.

  The numerical information of the special figure special power counter is individually set for the special power open process (step S7311) and the special power close process (step S7312), but instead, the special power open process and special power The closed process may be configured as one process in which only one piece of numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is set. In this case, when updating the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter, only 1 addition or initialization needs to be executed, so that the processing related to the update can be simplified.

  By the way, by applying this configuration to a configuration in which the numerical information setting of the special figure special counter is set in descending order with respect to the progression order of each situation, when updating the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter Only one subtraction or initialization need be executed.

  The numerical information of the special figure special power counter is individually set for the special figure changing process (step S7308) and the special figure finalizing process (step S7309). The process and the special figure determination process may be configured as one process in which only one piece of numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter is set.

  In addition, the special electric fluctuation processing is classified into non-reach processing and processing after reach occurrence, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is individually set for each processing. Good.

  In addition, the special electric release opening process is divided into a process when the open time is long and a process when the open time is short, and the numerical information of the special figure special electric counter is individually set for each of these processes. It is good also as composition which has.

  -The process for updating the numerical information of the special figure special electricity counter may be set separately from the processes in steps S7307 to S7313. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the process which updates a special figure special electricity timer counter is included in each process of step S7307-step S7313, respectively.

  The allowance reference number that triggers switching from the LOW level to the HI level of the payout permission signal in the payout side MPU 362 is a number that is larger than the minimum number of winning balls for one winning, and the next largest number of winning balls or The number may be smaller than the maximum number of winning balls. In this case, even if three prize ball commands are output from the main MPU 202, a situation may occur in which the payout permission signal cannot be switched to the LOW level. Therefore, when three prize ball commands are output, the main MPU 202 may not perform the disconnection confirmation process. However, since it is preferable that the disconnection confirmation process is executed in a normal gaming state that is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the permitted reference number is a pitching portion (for example, a general game part in which a winning can occur even in the normal gaming state) It is preferable that the number is smaller than the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening 31).

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the following other forms with respect to embodiment different from embodiment illustrated as application object.

  (1) In the first to seventh embodiments, the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice can be restricted when the success / failure determination process is executed within the range of one process of the normal process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the confirmation process for holding notice is executed within the range of one process of the normal process, the execution of the determination process may be limited. However, since this pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not to give a profit to the player in the success / failure determination process, if the execution of the determination process is restricted, the player can obtain the profit that should have been originally obtained. The inconvenience of not being able to occur. In this regard, it is preferable to limit the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice without limiting the execution of the success / failure determination process as in the above embodiments.

  Note that a configuration using a restriction flag is conceivable as a specific configuration for limiting the execution of the success / failure determination process. In addition, as a method for restricting the execution of the success / failure determination process, a configuration in which the determination process is not performed for predetermined hold information, or the determination process for the predetermined hold information is not executed once, but the determination process is executed after that. In other words, a configuration in which the determination process is executed by referring to only a part of the jackpot value information for the predetermined hold information is conceivable.

  (2) In the first to seventh embodiments described above, a predetermined special process different from the validity determination process and a confirmation process for holding notice are executed in duplicate within the range of one process of the normal process. It is good also as a structure restrict | limited so that it may not be performed. In this case, when the special process is executed within the range of one process of the normal process, the execution of the confirmation process for the notice of hold may be limited. When the confirmation process for notice is executed, the special process may be restricted from being executed. Note that, as the special process, for example, a process of opening a lottery in a process for supporting a role and a process of shifting to an opening / closing execution mode in a game state transition process can be considered.

  (3) In the first to seventh embodiments, the execution of a process subject to restriction such as a confirmation process for a hold notice may be restricted until the restriction release condition is satisfied after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It is good also as a structure. For example, the restriction flag is stored when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on and the main process is executed, and the restriction flag is stored and held until the erasing timing as described in the above embodiments. Good. In addition, a restriction flag is stored when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and is stored and retained even when the power is cut off by the backup power. After the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, up to the erasing timing as shown in the above embodiments. The restriction flag may be stored and held. This configuration is effective when applied to a configuration in which the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted even if the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode.

  (4) In the first to seventh embodiments described above, the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted on the condition that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. However, the present invention is limited to this. There is also a configuration in which the confirmation process for holding notice is limited even if the winning / no-win lottery mode is the low probability mode.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the second embodiment, or the third embodiment, the validity determination process and the confirmation process for holding notice are both part of the timer interrupt process. It may be configured to be executed. In addition, both the success / failure determination process and the confirmation process for holding notice may be executed as part of the normal process. Furthermore, in a configuration in which normal processing and timer interrupt processing are not differentiated and are executed each time a single series of processing is executed, the determination as a part of the series of processing is a pass / fail judgment. It is good also as a structure by which both the process and the confirmation process for a hold notice are performed. In any of the above cases, the processing configuration for storing and erasing the restriction flag in the fifth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, or the seventh embodiment may be applied.

  (6) In the first to seventh embodiments, the reading process is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process, and the confirmation process for holding notice is executed as a part of the normal process. Also good. In this configuration, the hold information is acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the holding information is acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 34 until the execution timing of the confirmation process for the holding notice. In such a case, the confirmation process for holding notice is executed for each piece of holding information, so that the setting process for holding notice for each piece of holding information can be executed at an early stage.

  However, in this configuration, if the success / failure determination process and the confirmation process for holding notice are executed together within the range of one process of the normal process, the processing time of one process of the normal process becomes extremely long. It can be considered. Therefore, even in such a configuration, it is preferable to apply the limiting configurations in the first to seventh embodiments.

  (7) The processing performed within the remaining period of 4 msec in the normal processing such as the first embodiment is not limited to the update processing of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. Any one of these update processes may be used, and any one of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variation type counter CS, and the electric accessory release counter C4. One update process may be executed, or an update process of a predetermined combination of these counters may be executed. Further, instead of or in addition to the counter update process, another process such as an abnormality detection process may be executed.

  Further, the processing performed in the remaining period between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing such as the fifth embodiment is limited to the update processing of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS. For example, any one of these update processes may be performed, and the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the random number initial value counter CINI, the variation type counter CS, and the electric combination The configuration may be such that any one of the object release counters C4 is updated, or a predetermined combination of the counters is updated. Further, instead of or in addition to the counter update process, another process such as an abnormality detection process may be executed.

  (8) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the reservation notice is made in the individual display area such as the hold display area Ga as in each of the above-described embodiments. In this case, the design may be made such that the advance notice is made by changing the display mode of the symbol and the aspect of the character or the like displayed in association with the design to be the advance notice mode.

  Specifically, when the display control device 212 determines that the hold information to be confirmed in the confirmation process for the hold notice corresponds to the jackpot winning, the display control apparatus 212 executes the hold notice. A configuration may be considered in which the display mode on the symbol display device 41 in the game times executed before the hold information set as a trigger is set as a trigger, and the display mode for the hold notice is set. As a display mode for such a hold notice, a configuration in which a predetermined notification image is displayed during the symbol change display, or a configuration in which the stop result of the symbol change display is a stop result corresponding to the hold notice is conceivable.

  More specifically, the main control device 81 performs confirmation processing for hold notice and transmits a match hold command from the main control device 81, so that the display control device 212 holds the match related to transmission of the match hold command. It is determined whether or not the information is set as a trigger for execution of the hold notice, and the trigger information is stored when it is determined that the information is set as a trigger for execution. In the situation where the trigger information is stored, the display mode for the hold notice is displayed in the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the determination before or after the hold information set as the trigger of the hold notice. Display.

  Even with the above-described configuration, it is preferable that both the confirmation process for holding notice and the success / failure determination process are executed within the range of one processing process such as a normal process or a timer interrupt process in the main controller 81. Absent. Therefore, as in the first to seventh embodiments, the execution of the confirmation process for the hold notice can be limited within the range of one process of the progress process in which the success / failure determination process is executed. It is preferable.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which performs an advance notice with the alerting | reporting apparatus different from the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG. For example, a configuration may be used in which a holding notice is given on a display device different from the symbol display device 41, or a holding notice may be given by outputting a predetermined sound from the speaker unit 64. It is good also as a structure which carries out a hold notice by making this light-emit.

  (9) The configuration of another form of (8) may be applied to the eighth to eighteenth embodiments. More specifically, when the main control device 81 performs a hold notice confirmation process and transmits a hold command, the display control apparatus 212 uses the hold information relating to the transmission of the hold command to trigger execution of the hold notice. It is determined whether or not to set, and when it is determined to set as an execution trigger, the trigger information is stored. And in the situation where the hold information is stored, the display mode for the hold notice is displayed at the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the determination of the success before the hold information set as the trigger of the hold notice. Display.

  Incidentally, in the 11th to 13th and 16th to 17th embodiments, the upper hold command corresponding to the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 and the lower hold command corresponding to the hold information related to the lower operation port 34; Are each transmitted. Therefore, when applying a configuration in which a hold notice is performed as an effect during game play that is executed before the hold information set as a trigger for the hold notice as described above, It is good also as a structure which carries out a hold notice in the aspect which a player can recognize which hold information and the hold information which concerns on the lower operation opening 34 are the triggers of execution, and predetermined hold information is a trigger of execution of a hold notice In a situation where it has already been set, it may be configured that the newly acquired hold information is restricted from being set as a trigger for executing the hold notice.

  Even with the above configuration, it is preferable that the hold notice is executed while ensuring the execution of the periodic process in the main controller 81 well. Accordingly, it is preferable that a configuration for executing the confirmation process for the hold notice and the process related to the output setting of the hold command is executed in the remaining process as in the eighth to eighteenth embodiments.

  Further, in the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, the hold command includes information on whether or not there is a jackpot result, information on the jackpot type if it is a jackpot result, and information on whether or not reach occurs if it is a missed result. And variation type information. Therefore, a plurality of types of display modes, such as a presentation video and characters for a hold notification, are prepared in advance as display modes for the hold notification, and are selected according to the jackpot type, the presence / absence of reach, and the variation type. It is possible to configure different types of display modes for holding notices, and the selection rate of each display mode for holding notices is different according to the jackpot type, the presence of reach, and the variation type. A configuration may be adopted.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure which performs an advance notice with the alerting | reporting apparatus different from the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG. For example, a configuration may be used in which a holding notice is given on a display device different from the symbol display device 41, or a holding notice may be given by outputting a predetermined sound from the speaker unit 64. It is good also as a structure which carries out a hold notice by making this light-emit.

  (10) In the first to seventh embodiments, the main control device 81 transmits the information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 as it is to a sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 82 or the display control device 212, The sub-side control device may be configured to execute a confirmation process for holding notice. Even in this case, if both the confirmation process for holding notice and the other special processes are executed within the range of one processing process of the advance process in the sub-side control device, the advance process 1 There is a concern that the processing time required for the processing time may be prolonged. Therefore, when the special process is executed within the range of one process of the advance process, the execution of the confirmation process for the holding notice can be limited, or within the range of one process of the process of the advance When the confirmation process for holding notice is executed, the special process may be restricted from being executed. In addition, as a special process, the process which determines the effect content of 1 game time in the sub-side control apparatus, for example, the process which determines the fluctuation | variation display mode of a symbol more specifically, can be considered.

  Further, in the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, the main control device 81 uses the information used for executing the hold notice among the obtained hold information as it is, such as the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212. It is good also as a structure which transmits to the control apparatus of this, and performs the confirmation process for a hold notice in the sub-side control apparatus. Even in this case, when the sub-side control device is configured to execute the periodic process and the remaining process as in the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, the periodic process is periodically executed. It is not preferable that it disappears. Therefore, in the configuration in which the processing configuration in the sub-side control device is composed of the periodic processing and the residual processing, the processing related to the command reception confirmation and the execution setting of the effect is executed in the periodic processing, and the pending processing is used for the pending notice. It is preferable that the confirmation process is executed.

  (11) In the second embodiment, when execution of the confirmation process for holding notice is restricted, the result of processing when the waiting process is executed without transmitting any holding command after that. It may be configured to transmit a command corresponding to the above. Further, even if the hold information is newly acquired during the period from the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice to the time when the waiting process is executed, the waiting process may be executed. In this case, the display control device 212 needs a configuration for clearly distinguishing the hold information that is the target of the standby process from the newly acquired hold information.

  (12) In each of the above embodiments, it goes without saying that the number of jackpot value information set for the high probability mode may be other than ten, for example, twenty. Needless to say, the number of jackpot value information set for the low probability mode may be plural as long as it is smaller than the number of jackpot value information set for the high probability mode.

  (13) In the first to seventh embodiments described above, only the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 is confirmed when setting the hold notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 and numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 may be confirmed. Also, in the game times that will be a big win, if the reach display is generated as a variable display pattern of the symbols in the symbol display device 41, regardless of whether the hold information corresponds to the big win. It may be configured to confirm whether or not the information corresponding to the reach display is included in the hold information and to notify the presence or absence of the reach in the hold notice. Further, not only the presence / absence of the occurrence of reach but also the information on the variable display time may be confirmed by the hold command setting process. In this case, the type of reach display or the like can be notified as a hold notice.

  In each of the above configurations, the hold command setting process not only checks whether the hold information corresponds to jackpot numerical information, but also checks whether the hold information corresponds to reach occurrence numerical information and holds information. It is necessary to check which variable display time corresponds to. Then, if the success / failure determination process and the confirmation process for the hold notice are executed within the range of one process of the advance process such as the normal process or the timer interrupt process, the process time of the advance process becomes longer. . On the other hand, it is preferable that the execution of the confirmation process for holding notice be restricted as in the first to seventh embodiments.

  (14) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, in setting the hold notice, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is obtained from the jackpot random number counter C1 as in the first to seventh embodiments. It is good also as a structure by which only the numerical information performed is confirmed. In this case, as the hold notice, the hold notice may be executed so that the possibility of occurrence of the jackpot result is notified step by step. In addition, by holding the hold notice for the hold information corresponding to the miss result with a predetermined probability, the hold notice will be executed in both cases of the jackpot result and the miss result. It is possible to prevent the execution of the hold notice from being uniquely associated with the occurrence of the jackpot result.

  The numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 and the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 may be confirmed. In this case, it is possible to notify the contents corresponding to the type of the jackpot result as the hold notice. The numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 and the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 may be confirmed. In this case, the hold notice is executed with a predetermined probability for the hold information that is a jackpot result or the hold information that is a missed reach, and when the hold notice is executed, the reach is displayed at the corresponding game times. Will occur at least. The numerical information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2, and the numerical information acquired from the reach random number counter C3 may be confirmed.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot value information in the low probability mode is included in the jackpot value information in the high probability mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot value information in the low probability mode is It is good also as a structure which is not contained in the jackpot numerical value information in high probability mode.

  (16) In each of the above embodiments, the number of jackpot value information to be referred to in the processing program of the success / failure determination process and the hold command setting process is specified, but the present invention is not limited to this. A designating table for designating the number of jackpot value information to be referenced may be prepared separately, and the address information to be referred to in the designating table may be designated in the success / failure determination process or the hold command setting process. . In this case, in the success / failure determination process and the hold command setting process, the comparison process with the hold information is executed with reference to the number of jackpot value information read from the designation table. Further, the designating table may be included in the success / failure table.

  (17) In each of the above-described embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between a state in which a hold advance notice can be performed and a state in which the hold advance notice is disabled is performed. In this case, the main body that performs the switching may be any of the main control device 81, the sound lamp control device 82, and the display control device 212. In addition, regarding the timing of switching, it is optional as long as a predetermined advance start condition is satisfied and a hold advance notice can be performed, and a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the hold advance notice is disabled. For example, if a lottery is allowed and a lottery is not allowed, a preliminary announcement can be made if the winning lottery results, and a preliminary notice is not possible if the winning lottery results. You may comprise so that it may become.

  (18) In the first to tenth embodiments, the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 are stored separately, and the lower working port A configuration in which the hold information related to winning a prize 34 is preferentially digested may be applied. Moreover, in each said embodiment, you may apply the structure on which the hold information concerning the winning to the upper working port 33 is digested preferentially. In these cases, the hold information of the former is set as the trigger for the execution of the hold notice among the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper operating port 33 and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operating port 34. The latter hold information may be set as a trigger for execution of the hold notice, and any hold information may be set as a trigger for execution of the hold notice.

  In addition, when applying a configuration in which the hold information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is preferentially digested, the hold notice is made for the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33, and the hold notice In not only the information that will win the jackpot, in the high probability mode information that will win the jackpot, in the low probability mode information that will win the jackpot, either high probability mode or low probability mode Even if it exists, it is good also as a structure which alert | reports the information to the effect of winning a jackpot, or the information to win a jackpot only in any one of high probability mode and low probability mode. Of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, by applying the above-described holding notice configuration in a configuration in which the holding information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is prioritized when determining whether or not the game is successful, Depending on the content of the launch handle, the launch handle is expected in the hope that the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 will be stored so that the hold information related to the hold notice is not subject to the determination of success or failure. 54 can be selected, and the firing handle 54 can be operated so that no further winnings to the lower operating port 34 occur so that the hold information related to the hold notice becomes the target of the success / failure determination. A mode of canceling can be selected.

  In particular, when the above configuration is applied to a configuration in which the lower working port 34 is not provided with the electric accessory 34a and the winning frequency does not depend on the gaming state in both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, the gaming state Regardless of the above, it is possible to provide the above game to the player.

  Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operation ports are not arranged vertically, but the first operation port corresponding to the upper operation port 33 and the second operation port corresponding to the lower operation port 34 are arranged on the left and right. It is good also as a structure arranged in parallel, It is good also as a structure in which these both operation ports were arranged in parallel diagonally. Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which arrange | positions both operation openings apart so that only the winning to the 1st operation opening or the winning to the 2nd operation opening can be aimed according to the operation mode of the launching handle 54. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to aim for only one winning of the first operating port or the second operating port in accordance with the hold notice.

  Moreover, when applying the said structure to the said 1st-10th embodiment, it is the 1st which displays on the main display part 43 the result of the success / failure determination of the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 You may provide a display area and the 2nd display area which displays the result of determination of the success / failure of the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower operation mouth 34. In this case, the change display of the pattern in the first display area is based on whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. Is started and a stop result corresponding to the determination of the success / failure is displayed, and the change display for one game time is ended. In addition, the change display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area based on whether the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is the target of the determination of the success or failure. At the same time, the stop result corresponding to the determination of success / failure is displayed, and the display of the variation of one game time is ended.

  (19) In the first to tenth embodiments described above, when the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 is a target of the determination of success / failure, and when the holding information related to winning in the lower working port 34 is determined whether or not It is good also as a structure from which the profit which a player obtains differs with the case where it becomes the object of determination. For example, in the configuration in which the hold information related to the winning to the lower working port 34 is preferentially digested as in (18) above, the holding information related to the winning to the lower working port 34 is the target of the success / failure determination. The case may be configured to be more advantageous to the player than the case where the hold information related to winning in the upper operating port 33 where the execution of the determination is not prioritized is the target of the determination.

  In setting the advantageous state in this way, for example, the probability of winning a big hit when the hold information related to winning in the lower operating port 34 is a target of the success / failure determination is set as the holding related to winning in the upper operating port 33. A configuration may be adopted in which the information is set to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the case where the information is determined to be a winner. In addition, when the hold information related to the winning to the lower operating port 34 is a jackpot winning, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is the jackpot result when the holding information related to the winning to the upper operating port 33 is a jackpot winning It is good also as a structure set so that it may become more advantageous than the distribution destination of.

  More specifically, the jackpot result that is not set as the jackpot result for the winning of the upper working port 33 is set in the jackpot result for the winning of the lower working port 34. It is possible that the jackpot result is set so that the former is more advantageous than the latter, and the lower action is applied to the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to the winning to the upper working port 33. A jackpot result that is not set is set in the distribution destination of the jackpot result related to winning in the mouth 34, and the latter is more advantageous than the former because the jackpot result is set. It is good. In addition, you may apply the said structure with respect to the said 11th-18th embodiment. Furthermore, the type of the jackpot result allocation destination related to the winning to the upper working port 33 and the type of jackpot result allocation destination related to the winning to the lower working port 34 are set to be the same. At the same time, the winning to the lower working port 34 may be configured such that the probability of allocating an advantageous jackpot result is set higher than the winning to the upper working port 33.

  According to the above configuration, the advantage of generating a prize for the lower working port 34 is enhanced as compared to the case where a prize for the upper working port 33 is generated. In the configuration in which the hold information acquired by winning the winning of the lower operating port 34 is preferentially determined whether or not the winning is given to the lower operating port 34, the advantage set for the lower operating port 34 is determined. Sex will be given to the player with priority. As a result, a clear difference is provided in the functions of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, and the player is expected to win a prize for the lower operating port 34 rather than a prize for the upper operating port 33. As a result, diversification of games is achieved.

  Further, in the configuration in which a plurality of operation ports are provided as in the above embodiments, the number of operation ports is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with only one working port.

  (20) It is possible to adopt a configuration in which only a single success / failure lottery mode is set, and a plurality of types of jackpot value information are set for the success / failure lottery mode, instead of multiple stages of the success / failure lottery mode. .

  (21) In each of the above-described embodiments, even in a situation where a hold notice has already been made, a hold notice can be started with respect to hold information acquired based on a new winning to the operation ports 33 and 34. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a new hold notice is not started in a situation where a hold notice has already been made. That is, when hold information is acquired based on a new winning to the operation ports 33 and 34, it is determined that the hold notice has already been executed and means for determining whether or not the hold notice has already been executed. In this case, a configuration may be provided that includes means for restricting the hold notice from being executed for the hold information acquired based on the new winning. In this case, a plurality of pending notices are not executed at the same time, and the degree of attention to each pending notice can be increased.

  (22) In each of the above embodiments, when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the main control device 81 and no hold notice is executed for the hold information, the operation port 33 is used. , 34 may be configured such that the hold notice is not started for the hold information acquired based on the new winning. That is, means for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included in the already stored hold information when the hold information is acquired based on a new winning to the operation ports 33 and 34. And a means for restricting the hold notice from being executed for the hold information acquired based on the new winning when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included. Also good. In this case, even if the hold notice is not executed for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning, it is regulated that the hold notice is executed for other hold information, and the degree of attention to the hold notice is increased. It becomes possible.

  (23) In the first to seventh embodiments described above, with respect to the hold information that is the target of the determination in advance in the situation where the hold notice is executed in the plurality of unit hold display areas in the hold display area Ga When a transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, a hold notice for the hold information that is to be determined later is a predetermined timing in the open / close execution mode or the end of the open / close execution mode. At this time, the configuration may be terminated (that is, the configuration having a cancellation notice canceling means). In this case, when a transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the execution status of the hold notice can be reset once.

  (24) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, the hold command setting process (in the first to thirteenth and sixteenth to seventeenth embodiments, the upper hold command setting process and the lower hold command setting). In the middle of (processing), an interrupt permission setting may be once set, and an interrupt prohibition setting may be set again. In the eighth embodiment and the eleventh embodiment, it is determined whether it is time to start the first process of the normal process when the interrupt permission is once set. It is good. According to the above configuration, it becomes easy to regularly perform main processing of timer interrupt processing and normal processing.

  By the way, the timing to set interrupt permission once during the pending command setting process is such that when a plurality of types of processes are executed step by step in the pending command setting process, the process at the predetermined stage ends. It is preferably set before the next stage of processing is started. For example, in the case of the eighth embodiment, it may be configured to temporarily set interrupt permission at the timing when an affirmative determination is made in step S3209, and once interrupt permission is set at the timing when a negative determination is made in step S3211. It is good also as a structure to perform.

  (25) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, the pending command setting process (the upper pending command setting process and the lower pending command setting in the first to thirteenth and sixteenth to seventeenth embodiments) It is also possible to set the interrupt permission in the middle of the processing) and then maintain the state where the interrupt permission is set until the pending command setting process is completed. In this case, when timer interrupt processing is executed in a state where the interrupt permission is set, it may be configured to return to the processing address after completion of the pending command setting processing after execution of the timer interrupt processing. .

  (26) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, the interrupt prohibition setting and the interrupt permission setting are performed with the update process of the random number initial value counter CINI being interposed therebetween, and the update process of the variation type counter CS is A configuration may be adopted in which interrupt prohibition setting and interrupt permission setting are performed so as to be sandwiched between them. In this case, it is easy to perform timer interrupt processing periodically.

  (27) In the eighth embodiment and the eleventh embodiment, it is determined whether it is time to start the first process of the normal process at a plurality of locations in the residual process (that is, the current process). A determination may be made as to whether or not 4 msec have elapsed since the start of normal processing.

  For example, in the eighth embodiment, the above determination may be performed not only in step S2607 but also between step S2610 and step S2611. In the eleventh embodiment, not only the determination is performed in step S3907 but also the determination is performed between step S3910 and step S3911, and between step S3914 and step S3915. It is good also as a structure which performs the said determination by. That is, in a configuration in which interrupt prohibition is set after a predetermined period after interrupt permission is set, the determination may be performed during the predetermined period.

  Further, in the eighth embodiment and the eleventh embodiment, when the timer interrupt process is executed in a situation where the remaining process is being executed, the above determination is made at the end of the timer interrupt process. It is good also as a structure.

  According to each said structure, it becomes easy to perform regularly the process of step S2601-step S2606 in the said 8th Embodiment, and the process of step S3901-step S3906 in the said 11th Embodiment.

  (28) In the eleventh embodiment, interrupt prohibition setting and interrupt permission setting are performed with the upper hold command setting process in between, and an interrupt is performed with the lower hold command setting process in between. The configuration is to set prohibition and interrupt permission, but for the setting process of one hold command, the setting of interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission is set in between, and the setting process of the other hold command is set A configuration in which interrupt prohibition is not set may be performed. In this case, it is easy to perform timer interrupt processing periodically.

  By the way, in the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode, the game is more likely to be monotonous in the low frequency support mode. When paying attention to such a problem, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the hold notice for the hold information related to the upper operating port 33 in which a situation in which a plurality of pieces of hold information are stored simultaneously is likely to occur even in the low frequency support mode. preferable. In this case, the upper hold command setting process is set so that interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission are set in between, and the lower hold command setting process is performed without interrupt prohibition setting. Good.

  (29) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, when the plurality of jackpot value information and the hold information are checked as the confirmation process for the hold notice, all of the check processes are performed by the remaining process. Instead of this, instead of this, some collation information of multiple jackpot information is executed in the timer interrupt processing or regular processing periodically executed, and the remaining collation is in the remaining processing It is good also as a structure to perform. In this case, the part of the collation result is stored and held until the remaining collation is started in the remaining process, and the process related to the output setting of the hold command is executed after the remaining collation is completed. It is good also as composition to do.

  (30) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, among the numerical information included in the hold information, numerical information related to the jackpot random number counter C1, numerical information related to the big hit type counter C2, and numerical values related to the reach random number counter C3 Although all the verification of the numerical information related to the information and the variation type counter CS is performed by the residual processing, instead of this, the timer interrupt processing and the regular processing are periodically performed for partial verification of each of the numerical information. It is good also as a structure which performs by the process performed by this and performs by a residual process about the remaining collation.

  (31) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, the counter update processing timing is set to be later than the pending command setting processing timing in the residual processing. A configuration may be adopted in which the processing timing of the update processing comes first.

  (32) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, when the hold information is acquired, the acquisition command is first set for output, and the same hold information is held when the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed. Although the configuration is such that the command output setting is performed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the command output setting at the time of acquisition is not performed. However, when the configuration is applied to a configuration in which the number of the hold information needs to be grasped by the control device on the sub side, when the hold information is acquired, new hold information is acquired. It is preferable that the output of the hold command is set for the acquired hold information at the previous timing.

  (33) In the eighth to tenth, fourteenth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are replaced with a configuration in which detection sensors are provided individually. Both the game ball that has passed through the operation port 33 and the game ball that has passed through the lower operation port 34 pass through the same discharge passage part, and a detection sensor is provided in the discharge passage part. Good. In this case, the game ball won in the upper operation port 33 and the game ball won in the lower operation port 34 are not detected at the same time, and detection of the front game ball among a plurality of consecutive game balls is completed. The time from when the hold information is acquired until the detection of the backside game ball is started until the processing related to the hold notice confirmation processing and the output setting of the hold command is completed. By setting the time longer than the longest time assumed, it is not necessary to provide a holding number counter.

  (34) As in the above eighth to tenth, fourteenth to fifteenth, and eighteenth embodiments, in the configuration where the acquired hold information is not distinguished even if the operation port that triggered it is different, It is good also as a structure provided with three or more operation ports which became an opportunity of acquisition of holding | maintenance information, and were provided with the detection sensor separately. In this case, there is a higher possibility that a plurality of pieces of hold information have been acquired before the hold command setting process is executed.

  Incidentally, in a configuration in which a plurality of detection sensors that trigger acquisition of the same type of hold information are individually provided, regardless of the minimum period required to acquire one piece of hold information, the process related to the hold notice (hold command A plurality of pieces of hold information that can be the target before the setting process is executed can be acquired. Accordingly, in the configuration as described above, as in the tenth embodiment, only the hold information acquired earlier is the execution target of the process related to the hold notice, as in the eighth embodiment. A configuration in which only the hold information acquired later is set as an execution target of the process related to the hold notice, and each hold information is set as an execution target of the process related to the hold notice as in the fourteenth embodiment, and one hold notice is given. In such processing, it is preferable to apply any one of the configurations in which only one piece of hold information is an execution target.

  (35) A configuration in which only one detection sensor that is an opportunity to acquire the same type of hold information is provided, and the remaining processing is repeatedly executed in the remaining time of the normal processing that is periodically executed. In a configuration in which timer interrupt processing is started so as to periodically interrupt processing, the minimum number of execution times of normal processing required to acquire the same type of hold information is equal to or greater than the number of types of hold information + 1. For example, even if the execution cycle of the normal process is set to a cycle that permits one execution of the success / failure determination process in the high probability mode but does not allow two executions, the process related to the hold notice (setting the hold command) A plurality of pieces of hold information that can be the target are not acquired until the processing is executed.

  For example, in the eleventh embodiment, the minimum number of executions of the normal process required to acquire the hold information related to the upper operation port 33 is three times, and the hold information related to the lower operation port 34 is acquired. If the minimum number of execution times of the normal process required is 3, the change start process in the high probability mode is executed within the range of the predetermined process time of the normal process, and the hold information and the lower operation related to the upper operation port 33 are executed. Even when both of the hold information related to the mouth 34 are acquired, each of the above-described hold information until the new acquisition of the hold information related to the upper working port 33 and the new acquisition of the hold information related to the lower working port 34 are performed. The execution of the processing related to the hold notice can be completed for each of the above. Therefore, there is no need to execute a process corresponding to the fact that a plurality of pieces of the same type of hold information can be stored (in the eleventh embodiment, a process using the upper process wait flag and the lower process wait flag). The processing load on the MPU 202 can be reduced.

  By the way, in the configuration where there are three operating ports and the hold information acquired with the winning of each operating port is treated separately, the shortest normal processing required to acquire the hold information related to each operating port The number of times of execution may be four or more.

  (36) In the configuration of (35) above, the execution cycle of the normal process allows execution for a prescribed number of times (two or more) of the success / failure determination process in the high probability mode, and “number of types of hold information + 1” If the minute is not allowed, if the minimum number of executions of normal processing required to acquire the same type of hold information is greater than or equal to “number of types of hold information + 1” / “specified number of times”, the process related to hold notice is executed A plurality of hold information that can be the target will not be acquired until it is done. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary to execute a process (a process using the upper process wait flag and the lower process wait flag in the eleventh embodiment) corresponding to the fact that the same type of hold information can be stored. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 202 can be reduced.

  (37) In the configuration in which only one detection sensor is provided as an opportunity to acquire the same type of hold information, there is no normal process, and the remaining time of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed In the configuration in which the remaining processing is repeatedly executed, if the minimum number of executions of the timer interrupt processing required to acquire the same type of hold information is equal to or greater than the “number of types of hold information + 1”, the timer interrupt processing execution cycle However, even if the execution determination process in the high-probability mode is permitted to be performed once but is not permitted to be performed twice, the suspension information that can be the target before the process related to the suspension notice is performed. Is not acquired more than once. Such an event has occurred in the twelfth embodiment. In such a configuration, it is necessary to execute a process (a process using the upper process wait flag and the lower process wait flag in the eleventh embodiment) corresponding to the fact that a plurality of pieces of the same type of hold information can be stored. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 202 can be reduced.

  By the way, in the configuration in which there are three operating ports and the hold information acquired when winning for each operating port is handled separately, the timer interrupt processing required to acquire the hold information related to each operating port is performed. The shortest number of executions may be four or more.

  (38) In the configuration of (37) above, the execution period of the timer interrupt process allows execution for a prescribed number of times (two or more) of the success / failure determination process in the high probability mode, and “number of types of hold information + 1 If the minimum number of executions of timer interrupt processing required to acquire the same type of hold information is greater than or equal to “number of types of hold information + 1” / “specified number”, the processing related to the hold notice A plurality of pieces of hold information that can be the target are not acquired before the is executed. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary to execute a process (a process using the upper process wait flag and the lower process wait flag in the eleventh embodiment) corresponding to the fact that the same type of hold information can be stored. Therefore, the processing load on the MPU 202 can be reduced.

  (39) In the fourteenth embodiment, an area for storing information corresponding to the hold information is prepared for the hold upper limit number in order to execute the process related to the hold notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a maximum number of areas in which the target hold information can be acquired before the process related to the hold notice is executed. In this case, the storage capacity required in the RAM 204 can be suppressed.

  (40) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, after execution of the timer interrupt process interrupted in the residual process, the random number initial value counter CINI is first updated regardless of the processing address of the residual process when interrupted. It may be configured to execute. In this case, after execution of the update process, it may be configured to return to the process corresponding to the processing address at the time of interruption, or the process order in the residual process may execute the process after the update process. Good. By giving priority to the update process as described above, the function of the update process of the random number initial value counter CINI executed for the countermeasure against fraud is hindered due to the process related to the hold notice executed for the production. Can be suppressed. By the way, with regard to the update processing of the variation type counter CS that updates the random number information for production, the frequency of execution of the processing related to the pending notice is drastically reduced by adopting a configuration that does not preferentially handle as described above. Can be suppressed.

  (41) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, the timer interrupt process is not set, and a periodic process periodically executed as a series of processes and a predetermined process non-periodically executed It may be configured such that a hold command setting process is set for the predetermined process. For example, in the eighth embodiment, the regular processing including the processing of steps S2601 to S2606 in the normal processing (FIG. 38) and the processing of steps S2703 to S2708 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 39), and the normal processing It is good also as a structure by which the residual process including the process of step S2607-step S2614 in (FIG. 38) is set as a series of processes. In this configuration, in order to facilitate periodic processing, it is determined whether it is time to start the first processing of the periodic processing at a plurality of locations in the remaining processing as described in (27) above. (In other words, it is preferable that the determination is made as to whether or not 4 msec have elapsed since the start of the current normal process).

  (42) In the eighth to eighteenth embodiments, when referring to the jackpot value information in the confirmation process for holding notice, only a part of the jackpot value information referred to in the success / failure determination process is referred to. Also good.

  (43) In the eighth to seventeenth embodiments, instead of the configuration in which the hold information includes numerical information related to the variation type counter CS, the variation varies as in the first to seventh embodiments. A configuration may be adopted in which numerical information relating to the type counter CS is not included. In this case, it is not necessary to collate numerical information related to the variation type counter CS in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

  (44) In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the power interruption process is executed as the first half of the timer interrupt process. However, the power interruption process is performed as the second half of the timer interrupt process. It may be configured to execute.

  (45) In the above embodiments, the control subject of the holding lamp units 45, 46, 306, and 307 is not limited to the voice lamp control device 82, but may be the main control device 81.

  In addition, in each of the embodiments described above, the period at which the timer interrupt process is activated is not limited to 2 msec, and may be 4 msec, for example.

  (46) In the eleventh to thirteenth and sixteenth to seventeenth embodiments described above, the digestion order of the reserved information is made while the digestion order of the acquired reserved information is digested first from the previously acquired side. At this time, the target for which the number of reserved information is subtracted may be configured such that one of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 is given priority. In this case, as described in the 11th to 13th and 16th to 17th embodiments, when the reservation notice is to be made while clearly indicating the order in which the hold information is used as a trigger for the execution of the hold notice, For example, when a prize for the lower working port 34 is generated in a situation where the holding advance notice is executed on the upper working port 33 side which is a non-priority side, the contents of the digestion order which is informed and the actual notification The order in which the hold information is digested will not match. Therefore, in the said structure, it is preferable to set it as the structure which performs a reservation advance notice in the aspect which does not clearly show a digestion order like the structure of said (8), or a hold advance notice only about the lower operation opening 34 side which is a priority side.

  (47) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81. Instead, the main control device is used. The display control device 212 may be configured to control the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as a single sub-side control device. The functions of the sound lamp control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated into the main control device 81, and the functions of both the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are integrated into the main control device 81. It is good also as a structure.

  (48) The processing configuration for determining whether or not a prize has been generated for the upper operating port 33 and for determining whether or not a prize has been generated for the lower operating port 34 is provided in each of the above embodiments. The configuration is not limited and is arbitrary. For example, a current area, a previous area, and a previous area are provided in the register or RAM 204 of the MPU 202, and three input results of signals from the detection sensor are stored in these areas. Then, by calculating the information stored in these areas, whether or not the situation in which the winning signal is output following the situation in which the non-winning signal is output is continued over a plurality of confirmation timings. You may make it perform such specification. Specifically, information “0” is stored in the area corresponding to the timing when the input of the non-winning signal is confirmed, and information “1” is stored in the area corresponding to the timing when the input of the winning signal is confirmed. To be stored. When the logical product of the information obtained by inverting the information stored in the previous use area, the information stored in the previous use area, and the information stored in the current use area is “1”, It may be configured to specify that the situation in which the winning signal is output following the situation in which the winning signal is output is continued over a plurality of confirmation timings.

  (49) In each of the above-described embodiments, the condition for obtaining the hold information is that a winning to the operating ports 33 and 34 occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a winning is made to another winning part. It is good also as a structure by which pending | holding information is acquired based on having performed. In addition, the hold information is not acquired based on the fact that the game ball flowing down the game area has entered the predetermined entrance part, but the hold information is based on the operation part operated manually by the player. May be obtained.

  (50) A configuration in which the confirmation process for holding notice in the first to seventh embodiments is not performed, a configuration for waiting for the execution, and only a part of normal processing The following configuration may be applied instead of the configuration for executing the above. That is, as the processes executed in the main controller 81, a first repetition process that includes a plurality of types of processes and is repeatedly executed, and a second repetition process that includes a plurality of types of processes and is repeatedly executed are set. In addition, in the configuration in which the second iteration process is started after the first iteration process is completed and the first iteration process is started after the second iteration process is completed, either the first iteration process or the second iteration process is performed. It is good also as a structure in which the determination process for a failure notice is included as a part of process in, and the confirmation process for pending notice is included as a part of process in the other. In this case, the determination of success / failure is set while suppressing the time until one processing time of the first repetition processing is completed and the time until one processing time of the second repetition processing is increased. Can be done.

  (51) In each of the above embodiments, the setting process of the hold command is executed after the information acquired based on the winning to the operation ports 33 and 34 is stored as the hold information in the hold ball storage area 232. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting process of the hold command is after the information is acquired based on the winning to the operation ports 33 and 34, and the information is stored in the hold ball storage area 232 as the hold information. It may be configured to be executed before being stored.

  (52) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game turn in the main display unit 43 is started based on whether the main controller 81 determines whether or not the game is successful. However, the present invention is not limited to this. On the other hand, when the condition for determining whether or not the main control device 81 is satisfied is satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing when the determination is actually made, and the determination is made after that. The subsequent variation display pattern, variation display time, and stop result in the game time may be determined. In this case, the main control device 81 first transmits a change command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the change display time, and determines the type. The type command may be transmitted, and the transmission timing of the variable time command and the type command may be shifted. However, the timing at which the variation time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the symbol variation display is switched from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation in the symbol display device 41.

  (53) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Progress control means for controlling the progress of the game (mainly in the first to third embodiments, the normal process in the first to third embodiments, and the timer interrupt process in the fourth to sixth embodiments). MPU 202 of control device 81),
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of step S305 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored or stored in the acquired information storage means is the subject of the grant determination, the predetermined special information is the subject of the grant determination Destination specifying means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1104 to S1113 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for specifying at an earlier timing,
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In the case where a process that is not restricted among the specific process by the destination specifying unit and a predetermined special process different from the specific process is performed within the range of one process of the process for advancement Restriction means for restricting execution of the process to be restricted within the range of the one processing time (a function for executing the processes of steps S1101 to S1103 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not subject to the grant determination is a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. May be executed by the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, when a process that is not a restriction target among a specific process by the first specifying unit and a special process that is different from the specific process is performed within the range of one process of the advance process In some cases, execution of a process that is a restriction target may be restricted within the range of the one processing time. As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the processing for progress is completed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through execution of the special notification while ensuring good execution of the progress processing.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; , The “information acquisition means” is replaced with “a game ball in the starting pitching portion” instead of the “acquisition of special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”. The special information may be acquired based on the fact that the player entered the ball.

  In addition, “restricting execution of a process subject to restriction within the range of the one processing time” is not limited to a configuration that restricts the process subject to restriction to be executed, but is subject to restriction. A configuration is also included in which a part of the various processes that are executed at the time of unrestricted processing is restricted from being executed.

Feature A2. Progress control means for controlling the progress of the game (mainly in the first to third embodiments, the normal process in the first to third embodiments, and the timer interrupt process in the fourth to sixth embodiments). MPU 202 of control device 81),
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of step S305 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored or stored in the acquired information storage means is the subject of the grant determination, the predetermined special information is the subject of the grant determination Destination specifying means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1104 to S1113 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for specifying at an earlier timing,
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
If the process of the grant determination by the grant determination means and the process that is not subject to the restriction among the specific processes by the destination specifying means are performed within the range of one process of the process for advancement, the restriction target Limiting means for limiting the execution of the processing within the range of the one processing time (function for executing the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A2, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed by the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, if a process that is not subject to restriction among the process of grant determination by the grant determination means and the specific process by the destination specifying means is performed within the range of one processing step of the progress process, Execution of the current process within the range of the one process may be limited. As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the processing for progress is completed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through execution of the special notification while ensuring good execution of the progress processing.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; , The “information acquisition means” is replaced with “a game ball in the starting pitching portion” instead of the “acquisition of special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”. The special information may be acquired based on the fact that the player entered the ball.

  In addition, “restricting execution of a process subject to restriction within the range of the one processing time” is not limited to a configuration that restricts the process subject to restriction to be executed, but is subject to restriction. A configuration is also included in which a part of the various processes that are executed at the time of unrestricted processing is restricted from being executed.

Feature A3. Progress control means for controlling the progress of the game (mainly in the first to third embodiments, the normal process in the first to third embodiments, and the timer interrupt process in the fourth to sixth embodiments). MPU 202 of control device 81),
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined numerical information from numerical information in a predetermined range as special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the process of step S305 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). Function to execute)
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant information storage means (presence / absence table storage area 221) for pre-store grant information corresponding to any of the numerical information in the predetermined range;
While determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the additional information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination with respect to a plurality of special information (a function of executing the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The grant information storage means stores a plurality of kinds of grant information that is referred to by the grant determination means in at least a specific situation.
The grant determination means refers to all of the plurality of types of grant information when the grant determination is performed at least in the specific situation, and the special information that is the determination target corresponds to any grant information It is assumed that the result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result,
Furthermore, by referring to the plurality of types of grant information in the specific situation, a determination result in a case where predetermined special information stored or stored in the acquired information storage means is the subject of the grant determination. In addition to specifying the information to be reflected, destination specifying means for performing the specification at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the grant determination (the processing of steps S1104 to S1113 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). Functions to be executed)
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
If the process of the grant determination by the grant determination means and the process that is not subject to the restriction among the specific processes by the destination specifying means are performed within the range of one process of the process for advancement, the restriction target Limiting means for limiting the execution of the processing within the range of the one processing time (function for executing the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A3, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed by the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, if a process that is not subject to restriction among the process of grant determination by the grant determination means and the specific process by the destination specifying means is performed within the range of one processing step of the progress process, Execution of the current process within the range of the one process may be limited. As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the processing for progress is completed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through execution of the special notification while ensuring good execution of the progress processing.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; , The “information acquisition means” is replaced with “a game ball in the starting pitching portion” instead of the “acquisition of special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”. The special information may be acquired based on the fact that the player entered the ball.

  In addition, “restricting execution of a process subject to restriction within the range of the one processing time” is not limited to a configuration that restricts the process subject to restriction to be executed, but is subject to restriction. A configuration is also included in which a part of the various processes that are executed at the time of unrestricted processing is restricted from being executed.

  Feature A4. When the process that is not subject to restriction is performed within the range of one processing time of the progress process, the restriction unit executes the process that is subject to restriction within the range of the one processing time. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the gaming machine is configured not to be played.

  According to the feature A4, since the process that is the restriction target is not executed in the processing times of the progress process in the range in which the process that is not the restriction target is executed, a part of the restriction target process is performed. Compared with the configuration in which the process is executed, the effect of suppressing the time taken to complete one process of the progress process from being prolonged can be enhanced.

  Feature A5. When the process subject to restriction is restricted so as not to be executed within the range of the predetermined process times in the progress process, this restricted process is the process after the next time with respect to the predetermined process times. The game according to Feature A4, comprising post-restricted execution means (a function of executing the processing of Steps S1410 to S1413 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that is executed within a range of times. Machine.

  According to the feature A5, even when the restriction target process is restricted from being executed, the restricted process may be executed later. As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely reduced opportunity for executing the process to be restricted while suppressing an extremely long time until one processing time of the process for progress is completed. be able to.

Feature A6. The restriction target process includes a non-restriction process (step S1804), a restriction process in which a part of the non-restriction process is omitted (steps S1805 to S1813), and Is set,
When the process that is not subject to restriction is performed within the range of one process of the process for advancement, the restriction unit is configured to execute the restriction process as the process that is subject to restriction. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A6, even if the execution of the process that is the restriction target is restricted, the process that is the restriction target omits a part of the process for the normal non-restriction process. It is executed in the state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the advance processing is completed while securing execution of the processing to be restricted to some extent.

Feature A7. The grant determination means is set as a grant determination mode so that the number of grant information as the grant correspondence result is relatively large and small, so that the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively high or low. The high probability mode and the low probability mode are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the restriction means performs the restriction when the grant determination mode is the high probability mode.

  In the high probability mode, the processing time becomes longer in both the grant determination process and the destination specific process than in the low probability mode. In this case, according to the feature A7, the execution of the process that is the restriction target in the high probability mode may be restricted, so that the time until one processing time of the progress process is completed becomes extremely long. Is suppressed. On the other hand, by not performing the above restriction in the low probability mode, it is possible to secure the execution of the restricted process in the low probability mode.

Feature A8. One of the process that is the restriction target and the process that is not the restriction target is the process of the grant determination by the grant determination means, and the other is the specific process by the destination specifying means,
The restriction means acquires the special information by the information acquisition means in a situation where execution of the processing that is not the restriction target is not prevented and the special information is not stored in the acquisition information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, wherein when executed, the execution of the process to be restricted is restricted.

  If special information is newly acquired in a situation where execution of processing that is not subject to restriction is not prevented and special information is not stored in the acquisition information storage means, the process of grant determination and the destination The possibility that a specific process is executed within the range of one process time of the progress process is increased. On the other hand, according to the feature A8, special information is newly acquired in a situation where execution of processing that is not a restriction target is not prevented and special information is not stored in the acquisition information storage unit. In such a case, since the execution of the process that is the restriction target is restricted, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the advance process is completed in such a situation.

Feature A9. When a predetermined restriction condition is established, restriction information (restriction flag) is stored in the restriction information storage means (various flag storage area 234), and when a predetermined restriction release condition is established, the restriction information is stored. A restriction information updating means (a function for executing the processing of step S511 and step S1302 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for deleting the restriction information from the means;
Any of the features A1 to A8, wherein the restriction means restricts execution of the process to be restricted when the restriction information is stored in the restriction information storage means. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A9, it is determined whether or not to restrict the execution of the process to be restricted depending on the presence or absence of the restriction information. Therefore, the processing configuration for performing the restriction can be simplified.

  Feature A10. When the restriction information update unit stores the restriction information in the restriction information storage unit, the restriction information update unit is configured to perform processing times before the processing times of the progress processing in a range corresponding to execution of the processing that is not the restriction target. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the restriction information is stored in the restriction information storage means within a range.

  According to the feature A10, the restriction on the execution of the process to be restricted is started within the range of the process times before the process times of the progress process in the range corresponding to the execution of the process that is not the restriction target. The Thereby, even if it is the structure where the process which is a restriction | limiting object is performed before the process which is not a restriction | limiting object within the range of 1 process time of a process for progress, or it can be performed, it is a restriction | limiting object. Execution of a process that is a restriction target can be restricted within a range of processing times of the process for advancement when no process is performed.

  “The restriction information is stored in the restriction information storage means within the range of the processing times one time before the processing times of the processing for the progress in the range corresponding to the execution of the processing that is not the restriction target.” With the configuration, the above-described effect can be achieved while shortening the period during which the execution of the process that is the restriction target can be restricted.

Feature A11. The process that is the restriction target is not performed before the process that is not the restriction target within the range of one processing time of the progress process,
The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the restriction information update means stores the restriction information in the restriction information storage means when a process that is not subject to restriction is executed.

  According to the feature A11, in the configuration in which the process that is not subject to restriction is not performed before the process that is not subject to restriction within the range of one processing time of the progress process, the process that is not subject to restriction is performed. When the restriction information is stored when it is executed, it is possible to restrict the execution of the process to be restricted thereafter. In particular, according to the present configuration, the period during which execution of the restricted process can be restricted is shortened compared to the configuration in which the restriction information is stored before the non-restricted process is executed. However, the above effects can be achieved.

  Feature A12. When the restriction information update unit deletes the restriction information from the restriction information storage unit, the restriction information update unit is configured to execute a processing process subsequent to the process number of the progress process in a range corresponding to the execution of the process that is not the restriction target. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A11, wherein the restriction information is erased from the restriction information storage means within a range.

  According to the feature A12, the restriction on the execution of the process subject to restriction within the range of the process times after the process times of the process for progress in the range corresponding to the execution of the process not subject to restriction is released. The Thereby, even if it is the structure by which the process which is a restriction | limiting object is performed after the process which is not a restriction | limiting object within the range of 1 process time of a process for progress, or it can be performed, it is not a restriction | limiting object. Execution of a process that is a restriction target can be restricted within a range of processing times of the process for progress when the process is performed.

  In addition, “the restriction information is deleted from the restriction information storage unit within a range of processing times one time after the processing times of the progress processing in the range corresponding to the execution of the processing not subject to restriction” With the configuration, the above-described effect can be achieved while shortening the period during which the execution of the process that is the restriction target can be restricted.

Feature A13. The process that is the restriction target is not performed after the process that is not the restriction target within the range of one processing time of the progress process,
In any one of the features A9 to A11, the restriction information update unit is configured to delete the restriction information from the restriction information storage unit when a process that is not a restriction target is executed. The gaming machine described.

  According to feature A13, in a configuration in which a process that is not subject to restriction is not performed after a process that is not subject to restriction within the range of one processing process of the progress process, a process that is not subject to restriction is executed. In such a case, the restriction information is erased, so that the subsequent execution of the process that is the restriction target is not restricted. In particular, according to the present configuration, even when a process that is not a restriction target is executed, the above-described configuration is such that the restriction information is not erased, while the period during which the execution of the process that is a restriction target can be restricted is shortened. There is an effect.

Feature A14. The progress control means is a periodic process execution means (timer interrupt process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that is started by interrupting the progress process at a predetermined cycle and that executes a periodic process including a plurality of types of processes. Function to execute)
One of the progress process and the regular process includes a process that is not the restriction target, and the other includes the process that is the restriction target. The gaming machine according to any one of A to A13.

  According to the characteristic A14, in the configuration in which one of the progress process and the regular process includes a process that is not a restriction target, and the other includes a process that is a restriction target. Excellent effects such as A1, A2 or A3 can be obtained.

  In the case where the restriction is executed by referring to the restriction information as in the feature A9, even if the structure includes both the progress process and the periodic process, the process to be restricted Execution can be restricted without difficulty.

  Feature A15. Both the process that is not the restriction target and the process that is the restriction target are included as a part of the plurality of types of processes set as the progress process. The gaming machine according to any one of A to A13.

  According to the feature A15, in the configuration in which both the processing that is not the restriction target and the processing that is the restriction target are included as a part of the plurality of types of processing set as the progress processing, Excellent effects such as the characteristics A1, A2 or A3 can be obtained.

  In a configuration in which the progress process is periodically started, if a situation occurs in which the time until one process of the progress process is completed becomes extremely long, a plurality of progress processes are overlapped. In order to prevent the activation process from being started, it is necessary to lengthen the cycle at which the progress process is activated. If it does so, the processing speed in progressing a game will become slow, and it is not preferable. On the other hand, the configuration of the features A1, A2, or A3 is provided, and the execution of the processing to be restricted can be restricted, so that the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature A16. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area, and a game ball provided in the game area and flowing down the game area can enter A first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34),
In a configuration in which the processing for acquiring the special information by the information acquisition unit is executed and the specific processing by the destination specifying unit is executed within a range in which one processing step of the advance processing is performed. Yes,
Further, the information acquisition means acquires the special information based on the game ball entering the first start ball entering part, and that the game ball enters the second start ball entering part. To obtain the special information based on
The destination specifying unit is configured to acquire the special information based on a game ball entering the first start ball entering unit and to acquire the special information based on a game ball ball entering the second start ball entering unit. When both are performed in one processing time of the progress processing, the specific processing is performed for each of the special information in one processing time of the processing for progress. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein:

  In the gaming machine of feature A16, the opportunity to acquire special information is enhanced by providing at least the first start ball entering part and the second start ball entering part as the start ball entering part. In addition, the acquisition of special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting entrance part and the acquisition of special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entrance part are performed once in the process for progress. When the processing is performed in the processing time, the processing for performing the special notification is performed at an early timing by performing the specific processing by the first specifying unit for each of the special information in one processing time of the progress processing. Can be done with.

  However, within the range of one processing round of progress processing, the specific processing acquired based on the entry into the first starting entry part and the entry into the second starting entry part If special processing such as pre-specific processing for special information acquired based on this and special determination processing such as granting determination processing is executed, the time until the processing for the progress of the processing is completed becomes extremely long. There is concern. On the other hand, the configuration of the feature A1, A2, or A3 is provided, and the execution of the process that is the restriction target is restricted in the processing times of the progress process in which the process that is not the restriction target is executed. The occurrence of the inconvenience is suppressed.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Progress control means for controlling the progress of the game (mainly in the first to third embodiments, the normal process in the first to third embodiments, and the timer interrupt process in the fourth to sixth embodiments). MPU 202 of control device 81),
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of step S305 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored or stored in the acquired information storage means is the subject of the grant determination, the predetermined special information is the subject of the grant determination Destination specifying means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1104 to S1113 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for specifying at an earlier timing,
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
When a special process different from the specific process by the destination specifying unit is performed within the range of one processing time of the progress process, execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit in the processing round is limited. Limiting means (functions for executing the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed by the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, when a special process determined in advance within the range of one process time of the progress process is performed, the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying means in the process time may be limited. As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the processing for progress is completed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through execution of the special notification while ensuring good execution of the progress processing.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; , The “information acquisition means” is replaced with “a game ball in the starting pitching portion” instead of the “acquisition of special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”. The special information may be acquired based on the fact that the player entered the ball.

  In addition, “restricting the execution of a specific process by the destination specifying unit in the processing time” includes not only a configuration in which the specific process by the destination specifying unit is not executed, but also a specific process by the destination specifying unit. A configuration is also included in which a part of the various processes that are executed at the time of non-restriction is restricted from being executed.

Feature B2. Progress control means for controlling the progress of the game (mainly in the first to third embodiments, the normal process in the first to third embodiments, and the timer interrupt process in the fourth to sixth embodiments). MPU 202 of control device 81),
Information acquisition means (a function for executing the processing of step S305 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information stored or stored in the acquired information storage means is the subject of the grant determination, the predetermined special information is the subject of the grant determination Destination specifying means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1104 to S1113 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for specifying at an earlier timing,
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
When the grant determination process is performed by the grant determination unit within the range of one processing round of the progress process, a limiting unit (mainly limiting the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit in the process round The function of executing the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B2, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not subject to the grant determination is a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. May be executed by the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, when the grant determination process is performed by the grant determination unit within the range of one processing process of the progress process, the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit in the process round may be limited. . As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the processing for progress is completed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through execution of the special notification while ensuring good execution of the progress processing.

  In particular, since the grant determination is directly linked to the player's profits, all the grant information set for grant determination can be obtained regardless of the processing time until the execution of one process of the progress process is completed. Although it is necessary to refer to it, the previous specification is a process for performing an effect such as special notification, so even if its execution is restricted, it does not affect the player's profit.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; , The “information acquisition means” is replaced with “a game ball in the starting pitching portion” instead of the “acquisition of special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”. The special information may be acquired based on the fact that the player entered the ball.

  In addition, “restricting the execution of a specific process by the destination specifying unit in the processing time” includes not only a configuration in which the specific process by the destination specifying unit is not executed, but also a specific process by the destination specifying unit. A configuration is also included in which a part of the various processes that are executed at the time of non-restriction is restricted from being executed.

Feature B3. Progress control means for controlling the progress of the game (mainly in the first to third embodiments, the normal process in the first to third embodiments, and the timer interrupt process in the fourth to sixth embodiments). MPU 202 of control device 81),
Information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined numerical information from numerical information in a predetermined range as special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (the process of step S305 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). Function to execute)
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
Grant information storage means (presence / absence table storage area 221) for pre-store grant information corresponding to any of the numerical information in the predetermined range;
While determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the additional information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination with respect to a plurality of special information (a function of executing the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being a grant response result that the determination target special information corresponds to the grant information A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
In gaming machines equipped with
The grant information storage means stores a plurality of kinds of grant information that is referred to by the grant determination means in at least a specific situation.
The grant determination means refers to all of the plurality of types of grant information when the grant determination is performed at least in the specific situation, and the special information that is the determination target corresponds to any grant information It is assumed that the result of the grant determination is the grant correspondence result,
Furthermore, by referring to the plurality of types of grant information in the specific situation, a determination result in a case where predetermined special information stored or stored in the acquired information storage means is the subject of the grant determination. In addition to specifying the information to be reflected, destination specifying means for performing the specification at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the grant determination (the processing of steps S1104 to S1113 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81). Functions to be executed)
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
When the grant determination process is performed by the grant determination unit within the range of one processing round of the progress process, a limiting unit (mainly limiting the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit in the process round The function of executing the processing of steps S1101 to S1103 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B3, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. May be executed by the notification means. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, when the grant determination process is performed by the grant determination unit within the range of one processing process of the progress process, the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit in the process round may be limited. . As a result, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the processing for progress is completed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through execution of the special notification while ensuring good execution of the progress processing.

  In particular, since the grant determination is directly linked to the player's profits, all the grant information set for grant determination can be obtained regardless of the processing time until the execution of one process of the progress process is completed. Although it is necessary to refer to it, the previous specification is a process for performing an effect such as special notification, so even if its execution is restricted, it does not affect the player's profit.

  A launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area based on a launch operation by the player, and a start pitching portion provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area; , The “information acquisition means” is replaced with “a game ball in the starting pitching portion” instead of the “acquisition of special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition”. The special information may be acquired based on the fact that the player entered the ball.

  In addition, “restricting the execution of a specific process by the destination specifying unit in the processing time” includes not only a configuration in which the specific process by the destination specifying unit is not executed, but also a specific process by the destination specifying unit. A configuration is also included in which a part of the various processes that are executed at the time of non-limitation is restricted from being executed.

  Feature B4. The restricting means is configured such that, when the process of grant determination by the grant determination means is performed within the range of one processing time of the progress process, the specific process of the destination specifying means is within the range of the one process time. The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or B3, wherein the gaming machine is configured not to be executed.

  According to the feature B4, since the specific process by the destination specifying unit is not executed in the processing times of the progress process in the range in which the process of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is executed, a part of the specific process is executed. As compared with the above configuration, the effect of suppressing the time required for completing one process of the progress process from being prolonged can be enhanced.

  Feature B5. When the specific processing by the destination specifying means is restricted so as not to be executed within the range of the predetermined processing times in the progress processing, the next time for the predetermined processing times with respect to the special information subject to the restriction A post-restriction execution unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S1410 to S1413 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that allows the specific processing by the destination specifying unit to be executed within the range of subsequent processing times is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein

  According to the feature B5, even if the specific process by the destination specifying unit is restricted from being executed, the specific process by the destination specifying unit may be subsequently executed for the special information that is the restriction target. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for executing the specific processing by the first specifying unit from being extremely reduced while suppressing an extremely long time until one processing time of the processing for progress is completed. be able to.

Feature B6. When the restriction means restricts the execution of a specific process by the destination specifying means, the special information subject to restriction regardless of whether or not the special information subject to restriction corresponds to the grant information. Restriction deriving means for deriving a specific result that the information does not correspond to the given information (a function of executing the process of step S1514 after making a negative determination in step S1503 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) is provided. And
In the case where the special information targeted for restriction is specified by the execution means after restriction and the special information targeted for restriction corresponds to the grant information, The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein a correction result (correction command) is derived that the special information corresponds to the provision information.

  According to the feature B6, since the specific result is derived even if the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit is restricted, the process related to the special notification thereafter can be smoothly performed. And since it is not necessary to determine whether or not the special information corresponds to the given information when deriving the specific result, the processing time is not prolonged.

  Furthermore, when the special information subject to restriction is specified by the post-restricting execution means and the special information subject to restriction corresponds to the grant information, the special information is assigned information. A correction result may be derived that corresponds to. Therefore, even if the execution of the special notification is restricted once, it is possible to execute the special notification after that, and the opportunity for executing the special notification is increased.

  Feature B7. The post-restriction execution means is a timing after the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying means is restricted and before the specific process by the destination specifying means is executed for the special information subject to the restriction. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein when the acquisition condition is satisfied, the specific processing by the destination specifying unit is not executed for the special information that is the restriction target .

  According to the feature B7, even when special information that is subject to restriction exists, if special information is newly acquired, the specific information that is subject to restriction is specified in advance. Since the specific process by is not executed, the effect of the feature B5 and the like can be achieved while suppressing the process related to the determination of the specific target by the first specifying unit from being complicated.

Feature B8. As the specific processing by the destination specifying means, non-restriction processing (step S1804 processing), restriction processing in which some of the non-restriction processing are omitted (step S1805 to step S1813 processing) Is set,
The restricting means is configured such that the restricting process among the non-restricting process and the restricting process is performed when the grant determining process by the grant determining means is performed within a range of one processing step of the advance process. The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or B3, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature B8, even when the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit is restricted, the specific process is in a state where a part of the process is omitted from the normal non-restriction process. Executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the advance processing is completed while securing execution of the special notification to some extent.

Feature B9. As the specific processing by the destination specifying means, the non-restriction processing (processing in step S1804) for performing the specification by referring to all of the plurality of types of assignment information at least in the specific situation, and the plural types at least in the specific situation A restriction process (the process in steps S1805 to S1813) for performing the identification with reference to a part of the assigned information is set,
The restricting means is configured such that the restricting process among the non-restricting process and the restricting process is performed when the grant determining process by the grant determining means is performed within a range of one processing step of the advance process. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature B9, even when execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit is restricted, the specific process is executed with reference to some of the plurality of types of assignment information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one processing time of the advance processing is completed while securing execution of the special notification to some extent.

  Furthermore, even if it is special information that the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result by executing a specific process by the destination specifying means with reference to some of the grant information among a plurality of types of grant information, The special notification reflecting the information indicating the result of the provision correspondence is not necessarily performed, but is performed with a predetermined probability. As a result, the special notification reflecting the information indicating that the above-mentioned assignment correspondence result is obtained is naturally irregular, and the manner of special notification is diversified.

Feature B10. The grant determination means is set as a grant determination mode so that the number of grant information as the grant correspondence result is relatively large and small, so that the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively high or low. The high probability mode and the low probability mode are set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B9, wherein the restriction unit performs the restriction when the grant determination mode is the high probability mode.

  In the high probability mode, the processing time becomes longer in both the grant determination process and the destination specific process than in the low probability mode. In this case, according to the feature B10, the execution of the specific process by the first specifying unit may be restricted in the high-probability mode, so that the time until one process of the progress process is completed becomes extremely long. Is suppressed. On the other hand, by not performing the above-described restriction in the low probability mode, it is possible to ensure execution of the specific processing by the first specifying means in the low probability mode.

  Feature B11. In the situation where the execution of the grant determination process by the grant determination unit is not blocked and the special information is not stored in the acquisition information storage unit, the restriction unit is configured to receive the special information by the information acquisition unit. When acquired, the gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B10, characterized in that execution of a specific process by the destination specifying unit for the acquired special information is restricted.

  When special information is newly acquired in a situation in which execution of the process of grant determination is not prevented and special information is not stored in the acquisition information storage means, the process of grant determination and the specific process Is likely to be executed within the range of one process of the process for progress. On the other hand, according to the feature B11, when special information is newly acquired in a situation where execution of the grant determination process is not prevented and special information is not stored in the acquisition information storage unit Since the execution of the specific process by the first specifying unit is restricted, it is possible to suppress an extremely long time until one process of the progress process is completed in such a situation.

Feature B12. When a predetermined restriction condition is established, restriction information (restriction flag) is stored in the restriction information storage means (various flag storage area 234), and when a predetermined restriction release condition is established, the restriction information is stored. A restriction information updating means (a function for executing the processing of step S511 and step S1302 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for deleting the restriction information from the means;
Any of the features B2 to B11, wherein the restriction means restricts execution of the specific process by the destination specifying means when the restriction information is stored in the restriction information storage means. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature B12, whether to limit the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit is determined depending on the presence / absence of the restriction information. Therefore, the processing configuration for performing the restriction can be simplified.

  Feature B13. In the case where the restriction information is stored in the restriction information storage means, the restriction information update unit is configured to execute a processing process prior to the processing times of the progression process in a range corresponding to the execution of the process of the determination by the application determination unit. The game machine according to Feature B12, wherein the restriction information is stored in the restriction information storage means.

  According to the feature B13, the restriction on the execution of the process related to the first specification is started within the range of the process times before the process times of the progress process in the range corresponding to the execution of the process of giving determination. As a result, even in a configuration in which a specific process is performed or can be performed prior to the process of determination of grant within the range of one process of the process of progress, the process for progress when the process of grant determination is performed Execution of the specific process can be restricted within the range of processing times of the process.

  Note that “the restriction information is stored in the restriction information storage means within a range of processing times one time before the processing times of the advance processing in a range corresponding to execution of the grant determination process by the grant determination means. By adopting the configuration, the above effect can be achieved while shortening the period during which the execution of the specific process can be restricted.

Feature B14. Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling the notification means or a different notification means (function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
The grant determination by the grant determination means is set so as not to be executed in a situation where the game turning operation is being performed,
When the game time control means executes a process for ending a game time within the range of one process time of the progress process, the grant determination means determines that the grant is within a range of process times after the one process time. To execute the judgment process,
The restriction information update means stores the restriction information in the restriction information storage means when a process for ending the game times is executed by the game time control means. Game machines.

  According to the feature B14, when the game time control means executes the process of ending the game time within the range of one process time of the progress process, the grant determining means is within the range of the process time after the one process time. In the configuration in which the process of grant determination is executed, the restriction on the execution of the process related to the previous specification is started within the range of the process times prior to the process times of the progress process in the range corresponding to the execution of the process of grant determination be able to.

Feature B15. Prior to the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, a game turning action is started, corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means. The game turn operation of each game time is performed in accordance with the special information stored in the acquired information storage means, with the game result operation being ended as a notification result as one game time. Game time control means for controlling the notification means or a different notification means (function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
The grant determination by the grant determination means is set so as not to be executed in a situation where the game turning operation is being performed,
When the game time control means executes a process for ending a game time within the range of one process time of the progression process, the grant determination means executes the process of the grant determination within the range of the one process time. Is what you get
The restriction information update means sets the restriction information within the range of processing times prior to the processing times of the progression processing in a range in which processing for ending the gaming times is executed by the gaming time control means. The gaming machine according to Feature B13, which is stored in a storage unit.

  In feature B15, when the game time control means executes a process of ending a game time within the range of one process time of the progress process, the grant determination means executes the process of grant determination within the range of the one process time. Since it is a structure to obtain, it becomes possible to shorten the time after one game round is complete | finished until the next game round is started.

  Further, when the game time control means executes the process of ending the game time within the range of one process time of the progress process in this way, the grant determination means executes the process of grant determination within the range of the one process time. Even in such a configuration, the restriction information is stored in the range of the processing times prior to the processing times of the progression processing in the range where the processing for ending the gaming times is executed by the gaming time control means. Therefore, it is possible to start restricting the execution of the process related to the previous specification within the range of the process times prior to the process times of the progress process in the range corresponding to the execution of the process for determining the assignment.

  In addition, in this structure, in the structure provided with the measurement means which measures the end timing of game times, the information measured by the measurement means corresponds to the restriction start timing set as the timing before the end timing. The restriction information update unit may store the restriction information in the restriction information storage unit based on the fact that the information has been changed. In this case, the timing for storing the restriction information can be specified using a configuration for measuring the end timing of the game times.

Feature B16. The specific process by the destination specifying unit is not performed prior to the process of grant determination by the grant determination unit within the range of one processing time of the progress process.
The gaming machine according to Feature B12, wherein the restriction information update means stores the restriction information in the restriction information storage means when a process of grant determination by the grant determination means is executed.

  According to the feature B16, the restriction information is stored when the grant determination process is executed in the configuration in which the specific process is not performed prior to the grant determination process within the range of one process of the advance process. By doing so, it becomes possible to restrict the execution of the process relating to the subsequent specification. In particular, according to the present configuration, the above effect can be achieved while shortening the period during which the execution of the process related to the previous specification can be limited as compared to the configuration in which the limit information is stored before the process of grant determination is executed. Can play.

  Feature B17. In the case where the restriction information updating unit deletes the restriction information from the restriction information storage unit, the processing information after the processing times of the proceeding process in the range corresponding to the execution of the granting determination process by the granting determination unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features B12 to B16, wherein the restriction information is erased from the restriction information storage means within a range of.

  According to the feature B17, the restriction on the execution of the process related to the previous specification is canceled within the range of the process times after the process times of the progress process in the range corresponding to the execution of the process of giving determination. Thereby, even if it is the structure where a specific process is performed or can be performed after the process of grant determination within the range of one process time of the process for progress, the process for progress when the process of grant determination is performed Execution of the processing relating to the previous specification can be restricted within the range of the processing times.

  Note that “the restriction information is erased from the restriction information storage means within a range of processing times one time after the processing times of the advance processing in a range corresponding to execution of the grant determination process by the grant determination means. By adopting the configuration, the above-described effect can be achieved while shortening the period during which the execution of the process related to the previous specification can be restricted.

Feature B18. The specific process by the destination specifying unit is not performed after the process of the grant determination by the grant determination unit within the range of one processing time of the progress process,
Any one of the characteristics B12 to B16, wherein the restriction information update unit is configured to delete the restriction information from the restriction information storage unit when the grant determination process is executed by the grant determination unit. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B18, the restriction information is erased when the grant determination process is executed in a configuration in which the specific process is not performed after the grant determination process within the range of one process of the advance process. As a result, the execution of the process related to the subsequent identification is not restricted. In particular, according to the present configuration, the above-described effect can be achieved while shortening the period during which the execution of the process related to the previous specification can be limited, compared to the configuration in which the restriction information is not erased even if the grant determination process is executed. it can.

Feature B19. The progress control means is a periodic process execution means (timer interrupt process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that is started by interrupting the progress process at a predetermined cycle and that executes a periodic process including a plurality of types of processes. Function to execute)
One of the process for progress and the regular process includes a process for determining the application by the application determining unit, and the other includes a specific process by the destination specifying unit. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 to B18.

  According to the feature B19, in the configuration in which the grant determination process is included in one of the progress process and the regular process and the specific process is included in the other, the feature B2 or B3 is excellent The effect which was able to be produced can be produced.

  In addition, when the specific process is included in the periodic process and the period of the periodic process is shorter than the repetition period of the process for advancement, the process in which the grant determination process is executed in the process for advancement It is assumed that the specific processing is performed a plurality of times within the range of times. Then, it is assumed that the time required for completing one processing step of the processing for progress is extremely long, but the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed by providing the configuration such as the feature B2 or B3. it can.

  Further, when the restriction is executed by referring to the restriction information as in the feature B12, even if the configuration includes both the progress process and the regular process, the process related to the previous specification is executed. It becomes possible to limit without unreasonableness.

  Feature B20. Both the grant determination process by the grant determination unit and the specific process by the destination specifying unit are included as a part of the plurality of types of processes set as the progress process. The gaming machine according to any one of B2 to B18.

  According to the feature B20, in the configuration in which both the assignment determination process and the destination specific process are included as a part of the plurality of types of processes set as the progress process, the feature B2 or B3 or the like An excellent effect can be achieved.

  In a configuration in which the progress process is periodically started, if a situation occurs in which the time until one process of the progress process is completed becomes extremely long, a plurality of progress processes are overlapped. In order to prevent the activation process from being started, it is necessary to lengthen the cycle at which the progress process is activated. If it does so, the processing speed in progressing a game will become slow, and it is not preferable. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature B2 or B3 or the like is provided and the execution of the processing related to the previous specification can be restricted, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature B21. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area, and a game ball provided in the game area and flowing down the game area can enter A first starting ball entering portion (upper working port 33) and a second starting ball entering portion (lower working port 34),
In a configuration in which the processing for acquiring the special information by the information acquisition unit is executed and the specific processing by the destination specifying unit is executed within a range in which one processing step of the advance processing is performed. Yes,
Further, the information acquisition means acquires the special information based on the game ball entering the first start ball entering part, and that the game ball enters the second start ball entering part. To obtain the special information based on
The destination specifying unit is configured to acquire the special information based on a game ball entering the first start ball entering unit and to acquire the special information based on a game ball ball entering the second start ball entering unit. When both are performed in one processing time of the progress processing, the specific processing is performed for each of the special information in one processing time of the processing for progress. The gaming machine according to any one of features B2 to B20, wherein:

  According to the feature B21, since at least the first start ball entering part and the second start ball entering part are provided as the start ball entering part, the opportunity for obtaining the special information is increased. In addition, the acquisition of special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting entrance part and the acquisition of special information based on the entry of the game ball into the second start entrance part are performed once in the process for progress. When the processing is performed in the processing time, the processing for performing the special notification is performed at an early timing by performing the specific processing by the first specifying unit for each of the special information in one processing time of the progress processing. Can be done with.

  However, within the range of one processing round of progress processing, the specific processing acquired based on the entry into the first starting entry part and the entry into the second starting entry part If the specific processing acquired based on the special information obtained based on the processing and the determination processing of the grant are executed, there is a concern that the time until the processing for the progress of the processing is completed becomes extremely long. The On the other hand, the above-described inconvenience is suppressed because the execution of the process for the advance specification is restricted in the processing times of the advance process in which the feature B2 or B3 is provided and the process of giving determination is executed. It is done.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A gaming machine comprising control means (main control device 81, sound lamp control device 82 and display control device 212) for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (in the second embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1405 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81; In the eighth to tenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S2905 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, and in the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth, and seventeenth embodiments, the main controller. A function of executing the process of step S3804 in the MPU 202 of 81, a function of executing the process of step S7405 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the eighteenth embodiment),
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
In addition to determining whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the allocation information, a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination with respect to the special information (function to execute the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
A privilege granting unit (main control device 81) that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. Predetermining means for predetermining (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1407 and steps S1410 to S1413 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, eighth to tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth, eighteenth In the present embodiment, the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 has a function to execute the hold command setting processing and the setting processing at the time of acquisition. In the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments, the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. Function to execute upper hold command setting processing, lower hold command setting processing and setting processing at the time of acquisition) ,
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
With
Regular processing (timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment, normal processing steps S2601 to S2606 and timer interrupt processing in the eighth, tenth, fourteenth and fifteenth embodiments, ninth implementation) Timer interrupt processing in the eleventh embodiment, steps S3901 to S3906 of normal processing and timer interrupt processing in the eleventh embodiment, timer interrupt processing in the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, and normal processing in the sixteenth embodiment. Step S5401 and timer interrupt processing, in the seventeenth embodiment, normal processing step S5501 and timer interrupt processing, and in the eighteenth embodiment, timer interrupt processing) can be executed.
Furthermore, the acquisition process of the special information by the information acquisition means is performed in the regular process,
The destination specifying unit performs at least a part of the destination specifying process for the acquired special information when the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodical process. Is executed after the operation is completed (in the second embodiment, the function of executing step S1413 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, the eighth to tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments). In the embodiment, a function for executing a hold command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, and in the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments, an upper hold command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 and A gaming machine having a function of executing setting processing of a lower hold command.

  According to the feature C1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the determination of the grant is performed before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination of the grant. It may be executed by the notification means at the timing. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, when the special information is acquired in the regular process, at least a part of the specific process for the acquired special information is executed after the regular process is completed. Assuming a configuration in which all of the specific processing is performed in the periodic processing for which special information has been acquired, it is assumed that the time until the periodic processing is completed will be extremely long. There is a possibility that the acquisition process or the like cannot be performed regularly, and the process cannot be suitably performed. On the other hand, as described above, at least a part of the specific process is executed after the periodic process in which the acquisition of the special information is completed, so that the time until the periodic process is completed is extremely long. It is possible to improve the attention level of the game through the execution of the special notification while ensuring the good execution of the regular processing while suppressing the lengthening.

  As described above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C2. The control means is capable of executing the periodic processing and non-periodically predetermined processing (steps S2607 to S2607 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the eighth, tenth, fourteenth and fifteenth embodiments) S2614, step S3411 to step S3417 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the ninth embodiment, step S3907 to step S3917 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the eleventh embodiment, main in the twelfth embodiment. Steps S4711 to S4720 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81, steps S4811 to S4816 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the thirteenth embodiment, and steps S5402 to S4816 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the sixteenth embodiment. S5414, step S5502 to step S5517 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the seventeenth embodiment, and steps S6110 to S6116) in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the eighteenth embodiment. Yes,
Furthermore, the process of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is performed in the regular process,
The game machine according to Feature C1, wherein the post-termination execution means executes at least a part of the first specific process in the predetermined process.

  According to the feature C2, it is possible to perform these processes satisfactorily by performing the special information acquisition process and the grant determination process in the regular process. In this case, the predetermined process executed irregularly has little influence on the progress of the game even if the processing time of one processing time is suddenly increased. By executing at least a part of the specific process in the process, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through the execution of the special notification while improving the progress of the game.

Feature C3. Output means (clock circuit 301 and frequency dividing circuit 302) for outputting a periodic signal that is a periodic signal;
The control means performs the periodic processing based on the periodic signal output from the output means, and repeats the predetermined processing after the periodic processing until the periodic processing based on the next periodic signal is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, characterized in that

  According to the feature C3, at least a part of the specific process is executed in the predetermined process executed between the continuous periodic processes, thereby suppressing the influence on the periodic process and executing the special notification. The degree of attention of the game can be improved.

  Feature C4. The control means executes the periodic process even in the middle of the predetermined process based on the fact that an execution condition for executing the periodic process is satisfied in a situation where the predetermined process is being performed. The gaming machine according to Feature C2 or C3, wherein:

  According to the feature C4, in a configuration in which the periodic process is executed based on the fact that the execution condition is satisfied even during the predetermined process, at least a part of the specific process is executed in the predetermined process. Thus, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the game through the execution of the special notification while suppressing the influence on the start timing of the regular processing.

  Feature C5. The control means is an execution restricting means (eighth, tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth, fifteenth) for restricting the execution of the periodic process when the predetermined process is started by the post-termination execution means in the predetermined process. In the present embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2608, step S2610, step S2611, and step S2614 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, and in the ninth embodiment, step S3411, step S3413 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. The function of executing the processing of step S3414 and step S3417, in the eleventh embodiment, the processing of step S3908, step S3910, step S3911, step S3913, step S3914 and step S3917 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is executed. A function for executing the processing of step S4711, step S4713, step S4714, step S4716, step S4717, and step S4720 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the twelfth embodiment, main control in the sixteenth embodiment. The function of executing the processing of step S5403, step S5405, step S5407, step S5409, step S5411, and step S5414 in the MPU 202 of the device 81, step S5503, step S5505, step in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the seventeenth embodiment A function for executing the processes of S5507, S5509, S5511, S5513, S5515, and S5517; Step in MPU202 of the main control unit 81 in the state S6110, step S6112, the gaming machine according to the features C4, characterized in that it comprises a function of executing the processing of step S6113 and step S6116).

  According to the feature C5, in the configuration in which the periodic process is executed even in the middle of the predetermined process, the preferential execution of the periodic process is prevented from completely hindering the execution of the first specific process. Can do.

Feature C6. The control unit performs a plurality of types of processing in the predetermined processing including the destination specific processing by the post-end execution unit,
The execution restricting means, when the processing at the previous timing among the plurality of types of processing ends in a state that restricts the execution of the periodic processing, the state that is restricted before executing the processing at the next timing. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein the gaming machine is released.

  According to the feature C6, in the configuration in which the periodic process is executed even in the middle of the predetermined process, at least a part of the plurality of types of processes in the predetermined process is executed until the end timing. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the preferential execution of the regular process from hindering the execution of the process. In addition, if the processing at the previous timing ends in a state where the execution of the periodic processing is restricted, the restriction state is released before the processing at the next timing is executed, so the start timing of the periodic processing is extremely It is also possible to suppress the delay.

Feature C7. The plurality of types of processing include update processing (in the eighth, tenth, fourteenth and fifteenth embodiments, which updates predetermined random number information used in the grant determination by the grant determination means or in a predetermined lottery. The function of executing the processing of step S2612 and step S2613 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81, the function of executing the processing of step S3415 and step S3416 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the ninth embodiment, the eleventh embodiment In the twelfth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4718 and S4719 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, the sixteenth implementation. In the form of MPU2 of the main controller 81. 2 for executing the processing of step S5412 and step S5413 in FIG. 2, the function for executing the processing of step S5504 and step S5516 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the seventeenth embodiment, and the main control device in the eighteenth embodiment. 81, the function of executing the processing of step S6114 and step S6115 in the MPU 202).
The execution limiting means limits the execution of the periodic process when the update process is started, and releases the limit when the update process ends. C5 or C6 The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature C7, the excellent effect as described above can be achieved while the random number information can be updated satisfactorily.

Feature C8. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A first start entrance portion (upper operation port 33) and a second start entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
With
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, special information acquired by the information acquisition means on the basis that a game ball has entered the first start entrance part, and the second start entry Special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the part is stored as second special information,
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to perform the grant determination in order from the second special information acquired previously,
The after-execution execution means, when the process for acquiring the first special information is performed by the information acquisition means in the regular process, at least one of the above-mentioned specific processes for the acquired first special information. The first destination specifying process (function to execute the upper pending command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eleventh, twelfth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments) is executed in the predetermined process. In addition, when the process for acquiring the second special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodic process, the second specific information is at least part of the first specific process. 2 destination specifying process (in the eleventh, twelfth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments, the setting process of the lower hold command in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) Is intended to perform the line functions) in the predetermined processing,
The execution restriction unit is a process to be executed later when the process executed first among the first destination specifying process and the second destination specifying process ends in a state where the execution of the periodic process is restricted. The gaming machine according to Feature C6 or C7, wherein the restricted state is released before executing.

  According to the feature C8, the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion are provided as the start ball entering portions that generate an opportunity for acquiring the special information, and the start ball entering that is the trigger for the acquisition. By storing special information separately for the first special information and the second special information according to the ball part, the handling in the gaming machine can be made different between the first special information and the second special information. Become. This makes it possible to diversify the game.

  In this case, since both the first special information and the second special information are targeted for special notification, it is possible to diversify the special notification mode, and to perform the first destination specifying process and the second destination. By executing the specific process as the predetermined process, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing an extremely long time until the regular process is completed.

  Furthermore, since at least one of the first destination specifying process and the second destination specifying process is limited to the execution of the periodic process until the end timing thereof, the priority execution of the periodic process completely obstructs the specific execution. Can be suppressed. Moreover, when the process executed first among the first destination specifying process and the second destination specifying process is ended, the state where the execution of the periodic process is restricted before the process executed later is released. Therefore, it can also be suppressed that the start timing of the regular processing is extremely delayed.

  Feature C9. When the periodic process is executed after one of the first destination specifying process and the second destination specifying process and before the other process, after the execution of the periodic process, the control means Return means for executing the other process at a timing earlier than the one process (function of executing the processes of steps S2701, S2702, S2709 and S2710 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eleventh embodiment) ). The gaming machine according to Feature C8, further comprising:

  According to the feature C9, in the configuration in which the periodic process is executed even in the middle of the predetermined process, the execution frequency of the first destination specifying process and the second destination specifying process is extremely high due to the execution of the periodic process. It is possible to suppress the difference.

  Feature C10. The control means executes the periodic process even in the middle of the destination specific process based on the execution condition being satisfied in the situation where the destination specific process is being executed by the post-end execution means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C4 to C9, characterized in that:

  According to the feature C10, the start of the regular process is prioritized over the execution of the specific process, and the process for executing the special notification is prevented from obstructing the regular execution of the regular process. be able to. Moreover, the special notification through the pre-specified process is used as an effect, and even if the execution of the pre-specified process is interrupted, the influence on the provision of the privilege to the player is small.

  Feature C11. The control means executes the periodic process in the middle of the destination specific process based on the execution condition being satisfied in the situation where the destination specific process is being executed by the post-end execution means. Returning means for returning to the processing after completion of the specific processing in the predetermined processing after execution of the regular processing (processing in steps S4901 to S4906 and steps S4908 to S4909 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) The game machine according to Feature C10, which includes a function of executing

  According to the feature C11, in a configuration in which the periodic process is executed even in the middle of the specific process, information that is in the middle of the process or information used up to the middle is stored during the regular process. There is no need to keep it. Therefore, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described in the feature C10 while reducing the processing load.

Feature C12. The control means includes
When the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit, the acquired special information is stored in order information storage units (eighth, ninth, In the 15th and 18th embodiments, the holding number counter area provided in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81, and in the RAM 204 of the main control device 81 in the 11th to 13th, 16th and 17th embodiments. Upper holding number counter area and lower holding number counter area, hold determination area in the fourteenth embodiment),
In the eighth, ninth, and fifteenth embodiments, the order information update means updates the order information stored in the order information storage means when the assignment determination is made by the assignment determination means. A function of executing the process of step S3106 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81; a function of executing the processes of steps S4007 and S4011 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments; In the fourteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S5106 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, and in the eighteenth embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S7513 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81),
With
The post-termination execution means refers to the information on the order stored in the order information storage means when executing the destination specific processing, so that the provision of the special information as the destination specific target is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, characterized in that information on an order to be determined is derived together with information on the specific identification result.

  According to the feature C12, in a configuration in which special information is acquired in a periodic process, and a specific process is performed for the special information after the periodic process is executed, the special information is acquired and then Even if the assignment determination is made before the specific process is executed, it becomes easy to grasp the special information that is the target of the destination specific process.

  Feature C13. The after-execution executing unit is configured to acquire the information in a situation where the processing for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the regular processing and the specific processing is not performed on the special information. When the process of acquiring the special information is performed by means, at least one of the special information acquired later and the special information acquired later is excluded from the execution target of the specific process The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C12.

  According to the feature C13, there is a concern that the processing load may increase drastically when a plurality of special information is subjected to the execution of a specific process at the same time. Since at least one of the information and the special information acquired later is excluded from the execution target of the first specific process, an extreme increase in the processing load can be suppressed.

Feature C14. The control means includes a first control means (main control device 81) for executing the periodic process and the predetermined process, and a special notification control means and a second communication unit for communicating with the first control means. Control means (sound lamp control device 82 and display control device 212),
The first control means is a first output setting means (second output setting means for setting the output of the first communication information corresponding to the process in which the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means in the periodic process. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1514 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, and in the eighth, ninth, and fifteenth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S3002 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, In the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3602 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. In the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments, the steps S4203 and S4209 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. In the fourteenth embodiment, in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. A function for executing the process of step S5002 in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S7406 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81), and the post-end execution of the special information after the execution of the periodic process. Second output setting means for setting the output of the second communication information corresponding to the specified result when the above-mentioned specific processing is executed by the means (in the second embodiment, step S1608 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) In the eighth to tenth and fifteenth embodiments, the function to execute step S3220 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments. In the embodiment, the processing of step S4311 and step S4410 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is executed. A function for executing the process of step S5206 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S6111 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the eighteenth embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, comprising:

  According to the feature C14, the function of executing the periodic process and the specific process is performed by the first control unit, and the function of executing the special notification is performed by the second control unit. Therefore, the processing load can be distributed. It becomes possible. In this case, when the special information is acquired, the first communication information corresponding to the special information is output to the second control means, and when the first specific process is executed, the second communication information corresponding to the first communication information is output to the second control means. Therefore, in the configuration in which the special information is acquired by the periodic process and the specific process for the special information is executed after the execution of the periodic process, the second control unit preferably acquires each information. Can be done at the timing.

The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the first communication information, special information number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means (in the second embodiment, in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) A function for executing the process of step S1702, a function for executing the process of step S3302 in the MPU 252 of the display control apparatus 212 in the eighth to tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments; In the sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S4502 and S4602 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
Based on the grasp result of the special information number grasping means, the notification executing means for notifying the number of the special information by the notifying means or a different means (in the second embodiment, the step in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) A function for executing the processing of S1707; in the eighth to tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of step S3308 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212; 16, in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4509 and step S4608 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
With
Further, the special notification control means may be configured to execute a special notification of contents corresponding to the second communication information based on the reception of the second communication information.

Feature C15. The information acquisition means acquires predetermined numerical information from numerical information in a predetermined range as the special information based on the acquisition condition being satisfied,
The grant information corresponds to any of the predetermined range of numerical information,
As the mode of the grant determination in the grant determination unit, the probability of the grant correspondence result is relative because the number of grant information referred to in the grant determination is set to be relatively large and small. High probability mode and low probability mode are set to
In the case where the grant determination mode is the high probability mode and the destination specifying process is executed, the destination specifying means includes the special information that is the target of the destination specification, and each grant information corresponding to the high probability mode. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C14, wherein the game machine is a collation with the game machine.

  According to the feature C15, in the high probability mode, the processing time of the grant determination process is increased as compared to the low probability mode, and the processing time of the first specific process is also increased. In this case, if it is attempted to perform both of the determination processing and the specific processing within the range of the periodic processing, there is a concern that the time until the periodic processing is completed becomes extremely long. On the other hand, since it has the configuration of the feature C1 and at least a part of the specific processing is executed after the periodic processing is executed, the special notification is performed while ensuring good execution of the periodic processing. It is possible to improve the attention level of the game through execution.

Feature C16. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A first start entrance portion (upper operation port 33) and a second start entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
With
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, special information acquired by the information acquisition means on the basis that a game ball has entered the first start entrance part, and the second start entry Special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the part is stored as second special information,
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. The second special information acquired previously performs the grant determination in order,
When the process for acquiring the first special information is performed by the information acquiring unit, the destination specifying unit performs the target specifying process for the acquired first special information, and the information acquiring unit When the process for acquiring the second special information is performed, the first specific process is executed for the acquired second special information,
The periodic processing in which the post-end execution means performs processing for obtaining the special information for at least one of the destination specific processing for the first special information and the destination specific processing for the second special information. The game machine according to Feature C15, which is executed after the game is completed.

  According to the feature C16, the first start entrance portion and the second start entrance portion are provided as the start entrance portions that generate an opportunity for acquiring the special information, and the start entrance that triggered the acquisition is provided. By storing special information separately for the first special information and the second special information according to the ball part, the handling in the gaming machine can be made different between the first special information and the second special information. Become. This makes it possible to diversify the game.

  In this case, both the first special information and the second special information are subject to special notification, so that it is possible to diversify the special notification mode, and the specific processing for the first special information. And at least one of the specific processes for the second special information is executed after the regular process in which the process for acquiring the special information is completed, so that the time until the regular process is completed becomes extremely long. It is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while suppressing the occurrence of this.

Feature C17. An acceptance control means capable of switching the second starting entrance part between a non-accepting state in which a game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and an accepting state in which a game ball is easier to enter. A function of executing the power support process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The acceptance control means is set as a control mode of the second starting and entering part, a first mode and a second mode that is more likely to be in the acceptance state than the first mode,
Furthermore, when the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at an earlier timing than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored. Priority means (a function of executing the processing of step S4101 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) so that the grant determination is performed;
In the second mode of the first mode and the second mode, notification execution limiting means (in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for limiting the execution of the special notification for the first special information. A function of executing the process of step S4304, a function of executing the process of step S4508 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
The gaming machine according to Feature C16, comprising:

  According to the feature C17, the second special information is prioritized over the first special information in the assignment determination. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations will increase the level of attention of the game.

  Furthermore, when it is the second mode in which the second starting ball entering portion is likely to be in the receiving state, it is limited that the special notification is executed for the first special information. Assuming a configuration in which special notification is performed at a predetermined frequency for the first special information in a situation in which a ball entering the second starting ball entering portion, which is a priority side at the time of grant determination, is likely to occur, the first special information In spite of the special notification being made, the entry to the second starting entrance portion continues at a timing before the first special information is subject to the grant determination, and the first notification related to the special notification is made. It is assumed that the timing at which the special information is subjected to determination is delayed with respect to the start timing of the special notification. In that case, for example, it may be difficult to understand which special information is targeted for special notification. On the other hand, in order to clarify it, the notification mode of special notification may be restricted. On the other hand, in the second mode as described above, the attention degree of the game is suppressed while restricting the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience by restricting the execution of the special notification for the first special information. Can be increased.

Feature C18. The control means is capable of executing the periodic process and is capable of executing a predetermined process non-periodically, and further, in the predetermined process, executing the specified process by the post-end execution means In addition, an update process (step S5504 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the seventeenth embodiment) is executed for updating predetermined random number information used for performing the grant determination by the grant determining means. ,
A configuration in which the periodic process can be started even in the middle of the predetermined process, and the update process is executed before the specific process in the predetermined process after the execution of the periodic process The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C17, wherein:

  According to the feature C18, by updating the random number information in a predetermined process, the update can be performed irregularly, which is a countermeasure against fraud. In this case, in the predetermined process after the execution of the periodic process, the update process is executed before the specific process, so that the function of the update process executed for fraud countermeasures is for production. It is possible to suppress obstruction due to the specific processing executed earlier.

Feature C19. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A first start entrance portion (upper operation port 33) and a second start entrance portion (lower operation port 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls flowing down the game area;
With
The acquired information storage means stores, as first special information, special information acquired by the information acquisition means on the basis that a game ball has entered the first start entrance part, and the second start entry Special information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the game ball entering the part is stored as second special information,
In the case where a plurality of the first special information is stored, the grant determination means performs the grant determination in order from the first special information acquired in advance, and a plurality of the second special information is stored. Is to perform the grant determination in order from the second special information acquired previously,
When the second special information is stored, even if the first special information acquired at a timing earlier than the stored second special information is stored, the second special information is stored in the second special information. Priority means (function to execute the process of step S4101 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) is provided so that the grant determination is performed,
The control means is capable of executing the periodic process and capable of executing a predetermined process non-periodically,
When the process for acquiring the first special information is performed by the information acquiring unit, the destination specifying unit performs the target specifying process for the acquired first special information, and the information acquiring unit When the process for acquiring the second special information is performed, the first specific process is executed for the acquired second special information,
The after-execution execution means, when the process for acquiring the first special information is performed by the information acquisition means in the regular process, at least one of the above-mentioned specific processes for the acquired first special information. The first destination specifying process (function for executing the upper pending command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments) is executed in the predetermined process, and the periodic process When the process of acquiring the second special information is performed by the information acquisition means, a second destination specifying process (second order) that is at least a part of the destination specifying process for the acquired second special information 16, the function of executing the setting process of the lower hold command in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the seventeenth embodiment) is the predetermined process. Is intended to run you are,
The periodic process can be started even in the middle of the predetermined process. In the predetermined process after the execution of the periodic process, the second destination specifying process is performed before the first destination specifying process. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be executed.

  According to the feature C19, the second special information has priority over the first special information in the determination of grant. As a result, the launch operation is performed in anticipation of entering the first starting entrance section in accordance with the game situation or the like, and the launch operation is performed in expectation of entering the second start entrance section. Diversification of expectations for operations will increase the level of attention of the game.

  In this case, since the second destination specifying process is executed earlier than the first destination specifying process in the predetermined process, it is possible to give priority to the second special information that is prioritized in the grant determination also in the destination specifying. It can suppress that the execution frequency of the specific process with respect to 2nd special information falls extremely.

Feature C20. A launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting entrance portion (upper operating port 33 or lower operating port 34) provided in the gaming area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area;
Detection means (detection sensor 211c or detection sensor 211d) for detecting a game ball that has entered the starting entrance portion;
With
The information acquisition means acquires the special information on the assumption that the acquisition condition is satisfied based on confirming that the detection result of the detection means is a detection result corresponding to detection of a game ball a plurality of times. In addition, it is a configuration that needs to execute the periodic processing a specific number of times at a minimum from the acquisition of one special information based on the detection result of the detection means to the acquisition of the next special information,
Same as the special information by the information acquisition unit in a situation where the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodic process and the specific process is not performed on the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C19, wherein an execution cycle of the specific multiple times and the periodic process is set so that special information of a type is not acquired.

  According to the feature C20, even if it is once confirmed that the detection result of the detection unit is the detection result corresponding to the detection of the game ball, the special information is not acquired immediately, but the detection result Since special information is acquired when it has been confirmed multiple times, the possibility of special information being acquired due to the influence of noise is reduced. Furthermore, in this configuration, by using a configuration that reduces the influence of such noise, it is possible to prevent a plurality of pieces of the same type of special information from waiting as the execution target of the first specific process. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the specific processing while reducing the influence of the noise.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A gaming machine comprising control means (main control device 81, sound lamp control device 82 and display control device 212) for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing the process of step S2905 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the fourteenth embodiment);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
In addition to determining whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the allocation information, a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination with respect to the special information (function to execute the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
A privilege granting unit (main control device 81) that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means (a function of executing a hold command setting process and a setting process at the time of acquisition in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the fourteenth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
With
Regular processing (steps S2601 to S2606 of normal processing and timer interrupt processing in the fourteenth embodiment) can be executed periodically, and predetermined processing (fourteenth embodiment) is performed between a plurality of periodic processings. In the embodiment, step S2607 to step S2614) in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 are repeatedly performed.
Furthermore, the acquisition process of the special information by the information acquisition means is performed in the regular process,
The destination specifying unit performs at least a part of the destination specifying process for the acquired special information when the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodical process. And a post-end execution means (function to execute a hold command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the fourteenth embodiment) executed in the predetermined process after the
The after-execution means is configured to acquire the information in a situation where the processing for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition means in the regular processing and the specific processing is not performed on the special information. When the process for obtaining the special information is performed by the means, in the one-time specific process in the predetermined process, not all of the special information is a process execution target but only a part of the process execution target And
A gaming machine characterized by being configured to allow execution of the periodic process when the execution of the specific process for which only a part of the process is targeted is completed.

  According to the feature D1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the grant determination is performed before the predetermined special information is the target of the grant determination. It may be executed by the notification means at the timing. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, when the special information is acquired in the regular process, at least a part of the specific process for the acquired special information is executed after the regular process is completed. Assuming a configuration in which all of the specific processing is performed in the periodic processing for which special information has been acquired, it is assumed that the time until the periodic processing is completed will be extremely long. There is a possibility that the acquisition process or the like cannot be performed regularly, and the process cannot be suitably performed. On the other hand, as described above, at least a part of the specific process is executed after the periodic process in which the acquisition of the special information is completed, so that the time until the periodic process is completed is extremely long. It is possible to improve the attention level of the game through the execution of the special notification while ensuring the good execution of the regular processing while suppressing the lengthening.

  In addition, the degree of attention of the game through the execution of special notification while suppressing the influence on the periodic processing by executing at least a part of the specific processing in the predetermined processing executed between the continuous periodic processing Can be improved.

  Furthermore, in one specific process of a predetermined process, not all of the special information is a process execution target, but only a part is a process execution target, and only that part is a process execution target. The configuration is such that the periodic process can be executed when the execution of the specific process is completed. Thereby, even if the specific process is performed in a predetermined process, it is suppressed that the periodic execution of the regular process is inhibited.

  As described above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D2. A gaming machine comprising control means (main control device 81, sound lamp control device 82 and display control device 212) for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (a function of executing the process of step S2905 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the fourteenth embodiment);
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
In addition to determining whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the allocation information, a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination with respect to the special information (function to execute the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
A privilege granting unit (main control device 81) that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means (a function of executing a hold command setting process and a setting process at the time of acquisition in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the fourteenth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
With
Regular processing (steps S2601 to S2606 of normal processing and timer interrupt processing in the fourteenth embodiment) can be executed periodically, and predetermined processing (fourteenth embodiment) is performed between a plurality of periodic processings. In the embodiment, step S2607 to step S2614) in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 are repeatedly performed.
Furthermore, the acquisition process of the special information by the information acquisition means is performed in the regular process,
The destination specifying unit performs at least a part of the destination specifying process for the acquired special information when the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodical process. And a post-end execution means (function to execute a hold command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the fourteenth embodiment) executed in the predetermined process after the
The after-execution means is configured to acquire the information in a situation where the processing for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition means in the regular processing and the specific processing is not performed on the special information. When the process for obtaining the special information is performed by the means, the special information is set as the execution target of the first specific process in the range until the special determination is performed, and the special process is performed once in the predetermined process. In the above-mentioned specific process, not all of the special information is a process execution target, but only a part is a process execution target,
A gaming machine characterized by being configured to allow execution of the periodic process when the execution of the specific process for which only a part of the process is targeted is completed.

  According to the feature D2, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the subject of the grant determination is performed before the predetermined special information is the subject of the grant determination. It may be executed by the notification means at the timing. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, when the special information is acquired in the regular process, at least a part of the specific process for the acquired special information is executed after the regular process is completed. Assuming a configuration in which all of the specific processing is performed in the periodic processing for which special information has been acquired, it is assumed that the time until the periodic processing is completed will be extremely long. There is a possibility that the acquisition process or the like cannot be performed regularly, and the process cannot be suitably performed. On the other hand, as described above, at least a part of the specific process is executed after the periodic process in which the acquisition of the special information is completed, so that the time until the periodic process is completed is extremely long. It is possible to improve the attention level of the game through the execution of the special notification while ensuring the good execution of the regular processing while suppressing the lengthening.

  In addition, the degree of attention of the game through the execution of special notification while suppressing the influence on the periodic processing by executing at least a part of the specific processing in the predetermined processing executed between the continuous periodic processing Can be improved.

  In the configuration in which at least a part of the specific process is executed in the predetermined process, the process for acquiring the special information is performed in the regular process and the specific process is performed on the special information. In some situations, special information may be newly acquired. In this case, since the special information is configured to be the target of execution of the specific process in the range up to the target of the determination of assignment, the possibility that the execution frequency of the specific process will be extremely reduced is reduced. However, an excellent effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, in one specific process of a predetermined process, not all of the special information is a process execution target, but only a part is a process execution target, and only that part is a process execution target. The configuration is such that the periodic process can be executed when the execution of the specific process is completed. Thereby, even if the specific process is performed in a predetermined process, it is suppressed that the periodic execution of the regular process is inhibited.

  As described above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature D3. The control means includes
Order information storage means (in the fourteenth embodiment) for storing the information of the order in which the acquired special information is subject to the grant determination when the process of acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition means Hold judgment area),
Order information update means for updating the order information stored in the order information storage means when the assignment determination is made by the assignment determination means (in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the fourteenth embodiment) The function of executing the process of step S5106),
With
The post-termination execution means refers to the information on the order stored in the order information storage means when executing the destination specific processing, so that the provision of the special information as the destination specific target is performed. The gaming machine according to the feature D1 or D2, characterized in that information on an order to be determined is derived together with information on the specific result of the destination.

  According to the feature D3, in the configuration in which the special information is acquired in the periodic process and the specific process is performed for the special information after the periodic process is performed, the special information is acquired first. Even if the assignment determination is made before the specific process is executed, it becomes easy to grasp the special information that is the target of the destination specific process.

Feature D4. The control means includes a first control means (main control device 81) for executing the periodic process and the predetermined process, and a special notification control means and a second communication unit for communicating with the first control means. Control means (sound lamp control device 82 and display control device 212),
The first control means, when the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition means in the periodic process, is a first output setting means (14th output setting) for setting the output of the first communication information corresponding thereto. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S5002 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) and when the above-mentioned specific process is executed by the post-end execution means for the special information after the execution of the periodic process. Second output setting means (in the fourteenth embodiment, the function of executing step S5206 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) for setting the output of the second communication information corresponding to the specified result. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

  According to the feature D4, the function of executing the periodic process or the specific process is performed by the first control unit, and the function of executing the special notification is performed by the second control unit. It becomes possible. In this case, when the special information is acquired, the first communication information corresponding to the special information is output to the second control means, and when the first specific process is executed, the second communication information corresponding to the first communication information is output to the second control means. Therefore, in the configuration in which the special information is acquired by the periodic process and the specific process for the special information is executed after the execution of the periodic process, the second control unit preferably acquires each information. Can be done at the timing.

The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the first communication information, special information number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means (the process of step S3302 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is executed). Function)
Based on the grasping result of the special information number grasping means, the notifying means for notifying the number of the special information by the notifying means or a different means (function of executing step S3308 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) )When,
With
Further, the special notification control means may be configured to execute a special notification of contents corresponding to the second communication information based on the reception of the second communication information.

  Note that the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C20 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D3. In this case, a synergistic effect can be achieved by applying each configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A gaming machine comprising control means (main control device 81, sound lamp control device 82 and display control device 212) for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information (holding information) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (in the second embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S1405 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81; In the eighth to tenth, fourteenth, and fifteenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of step S2905 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, and in the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth, and seventeenth embodiments, the main controller. A function of executing the process of step S3804 in the MPU 202 of 81, a function of executing the process of step S7405 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the eighteenth embodiment),
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
In addition to determining whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the allocation information, a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination with respect to the special information (function to execute the determination process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
A privilege granting unit (main control device 81) that grants a privilege to a player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. Predetermining means for predetermining (in the second embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S1407 and steps S1410 to S1413 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, eighth to tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth, eighteenth In the present embodiment, the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 has a function to execute the hold command setting processing and the setting processing at the time of acquisition. In the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments, the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. Function to execute upper hold command setting processing, lower hold command setting processing and setting processing at the time of acquisition) ,
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means (function to execute the hold notice control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
With
Regular processing (timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment, normal processing steps S2601 to S2606 and timer interrupt processing in the eighth, tenth, fourteenth and fifteenth embodiments, ninth implementation) Timer interrupt processing in the eleventh embodiment, steps S3901 to S3906 of normal processing and timer interrupt processing in the eleventh embodiment, timer interrupt processing in the twelfth and thirteenth embodiments, and normal processing in the sixteenth embodiment. Step S5401 and timer interrupt processing, in the seventeenth embodiment, normal processing step S5501 and timer interrupt processing, and in the eighteenth embodiment, timer interrupt processing) can be executed.
Furthermore, the acquisition process of the special information by the information acquisition means is performed in the regular process,
The destination specifying unit performs at least a part of the destination specifying process for the acquired special information when the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodical process. Is executed after the operation is completed (in the second embodiment, the function of executing step S1413 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, the eighth to tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments). In the embodiment, a function for executing a hold command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, and in the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments, an upper hold command setting process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 and The function to execute the setting process of the lower hold command)
Further, the control means includes a first control means (main control device 81) that executes the periodic process and the specific process, and the special notification control means, and communicates with the first control means. Second control means (sound lamp control device 82 and display control device 212) to perform,
The first control means is a first output setting means (second output setting means for setting output of the first communication information corresponding to a case where the special information is acquired by the information acquisition means in the periodic processing. In the embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S1514 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, and in the eighth, ninth, and fifteenth embodiments, the function of executing the process of step S3002 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81, In the tenth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3602 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. In the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments, the steps S4203 and S4209 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. In the fourteenth embodiment, in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81. A function for executing the process of step S5002 in the eighteenth embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S7406 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81), and the post-end execution of the special information after the execution of the periodic process. Second output setting means for setting the output of the second communication information corresponding to the specified result when the above-mentioned specific processing is executed by the means (in the second embodiment, step S1608 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) In the eighth to tenth and fifteenth embodiments, the function to execute step S3220 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, the eleventh to thirteenth, sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments. In the embodiment, the processing of step S4311 and step S4410 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 is executed. A function for executing the process of step S5206 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S6111 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81 in the eighteenth embodiment. A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the characteristic E1, the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage unit and is not the target of the determination of the grant is before the predetermined special information is the target of the determination of the grant. It may be executed by the notification means at the timing. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the order for which the determination of grant is made becomes the target of the grant determination for the later special information is special. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the notification is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the attention degree of a game can be raised.

  In this case, when the special information is acquired in the regular process, at least a part of the specific process for the acquired special information is executed after the regular process is completed. Assuming a configuration in which all of the specific processing is performed in the periodic processing for which special information has been acquired, it is assumed that the time until the periodic processing is completed will be extremely long. There is a possibility that the acquisition process or the like cannot be performed regularly, and the process cannot be suitably performed. On the other hand, as described above, at least a part of the specific process is executed after the periodic process in which the acquisition of the special information is completed, so that the time until the periodic process is completed is extremely long. It is possible to improve the attention level of the game through the execution of the special notification while ensuring the good execution of the regular processing while suppressing the lengthening.

  In addition, since the function of executing the periodic process and the specific process is performed by the first control unit and the function of executing the special notification is performed by the second control unit, it is possible to distribute the processing load. In this case, when the special information is acquired, the first communication information corresponding to the special information is output to the second control means, and when the first specific process is executed, the second communication information corresponding to the first communication information is output to the second control means. Therefore, in the configuration in which the special information is acquired by the periodic process and the specific process for the special information is executed after the execution of the periodic process, the second control unit preferably acquires each information. Can be done at the timing.

  As described above, it is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. The second control means includes
Based on the reception of the first communication information, special information number grasping means for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means (in the second embodiment, in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) A function for executing the process of step S1702, a function for executing the process of step S3302 in the MPU 252 of the display control apparatus 212 in the eighth to tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments; In the sixteenth and seventeenth embodiments, the function of executing the processing of steps S4502 and S4602 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
Based on the grasp result of the special information number grasping means, the notification executing means for notifying the number of the special information by the notifying means or a different means (in the second embodiment, the step in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) A function for executing the processing of S1707; in the eighth to tenth, fourteenth, fifteenth and eighteenth embodiments, a function for executing the processing of step S3308 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212; 16, in the seventeenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4509 and step S4608 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
With
The game according to Feature E1, wherein the special notification control means is configured to execute a special notification of contents corresponding to the second communication information based on the reception of the second communication information. Machine.

  According to the feature E2, it is possible to appropriately execute the special notification while allowing the notification of the number of special information based on the control of the second control unit to be appropriately executed.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 33 ... Upper operation port, 34 ... Lower operation port, 53 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 81 ... Main control device, 202 ... MPU, 203 ... ROM, 204 ... RAM, 212 ... Display control device, 221 ... Appropriate / unnecessary table storage area, 232 ... reserved ball storage area, 252 ... MPU.

Claims (4)

A gaming machine provided with a control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
In addition to determining whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the allocation information, a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information;
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. Pre-identification means for pre-identification;
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means to
With
Regular processing can be performed periodically, and predetermined processing is repeated between multiple periodic processing.
Furthermore, the acquisition process of the special information by the information acquisition means is performed in the regular process,
The destination specifying unit performs at least a part of the destination specifying process for the acquired special information when the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodical process. Comprising post-end execution means for executing in the predetermined processing after the
The after-execution means is configured to acquire the information in a situation where the processing for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition means in the regular processing and the specific processing is not performed on the special information. When the process for obtaining the special information is performed by the means, in the one-time specific process in the predetermined process, not all of the special information is a process execution target but only a part of the process execution target And
A gaming machine characterized by being configured to allow execution of the periodic process when the execution of the specific process for which only a part of the process is targeted is completed. A gaming machine provided with a control means for controlling the progress of the game,
The control means includes
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
In addition to determining whether the special information stored in the acquisition information storage unit corresponds to the allocation information, a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage unit. Grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the special information;
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant correspondence result corresponding to the grant information;
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. Pre-identification means for pre-identification;
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means to
With
Regular processing can be performed periodically, and predetermined processing is repeated between multiple periodic processing.
Furthermore, the acquisition process of the special information by the information acquisition means is performed in the regular process,
The destination specifying unit performs at least a part of the destination specifying process for the acquired special information when the process for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition unit in the periodical process. Comprising post-end execution means for executing in the predetermined processing after the
The after-execution means is configured to acquire the information in a situation where the processing for acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition means in the regular processing and the specific processing is not performed on the special information. When the process for obtaining the special information is performed by the means, the special information is set as the execution target of the first specific process in the range until the special determination is performed, and the special process is performed once in the predetermined process. In the above-mentioned specific process, not all of the special information is a process execution target, but only a part is a process execution target,
A gaming machine characterized by being configured to allow execution of the periodic process when the execution of the specific process for which only a part of the process is targeted is completed. The control means includes
Order information storage means for storing information on the order in which the acquired special information is subject to the grant determination when the process of acquiring the special information is performed by the information acquisition means;
Order information updating means for updating the information of the order stored in the order information storage means when the grant determination by the grant determination means is performed;
With
The post-termination execution means refers to the information on the order stored in the order information storage means when executing the destination specific processing, so that the provision of the special information as the destination specific target is performed. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the information on the order to be determined is derived together with information on the specific result of the destination. The control means includes a first control means for executing the periodic process and the predetermined process, and a second control means having the special notification control means and communicating with the first control means. ,
The first control unit includes a first output setting unit configured to perform output setting of the first communication information corresponding to the processing in which the special information is acquired by the information acquisition unit in the periodic processing, and the periodic control Second output setting means for performing output setting of the second communication information corresponding to the specified result when the specific process is executed by the post-end execution means for the special information after execution of the process. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is provided.

Images